Download 8510C Network Analyzer On-Site Service Manual

Agilent Technologies
8510C Network Analyzer
On-Site Service Manual
Serial Numbers
This manual applies directly to instruments with
this serial prefix number or above: 3031A.
Manufacturing Part Number: 08510-90282
Printed in USA
May 2001
Revision 3.0
Supersedes: January 1994
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or
for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or
use of this material.
Agilent Technologies assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on
equipment that is not furnished by Agilent Technologies.
This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights
are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to
another language without prior written consent of Agilent Technologies.
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth
in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
DFARS 252.227-7013 for DOD agencies, and subparagraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of the
Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 for other
agencies.
Agilent Technologies
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway
Santa Rosa, CA 95403-1799, U.S.A.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
© Copyright Agilent Technologies 1994, 2001
ii
Contacting Agilent
Any adjustment, maintenance, or repair of this product must be performed by qualified
personnel. Contact Agilent by internet, phone, or fax to get assistance with all your test
and measurement needs.
Online assistance: www.agilent.com/find/assist
United States
(tel) 1 800 452 4844
Latin America
(tel) (305) 269 7500
(fax) (305) 269 7599
Canada
(tel) 1 877 894 4414
(fax) (905) 282-6495
Europe
(tel) (+31) 20 547 2323
(fax) (+31) 20 547 2390
New Zealand
(tel) 0 800 738 378
(fax) (+64) 4 495 8950
Japan
(tel) (+81) 426 56 7832
(fax) (+81) 426 56 7840
Australia
(tel) 1 800 629 485
(fax) (+61) 3 9210 5947
Singapore
(tel) 1 800 375 8100
(fax) (65) 836 0252
Malaysia
(tel) 1 800 828 848
(fax) 1 800 801 664
Philippines
(tel) (632) 8426802
(tel) (PLDT subscriber only):
1 800 16510170
(fax) (632) 8426809
(fax) (PLDT subscriber only):
1 800 16510288
Thailand
(tel) outside Bangkok:
(088) 226 008
(tel) within Bangkok:
(662) 661 3999
(fax) (66) 1 661 3714
Hong Kong
(tel) 800 930 871
(fax) (852) 2506 9233
Taiwan
(tel) 0800-047-866
(fax) (886) 2 25456723
People’s Republic of
China
(tel) (preferred):
800-810-0189
(tel) (alternate):
10800-650-0021
(fax) 10800-650-0121
India
(tel) 1-600-11-2929
(fax) 000-800-650-1101
iii
Safety and Regulatory Information
Review this product and related documentation to familiarize yourself with safety
markings and instructions before you operate the instrument. This product has been
designed and tested in accordance with international standards.
WARNING
The WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a
procedure, practice, or the like, that, if not correctly performed
or adhered to, could result in personal injury. Do not proceed
beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are
fully understood and met.
CAUTION
The CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an
operating procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in damage to the product or loss of
important data. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the
indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Instrument Markings
When you see this symbol on your instrument, you should refer to the
instrument’s instruction manual for important information.
This symbol indicates hazardous voltages.
The C-tick is a registered trademark of the Australian Spectrum
Mangagement Agency.
This symbol indicates that the instrument requires alternating current (ac)
input.
The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. If it is
accompanied by a year, it indicates the year the design was proven.
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards
Association.
1SM1-A
This text indicates that the instrumentis an Industrial Scientific and Medical
Group 1 Class A product (CISPER 11, Clause 4).
This symbol indicates that the power line switch is ON.
This symbol indicates that the power line switch is OFF or in STANDBY
position.
iv
Safety Earth Ground
This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing terminal). An
uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main power source to the
product input wiring terminals, power cord, or supplied power cord set. Whenever it is
likely that the protection has been impaired, the product must be made inoperative and
secured against any unintended operation.
Before Applying Power
Verify that the product is configured to match the available main power source as
described in the input power configuration instructions in this manual. If this product is to
be powered by autotransformer, make sure the common terminal is connected to the
neutral (grounded) side of the ac power supply.
Battery Information
The 8510C uses a lithium polycarbon monoflouride battery to power the instrument clock.
The battery is located on the A7 I/O board of the 85101C display/processor. This battey is
not field replaceable. Replace the A7 I/O board if the battery requires replacement.
WARNING
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended. Discard
used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
v
Typeface Conventions
Italics
• Used to emphasize important information:
Use this software only with the Agilent Technologies xxxxxX system.
• Used for the title of a publication:
Refer to the Agilent Technologies xxxxxX System-Level User’s Guide.
• Used to indicate a variable:
Type LOAD BIN filename.
Instrument Display
• Used to show on-screen prompts and messages that you will see on the display of an
instrument:
The Agilent Technologies xxxxxX will display the message CAL1 SAVED.
Keycap
• Used for labeled keys on the front panel of an instrument or on a
computer keyboard:
Press Return.
[Softkey]
• Used for simulated keys that appear on an instrument display:
Press [Prior Menu].
User Entry
• Used to indicate text that you will enter using the computer keyboard; text shown in
this typeface must be typed exactly as printed:
Type LOAD PARMFILE
• Used for examples of programming code:
#endif//ifndef NO_CLASS
Path name
• Used for a subdirectory name or file path:
Edit the file usr/local/bin/sample.txt
Computer Display
• Used to show messages, prompts, and window labels that appear on a computer
monitor:
The Edit Parameters window will appear on the screen.
• Used for menus, lists, dialog boxes, and button boxes on a computer monitor from which
you make selections using the mouse or keyboard:
Double-click EXIT to quit the program.
vi
Hewlett-Packard to Agilent Technologies Transition
This documentation supports a product that previously shipped under the
Hewlett-Packard company brand name. The brand name has now been changed to Agilent
Technologies. The two products are functionally identical, only our name has changed. The
document still includes references to Hewlett-Packard products, some of which have been
transitioned to Agilent Technologies.
vii
viii
Contents
1. Service and Equipment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
On-Site Service Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Service and Equipment Overview (Chapter 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Safety/Licensing (Chapter 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Theory of Operation (Chapter 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Main Troubleshooting Procedure (Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Replaceable Parts (Chapter 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Replacement Procedures (Chapter 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Adjustments (Chapter 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Specifications and Performance Verification (Chapter 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Installation (Chapter 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Preventive Maintenance (Chapter 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Definition of an 8510 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Service Tools Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Table of Service Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
2. Safety/Licensing
8510 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Hazardous Instrument Areas with Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Compliance with Canadian EMC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
3. Theory of Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
The Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Synthesized Sweepers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Sweep Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Sampler-Based Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Mixer-Based Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
8511 Frequency Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Test Set Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Test Set Power-On Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Test Set Typical RF Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
85102 IF/Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Signal Path Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Control Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Phase Lock Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Miscellaneous Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
85101 Display/Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Processor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Display Assemblies (CRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Display Assemblies (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Input/Output Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
8510 Typical System Measurement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Contents-1
Contents
System Phase Lock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Pretune Phase Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Pretune IF Count Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Main Phase Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Monitoring Phase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Monitoring the VTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Phase Lock Learn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Phase Lock Cycle Summary (Including Running Error Messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
4. Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Troubleshooting Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
What’s Wrong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Self Test Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Running Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Unratioed Power Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Other Obvious Failure Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Control, Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Front and Rear Panel Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Cabling Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Firmware Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
No Obvious Failure Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Verify the 85101C Display/Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Verify the 85102 IF/Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Hardware Emulator Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Test Set Emulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Source Emulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Other Tests for the Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram (CRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
8510C Display/Processor Overall Block Diagram (CRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
8510C Display/Processor Overall Block Diagram (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
85102 IF/Detector Overall Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
8510C Phase Lock Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (CRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (LCD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
85102 A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
LCD Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
A14 GSP Display Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
A15 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Troubleshooting Image Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
A16 Backlight Inverter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Self Test Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Self Tests and Other Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
What to Do If an Instrument Error Occurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
What to Do If the R-L-T-S-8-4-2-1 LEDs Stay Lit (Default Test 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Self Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
How to Identify a Self Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Contents-2
Contents
How to Troubleshoot a Self Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
How to Access the Test Menu and Run a Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
System, Disc, and Service Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
System Command 15: Run Main Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
System Command 16: Memory Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
System Command 17: Rerun Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
System Command 18: Repeat Test Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
Disc Command 19: Load Program Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65
Disc Command 20: Record Program Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
Disc Command 21: Initialize Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
Service Command 22: Run Service Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
Service Command 23: Diagnose a Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66
How to Reload the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
Running Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Running Error Messages as Built-In Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Different Types of Running Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Error Message Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Caution Type Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Prompt Type Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Tell Type Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Error Type Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
Things to Remember about Running Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Categories of Caution Running Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Phase Lock Running Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
IF/Detector ADC Running Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Source Sweep Running Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
GPIB (HP-IB) Running Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Running Error Message Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Helpful Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Alphabetical List of Caution Running Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
ADC Cal Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
ADC Not Responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
Autorange Cal Failed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Caution: Optional Function Not Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Disc Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Disc Hardware Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Disc Read or Write Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Disc Media Wearing Out - Replace Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
Failure - Check System Bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
Failure - Fault Indicator On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
Failure - Overmodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
Failure - RF Unlocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
Failure - Self Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
IF Cal Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
IF Overload (or O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Initialization Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
No IF Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Contents-3
Contents
Optional Function Not Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Phase Lock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Phase Lock Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Pretune Failure (Pretune Lost Failure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Pulse Cal Failure On Test/Reference Channel(s) or Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Source GPIB (HP-IB) Syntax Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Source Sweep Sync Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Sweep Time Too Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
System Bus Address Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
System Bus SRQ Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Test Set GPIB (HP-IB) Syntax Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Unable to Lock to Ext 10 MHz Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
VTO Over-Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Unratioed Power Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Definition of Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
User 1, 2, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
RF Signal Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Ratioed and Unratioed Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Troubleshooting with the Service Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Service Adapter Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Test Set Unratioed Power Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Troubleshooting Foldouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
8514B RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
8515A RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
8516A Option 002/003 RF Flow RF Diagrams and Typical Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
8517B RF Option 007 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Power Supply Failures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
85101C Power Supplies Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
85102 Power Supplies Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A10 Preregulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post-Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Measure Voltages on the A3 Post-Regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Determine Why the Green LED on A10 Is Not On Steadily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Determine Why the Red LED on A10 Is On or Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Disconnect A10W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Check the A10 Preregulator and Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Determine Why the Green LEDs on A3 Are Not All On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Remove the A3 Post-Regulator from Its Motherboard Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Check the A3 Fuses and Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Remove More Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Disconnect Display Power Cable (CRT Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Disconnect A15 LCD Assembly Cable and/or A16 Backlight Inverter Cable
(LCD Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Inspect Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Fan Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Contents-4
Contents
Fan Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Check the Fan Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Intermittent Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
85102 IF/Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Check the +5 V Test Points on A24 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113
Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113
Check Connector P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115
85101C Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117
Performance Test Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119
Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119
Software Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
How to Resolve Software and Firmware Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122
Firmware Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122
Other Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
Noisy Display Trace Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
20 Hz Sine Wave Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
Source Emulator/Tripler Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126
Service Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
Running the 8510 Service Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-130
How to Interpret Service Program Test Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-130
8510 Service Program Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-130
85101 Display/Processor Service Program Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-131
85101 CPU Board Tests (A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-131
85101 I/O Board and Front Panel Tests (A1, A2, A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-133
85101 Display Board and CRT Tests (A4, A11) or LCD Tests (A14, A15) . . . . . . . . . .4-135
85101 Nonvolatile Memory Board (A6) Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-137
85102 IF/Detector Service Program Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139
85102 Prompt Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139
Order of Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139
Test Set GPIB (HP-IB) Service Program Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Preset Test Set.. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Switch Active Light.. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Switch Port 1,2 Lights.. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Activate Port 1,2 Attenuator.. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Increment Active Attenuator .. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Select New GPIB (HP-IB) Address.. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-144
8360 Service Program Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-145
8510C Service Program Menu (CRT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-147
8510C Service Program Menu (LCD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-149
Contents-5
Contents
Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Measurement Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Error Terms Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Error Term Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Directivity (Edf and Edr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Source Match (Esf and Esr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Reflection Tracking (Erf and Err) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Isolation (Crosstalk) (Exf and Exr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Load Match (Elf and Elr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Transmission Tracking (Etf and Etr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
5. Replaceable Parts
Software, Documentation, and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Available Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
85102B Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
6. Replacement Procedures
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
85101C Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
85102B Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Adjustments and Performance Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
85101C Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
A1 Front Panel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Rotary Pulse Generator (RPG) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
A2 Disk Drive Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
A11 CRT Display Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
A9 Rear Panel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
A10 Preregulator Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Motherboard/Card Cage Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
A15 LCD Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
LCD Assembly Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
85102B Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Front Panel Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Rectifier Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Capacitor Discharge Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Power Supply Capacitor Replacement (C1, C2, C3 and C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Capacitor Discharge Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Rear Panel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Related Adjustments Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Contents-6
Contents
7. Adjustments
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Adjustment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Related Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Resealing of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Loading the Controller Basic Language System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Loading Basic 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Loading Basic 3.0 or Higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Procedure 1. CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Procedure 2. CRT Display Degaussing (Demagnetizing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Procedure 3. CRT Display Intensity Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Background Intensity (Black) Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Operating Default Intensity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Procedure 4. Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Procedure 5. IF Mixer Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Procedure 6. IF Amplifier Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Procedure 7. Synchronous Detector Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Procedure 8. Clock Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
8. Performance Verification and Specifications
System Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Individual System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Measurement Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Measurement Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
System Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Operational Checks Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Frequency Tests Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Total System Uncertainty Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Recommended Process Checks Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Software for Performance Verification and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
System Performance Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
How to Load the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Using the Keyboard or Mouse for Program Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
How to Verify System Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Choosing to Edit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Using Customizing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Using Markers on Uncertainty Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Choosing User-Generated Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Generating Customized System Uncertainty Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Using User-Generated Specifications in System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Entering S-parameters of the DUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Entering User Labels or Comments on Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Entering User Labels or Comments System Verification Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Performing System Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Contents-7
Contents
Changing Error Term Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Handling Customized Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Using the Error Term Table Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Saving Edited Error Term Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Recalling a Custom Error Term File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Using the Software: A Tutorial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Selecting the Hardware for an 8510SX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Examining Error Term Tables, Exercise 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Computing Uncertainty Curves, Exercise 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Editing Specifications, Exercise 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Using a Custom Calibration Kit, Exercise 3a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Using a Special Test Set, Exercise 3b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Using Non-Standard Test Cables, Exercise 3c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Using a Non-Ideal Test Device, Exercise 3d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Answers to Tutorial Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Operational Check Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Environment and Device Temperature Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
User Parameters Check (Unratioed Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Inspect, Clean, and Gage Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Cable Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Return Loss of Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Insertion Loss of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Magnitude and Phase Stability of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Cable Connector Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Dynamic Range Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Frequency Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
CW Frequency Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
For the 83640 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
For the 83651 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Swept Frequency Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
For 83621/31/51 Synthesizers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
For All Other 8360 Series Synthesizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
For 8340/41 Series Synthesizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
For All Synthesizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
For 8340/41 Series Synthesizers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties for the Performance Verification
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Interpreting the Performance Verification Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
If the System Fails Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Measurement Uncertainties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Sources of Measurement Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Sources of Systematic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Sources of Random Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Contents-8
Contents
Sources of Drift Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-77
Sources of Additional Measurement Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-77
Measurement Uncertainty Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-78
Reflection Uncertainty Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-78
Transmission Uncertainty Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-80
Generation of System Measurement Uncertainties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-82
System Error Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-83
Additional Information Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-87
8510C System Uncorrected Error Model Flowgraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-89
8510C System Corrected Error Model Flowgraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-91
Dynamic Accuracy Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-93
Measurement Traceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-93
Substitution of System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-94
Source Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-94
Cable Substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-94
Calibration Kit Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-95
Calibration Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-95
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-96
8510 System Specification Criteria (Assumptions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-96
45 MHz Calibration and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-96
−800 dB or 180 Degree Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-96
Aborting Plots and Printouts with the [ABORT] Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-97
Adapters (Test Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-97
Attention Messages ... and "SCPP" Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-97
BASIC 5.0 and HP-UX Systems (setting the time on your system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-97
Calculated Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-97
Connections and Connector Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98
Controller Displays and High-Resolution Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98
8350B Sweep Oscillators as System Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98
8510 mm-Wave Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98
8511 Frequency Converter Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-98
Controller Keyboard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-99
Controller Displays with Limited Scrolling Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-99
DUT Length (N cm) and Default S-Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-99
Explanation of the Wording on Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-99
Magnitude Errors Due to Device Frequency Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-99
Measurement Calibration Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-100
Phase Errors Due to Device Electrical Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-100
NIST Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-101
Omit Isolation Measurement for 8350B Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-101
Parameter Step Resolution (Software Configuration Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-102
Performance Verification Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-102
Plotters and Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-102
Plot Label Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-102
Plotter Pens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-103
Plot Traces on the Controller Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-103
Program Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-103
Ramp Mode Operation for Synthesizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-103
Remote or Local Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-103
Contents-9
Contents
System Hang-Ups or Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
Test Set Channel Signal Path Specifications: a1, b1, a2, b2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
Test Set Rear Panel Extension Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
Trim Sweep Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
Uncertainty and Dynamic Accuracy Limits: Upper or Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
Performance Test Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
9. System Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Preparing the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
System Heating and Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Space Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Electrical Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Electromagnetic Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Non-Agilent System Cabinet Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Other Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Checking the Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Unpacking the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Unpacking the System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Repacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Configuring and Connecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Line Voltage and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Source Compatibility Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Configuring the System in a Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Preconfigured Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Systems that Are Not Preconfigured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Recommended Cabinet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Configuring the System on a Bench-Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Making System Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
8360 Series Source GPIB (HP-IB) Language Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Grounding Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Reference Port Extension Cables (not applicable for 85110, 8516, 8517) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Serial Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Parallel Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Switching On Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Making a Backup Operating System Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Checking System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
8510 Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Preset Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
S–Parameter Test Set Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
User Parameters (Unratioed Power) Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
In Case of Difficulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Contents-10
Contents
10. Preventive Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Maintain Proper Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Inspect and Clean Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Clean the Test Set Rear Panel Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Degauss (Demagnetize) the Display (CRT Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Inspect the Error Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
11. Instrument History
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Contents-11
Contents
Contents-12
1
Service and Equipment
1-1
Service and Equipment
Overview
Overview
This On-Site Service Manual is a complete guide to test, repair, adjustment and
installation of the 8510C network analyzer. It was written for qualified service personnel.
Previous knowledge of a network analyzer system is assumed, but specific knowledge of
the 8510 system is not required.
This manual addresses troubleshooting to the faulty board or assembly, not to the
component level. When the faulty board or assembly has been isolated, contact Agilent and
order the new part (refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page iii). In some cases, an exchange
assembly is available, which costs less than a new part.
Due to the assembly level repair strategy, schematics and individual component lists are
not included in this documentation.
NOTE
The original 85101C display/processor incorporated a cathode ray tube
(CRT). The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display (LCD).
In this manual, references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display
designs unless otherwise noted.
Some troubleshooting procedures, schematics, replaceable parts, and removal procedures
may differ depending on the display installed. In such instances, display information
(CRT or LCD) is documented separately. Some of the main differences are:
85101C Equipped with a CRT
85101C Equipped with an LCD
A4 GSP display board positioned vertically in
card cage slot
A14 GSP display board positioned horizontally
on chassis directly behind A15 LCD assembly
A11 CRT display
A15 LCD assembly (includes the A16 inverter
board and backlight)
W1 cable and connections to boards
W4, W5, W6, W7, and W8 cables and
connections to boards
Rear-panel multi-pin connector uses D1191A
video cable (supplied) for external video
connections (requires special video monitor)
Rear-panel multi-pin connector designed to
work with external VGA compatible monitors
(standard 15 pin VGA monitor cable not
supplied)
NOTE
In this manual, GPIB and HP-IB refer to the same protocol.
GPIB allows either the system display/processor or an external
controller to operate the various instruments of the system. The GPIB
interface operates according to IEEE 488–1978 and IEC 625 standards
and IEEE 728–1982 recommended practices.
1-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Service and Equipment
On-Site Service Manual Organization
On-Site Service Manual Organization
This manual is part of the documentation set included with the 8510C network analyzer.
Refer to the front matter of the 8510C Operating and Programming Manual for a graphic
representation of the complete documentation set.
Tabs are used to divide the major chapters and sections. A chapter is a major topic division
within the manual. A section is a division of information within a chapter. The names of
the tabs and an explanation of their contents are listed below.
Service and Equipment Overview (Chapter 1)
This chapter provides a brief summary of the service information in this manual, and a list
of the test equipment required. It should be read before attempting any repairs.
Safety/Licensing (Chapter 2)
This chapter contains safety and licensing information required for the 8510C.
Theory of Operation (Chapter 3)
Read this section to learn about the 8510 system hardware and firmware and how the
system operates, especially the phase lock circuitry.
Main Troubleshooting Procedure (Chapter 4)
Turn to this chapter first when troubleshooting a system. It consists of a main procedure
followed by sections with details on troubleshooting specific failures.
The following fold-outs are located at the back of this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram (equipped with a CRT display)
8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram (equipped with an LCD)
85101C Display/Processor Overall Block Diagram (equipped with a CRT display)
85101C Display/Processor Overall Block Diagram (equipped with an LCD)
85102 IF/Detector Overall Block Diagram
8510C Phase Lock Block Diagram
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (equipped with a CRT display)
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (equipped with an LCD)
85102 A25 Motherboard Wiring Diagram
The sections within this chapter are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LCD Failures
Self Test Failures
Running Error Messages
Unratioed Power Failures
Power Supply Failures
Performance Test Failures
Software Failures
8510C On-Site Service Manual
1-3
Service and Equipment
On-Site Service Manual Organization
• Other Failures
• Service Program
• Error Terms
Replaceable Parts (Chapter 5)
This chapter contains part numbers for replaceable parts and assemblies, and instructions
on how to order them. Parts lists for instruments with CRT displays and LCDs are
documented in separate sections.
Replacement Procedures (Chapter 6)
This section contains procedures for disassembling or re-assembling the 8510C network
analyzer after a part or assembly is replaced. Procedures that differ depending on the
display installed, are documented separately.
Adjustments (Chapter 7)
This chapter contains adjustment procedures.
Specifications and Performance Verification (Chapter 8)
This chapter describes the following:
• System performance
• System Performance verification
• Specifications
• Software for specifications and performance verification
• How to verify system performance
• Performing system verification
• Using the software: A tutorial
• Operational check procedures
• Frequency test procedures
• Total system uncertainty test procedure
• How to run the system specifications
• Interpreting the specification and uncertainties printout
• Measurement uncertainties
• Sources of measurement errors
Generation of system measurement uncertainties
System error models
Dynamic accuracy error model
Measurement traceability
1-4
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Service and Equipment
On-Site Service Manual Organization
Substitution of system components
Calibration cycle
• Reference information for performance verification and specification
• Performance test record
Installation (Chapter 9)
This chapter describes the following:
• Site preparation
• Checking the shipment and unpacking the system
• Configuring and connecting the system
• Checking the system operation
Preventive Maintenance (Chapter 10)
This section details some simple procedures necessary to maintain the system.
Definition of an 8510 System
There are many varieties of systems using an 8510 network analyzer. In the strictest
sense, a basic 8510 system consists of the following:
1- 85101 Display/Processor
1- 85102 IF/Detector
1 (or more) - RF Test Set(s)
1 (or more) - Source(s)
Peripherals, such as controllers, plotters, printers, disk drives, and millimeter devices, may
be added to the basic system.
Service Tools Available
Special service tools used in the troubleshooting procedures can be ordered separately.
These include extender boards, source emulator, test set emulator, cables, and so forth. The
source emulator and test set emulator are used to verify operation of the other instruments
in the system by substituting these service tools for the individual instruments they
emulate.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
1-5
Service and Equipment
On-Site Service Manual Organization
Table of Service Equipment
Table 1-1 lists the equipment required to verify, adjust, and troubleshoot the network
analyzer. The table also notes the use and critical specifications of each item, and the
recommended models.
In addition to the test equipment listed in the table, the following tools are also required:
• #1 and #2 Pozidrive screwdrivers
• Flat-blade screwdrivers - small, medium, and large
• 5/16 inch open-end wrench (for SMA connector nuts)
• 3/16 inch and 5/16 inch hex nut drivers
• Non-conductive and non-ferrous adjustment tool
• Needle-nose pliers
• Tweezers
• Anti-static work mat with wrist strap
• T10 and T15 TORX drivers
• Miscellaneous cables, adapters, and other equipment as listed in Chapter 5 ,
“Replaceable Parts.”
1-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Service and Equipment
On-Site Service Manual Organization
Table 1-1
Service Test Equipment
Instrument Required
Critical Specifications
Recommended Model
Use
Oscilloscope
100 MHz, Dual Channel
Agilent 54622D
A,T
Oscilloscope Probes
10:1 Divider
1000:1 Divider (High Voltage)
Agilent 10074C
N2771A
A,T
Calibration Kit
3.5 mm
2.4 mm
Agilent 85052B
Agilent 85056A
P,T
P,T
Verification Kit*
3.5 mm
2.4 mm
Agilent 85053B
Agilent 85057B
P,T
P,T
Test Port Cables*
3.5 mm
2.4 mm
Agilent 85131D
Agilent 85133D
P,T
P,T
Computer/Controller
−Laptop or PC running BASIC for
Windows (Rev. 6.32 or greater under
Windows 95/98/NT)
−GPIB card for PCs (National
Instrument or Hewlett-Packard)
−PCMIA card for Laptops (National
Instruments)
−Basic 5.0 or higher and 4 Mbytes
RAM, and 3.0 for dual source systems
−HP Vectra 386 with an 82300C
BASIC language processor card
−UNIX based workstation with Rocky
Mountain BASIC (RMB)
various
A,P,T
HP 9000 Series 200 or 300
A,P,T
Workstation
A,P,T
A,P,T
Photometer (CRT only)
Photometer Probe
(CRT only)
Tektronix J16 Opt 2
Tektronix J6503 Opt 2
Light Occluder (CRT only)
Tektronix 016-0305-00
A
A
Power Meter
50 MHz to 50 GHz
Agilent E4418B
P,T
Power Sensor
50 MHz to 26.5 GHz (3.5 mm)
1µW to 100mW
50 MHz to 50 GHz (2.4mm)
1 µW to 100 mW
General Purpose DMM
32 mV to 300 V, ac/dc
45 MHz to 26.5 GHz
Agilent 8485A
P,T
Agilent 34401A
A,T
Agilent 53151A Opt 001
A,P,T
10 dB Attenuator
45 MHz to 26.5 GHz (3.5 mm)
45 MHz to 50 GHz (2.4 mm)
Agilent 8493C Opt 010
Agilent 8490D Opt 010
P
P
Power Splitter
45 MHz to 26.5 GHz (3.5 mm)
45 MHz to 50 GHz (2.4mm)
Agilent 11667B
Agilent 11667C
A,P,T
A,P,T
Pulse Generator
Function Generator
35 ns to 1 second pulse period
20 MHz ± 1 Hz waveform frequency
Agilent 81101A
Agilent 33250A
A
A
Dual Power Supply
Spectrum Analyzer
Dual 0 to 15 Vdc
100 kHz to 26.5 GHz
GPIB Controllable
Agilent E3631A
Agilent E4407B
A
A
Degausser (CRT only)
200W input
Radio Shack 44-233
A
Digital Multimeter
Frequency Counter
Agilent 8487A
A - Adjustments
P - Performance Verification
T - Troubleshooting
* Other calibration kits, verification kits, and cables may be required depending upon the system configuration
8510C On-Site Service Manual
1-7
Service and Equipment
On-Site Service Manual Organization
1-8
8510C On-Site Service Manual
2
Safety/Licensing
2-1
Safety/Licensing
GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
SAFETY SYMBOLS
SAFETY EARTH GROUND
This product and related documentation must be reviewed
for familiarization with safety markings and instructions
before operation. This product has been designed and
tested in accordance with the standards listed on the
Manufacturer’s Declaration of Conformity, and has been
supplied in a safe condition. The documentation contains
information and warnings that must be followed by the
user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product
in a safe condition.
This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective
earthing terminal). An uninterruptible safety earth
ground must be provided from the main power source to
the product input wiring terminals, power, cord, or
supplied power cord set. Whenever it is likely that the
protection has been impaired, the product must be made
inoperative and secured against any unintended
operation.
Instruction manual symbol: the product
will be marked with this symbol when it
is necessary for the user to refer to the
instruction manual (refer to Table of
Contents).
Indicates hazardous voltages.
Indicates earth (ground) terminal.
BEFORE APPLYING POWER
Verify that the product is configured to match the
available main power source per the input power
configuration instructions provided in this manual. If this
product is to be energized via an autotransformer make
sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral
(grounded side of the mains supply). The front panel LINE
switch disconnects the mains circuits from the mains
supply after the EMC filters and before other parts of the
instrument.
Before switching on this instrument, make sure:
The WARNING sign denotes a hazard,
It call attention to a procedure, practice,
or the like, which, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in
personal injury. Do not proceed beyond
WARNING until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and
met.
- the line voltage selector switch is set to
the voltage of the mains supply.
- the correct fuse is installed.
- the supply voltage is in the specified range.
SERVICING
Any servicing, adjustment, maintenance, or repair of this
product must be performed only by qualified personnel.
The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard.
It calls attention to an operating
procedure, practice, or the like which, if
not correctly performed or adhered to,
could result in damage to or destruction
of part or all of the product. Do not
proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until
the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.
- Adjustments described in this manual may be performed
with power supplied to the product while protective covers
are removed.
- Energy available at many points may, if contacted, result
in personal injury. Capacitors inside this product may still
be charged even when disconnected from their power
source.
- To avoid a fire hazard, only fuses with the required
current rating and of the specified type (normal blow, time
delay, etc.) are to be used for replacement.
2-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Safety/Licensing
8510 Safety Information
8510 Safety Information
In order to maintain safe operation of the 8510 system, read and follow the specific
instructions in the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes found in the instruments and
throughout this manual.
Hazardous Instrument Areas with Power On
Each instrument in the 8510 system has areas that contain lethal voltages when the
instrument has ac power applied. Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show each of the instruments
and their hazardous areas.
A shock hazard exists when the covers are removed. Also, the protective earth
grounding on this equipment must be maintained to provide protection from
electrical shock. Any service or adjustment performed with the covers removed
should be performed by qualified service personnel only.
Turn off the line voltage before removing or replacing printed circuit boards. Damage to
integrated circuits can occur if power is left on when printed circuit boards are removed or
replaced. Whenever the 8510 system is serviced, an anti-static workstation should be used
to avoid damage incurred by static discharge into the static- sensitive circuits of the 8510
system.
If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by the equipment
could be impared. This product must be used in a normal condition (in which all
means for protection are intact) only.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
2-3
Safety/Licensing
8510 Safety Information
Figure 2-1
Location of Hazardous Voltages in 8510 Instruments (1 of 2)
WARNING
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose
dangerous voltages. Disconnect the product from all voltage
sources while it is being opened. The power cord is connected
to internal capacitors that may remain live for 5 seconds after
disconnecting the plug from its power supply.
2-4
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Safety/Licensing
8510 Safety Information
Figure 2-2
Location of Hazardous Voltages in 8510 Instruments (2 of 2)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
2-5
Safety/Licensing
8510 Safety Information
Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements
The Agilent 8510C network analyzer complies with German FTZ 526/527 Radiated
Emissions and Conducted Emissions requirements.
This is to declare that the products listed below are in conformance with the German Regulation
on Noise Declaration for Machines (Laermangabe nach der Maschinenlaermrerordnung –3.
GSGV Deutschland).
Instruments with fan installed/Gerate mit engebautem Ventilator
4195A
83631A/B
85101B/C
85309A
8350B
83640A/B
85102B/R
85106A–D
8620C
83642A
8511A/B
85108A/L
83601A/B
83650A/B
8512A
8702B
83602A
83651A/B
8513A
8703A
83620A/B
83420A
8514A/B
8719A
83621A/B
83421A
8515A
8720A–C
83622A/B
83422A
8516A
8722A
83630A/B
83423A
8517A/B
8753B/C
83624A/B
83424A
85105A
8757C/E
83630A/B
83425A
85110A/L
Acoustic Noise Emission/Geraeuschemisslon
LpA < 70dB
LpA < 70dB
Operator position
am Arbeitsplatz
Normal operation
normaler Betrieb
per ISO 7779
nach DIN 45635 t. 19
Compliance with Canadian EMC Requirements
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB du Canada.
2-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3
Theory of Operation
3-1
Theory of Operation
Overview
Overview
This chapter describes the operation of the 8510 network analyzer system. “The Base
System” describes one complete system in broad terms. This is the basis of all 8510
systems. Some systems are more specialized and complex, such as millimeter systems and
pulse systems. These are explained in separate system manuals. However, disconnecting
the specialized components of most 8510 systems will reduce them to the base system
described here.
Other parts of this chapter describe the individual instruments within the system in detail
sufficient to aid troubleshooting. In this manual, sources and test sets are troubleshot to
the instrument level. The IF/detector and display/processor are troubleshot to the
assembly level. For additional source or test set information, refer to their manuals.
The final sections of this chapter describe a typical measurement sequence and explain the
system phase-locked loop.
NOTE
3-2
In this chapter, "RF signal" and "RF signal path" refer to the main
RF signal from the source. Depending on its place in the path, the "RF"
may be RF, one of two IFs, or a digitized signal.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
The Base System
The Base System
The 8510 network analyzer base system used in this example consists of a source, a test
set, the 85102 IF/detector, and the 85101 display/processor instruments (see Figure 3-1).
Figure 3-1
Forward Transmission Test Signal Path in 8510 Base System
The source produces RF signals that allow the network analyzer to examine DUTs (devices
under test) with a signal applied.
The test set splits the source signal into a reference signal and a test signal. The test signal
is transmitted through or reflected from the DUT and goes to the receiver for comparison
to the reference signal. In Figure 3-1, only the transmitted signal path is shown.
In the 8510 system, the test set also down-converts the source frequency (RF) to an IF of
20 MHz. The IF/detector down-converts the 20 MHz IF signals from the test set to 100 kHz
and then detects, processes, and digitizes them.
The display/processor compares the transmitted or reflected signal to the reference signal.
It performs all of the math operations on the digitized signals and displays them. The
display/processor also coordinates the actions of the system instruments. It is the system
controller.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-3
Theory of Operation
Sources
Sources
The system source provides an RF stimulus over the desired frequency range and power
level as set by the 8510. Most sources cover their full frequency range in several bands
because the individual oscillators are limited in frequency range. Low frequency and
higher frequency oscillators are used alone and mixed to produce the entire frequency
range.
In the figure below, the source uses two oscillators for a frequency range of 10 MHz to
7.5 GHz. Oscillators with different frequency ranges and multipliers are also used to cover
different frequency ranges.
Figure 3-2
Source Covering Frequency Range in Two Bands
The source lets the 8510 know its frequency over digital interconnect lines. It starts and
stops its frequency sweeps in response to commands from the 8510. As explained below,
the system can use a synthesized sweeper, a sweep oscillator, or both as a source.
Synthesized Sweepers
Synthesized sweepers (or synthesizers) achieve frequency resolution to within a few hertz.
8510 dedicated Agilent 836X1 synthesized sources come with 1 Hz resolution standard;
1 Hz is optional on other 8360 series sources. Modern synthesizers are as fast as (or faster
than) sweep oscillators in most circumstances. Older synthesizers tend to be slower but
offer the same resolution.
A synthesizer can operate in step mode where it phase locks at each frequency point (for
the number of points selected). At each point, it takes one or more measurements,
depending upon the number of averages selected. It can also operate in ramp mode.
Sweep Oscillators
Sweep oscillators (or sweepers) are less frequency accurate than synthesizers. They
operate in ramp mode only. A sweeper is fast but less accurate and sweeps through the
frequency range as many times as the selected averaging factor.
3-4
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Test Sets
Test Sets
The standard test sets designed to work with the 8510 include the Agilent 8511, 8514,
8515, 8517, 85110. They differ in several respects: operating frequency range, dynamic
range, front panel test port connectors, and internal RF path mechanics. An identification
code in ROM or configuration switches within each test set allow the 8510 to recognize
each type at power-up for proper operation.
Test sets have two main functions:
1. To separate the RF signal into reference and test signals.
2. To down-convert the RF signals to 20 MHz IF signals after separation.
Test sets separate the signals with couplers or triax bridges. During the RF to IF
conversion, the test sets maintain the phase coherence of the measured signals so that
they can be kept in ratioed pairs after calibration.
Most test sets for the 8510 are either sampler-based or mixer-based. A third type is the
frequency converter.
Sampler-Based Test Sets
These test sets have samplers driven by a VTO. The VTO, acting like a second source or LO
(local oscillator), enables the samplers to down-convert the RF signal to an IF signal
according to this formula: LO − RF = IF.
Note that the LO frequency must vary as the RF varies to maintain a constant IF of
20 MHz. The VTO summing amp board provides the control voltages to tune the VTO to
the correct LO frequency. The VTO usually operates at between 50 and 300 MHz. The LO
frequency is a harmonic of the VTO. Should the VTO ever go out of range, the processor
will generate an error message: VTO OVERRANGE. These test sets have a narrow IF
bandwidth of approximately ±3 MHz.
Mixer-Based Test Sets
These test sets have mixers driven by two sources. The second source enables the mixers to
downconvert the RF signal to an IF signal according to this formula: LO − RF = IF
Note that the LO frequency must vary as the RF varies to maintain a constant IF of
20 MHz. These test sets have a wider IF bandwidth than sampler test sets.
8511 Frequency Converter
The 8511 is a sampler-based test set without signal separation components (couplers or
bridges). Its four front panel test ports connect directly to four samplers; it is basically a
four-channel frequency converter. Its assemblies are otherwise identical to the other test
sets. The special applications of this test set are documented in its manual and application
notes.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-5
Theory of Operation
Test Sets
Test Set Control Path
The test set and the display/processor communicate over the 8510 system bus and the test
set interface. The A4 GPIB (HP-IB) board is the control center of test set communications
and logic. It contains an 8-bit microprocessor, a GPIB chip, and an identification code (in
ROM) to initialize and identify the test set to the display/processor. This code works in
conjunction with configuration switches in the test set.
The A4 board also controls several assemblies within the test set via a separate
data/address bus. The bus enables the A4 processor to do the following:
• Read the configuration switches.
• Select the sampler(s) required to measure the desired signal.
• Operate the front panel LEDs.
• Program the switch/splitter and any programmable attenuators.
• Monitor the test set temperature and notify the display/processor if it gets too hot.
Test Set Power-On Sequence
When power is applied to the test set, the A15 regulator board produces a power-on reset
signal, PWON. PWON resets the control logic of the test set. When the power supply
voltages are at their required levels, the PWON low-to-high signal transition resets the
processor, the GPIB chip, and a data latch on the A3 summing amp board. Resetting the
processor initiates a test set self-test program that checks the integrity of the ROM and
RAM located on the A4 board. Resetting this data latch turns on all of the samplers in the
test set.
The general effect of PWON is to put the test set in a default state at the time of power-on.
This allows the test set to function even if the A4 GPIB board is defective or if there is no
communication between the 85101 and the test set.
Test Set Typical RF Path
The RF signal from the source enters the test set through the RF IN connector on the rear
panel (see Figure 3-3). The RF is then applied to the switch/splitter: a combination of two
power splitters and a solid state switch. This switch selects the power splitter to be used,
and thereby selects the port that will receive incident RF power.
3-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Test Sets
Figure 3-3
RF Signal Path Thru Sampler Test Set for Forward
Transmission Measurement S21
For the forward transmission measurement S21 (b2/a1), the RF signal path is as follows:
The source RF signal is input to the test set and separated by the switch/splitter to produce
the test signal and the reference signal. The test signal first passes through the DUT and
port 2 coupler. It is then applied to the b2 sampler for down-conversion to 20 MHz before
being sent to the 85102 IF/detector. The reference signal is simultaneously applied to
sampler a1, where it is down-converted to a 20 MHz IF and also sent to the 85102.
In the case of an S11 forward reflection measurement (b1/a1), the main difference from the
S21 path operation is that the test signal is reflected from port 1 and coupled to the b1
sampler. There it is down-converted to the 20 MHz IF and sent to the 85102.
S12 reverse transmission RF paths (b1/a2) and S22 reverse reflection RF paths (b2/a2) are
similar to the transmission and reflection paths explained above. The differences are that
the switch/splitter is switched to the reverse path position and that the a2 sampler is used
in the reference signal path.
A similar process occurs during reverse measurements, when RF power is applied to port 2
of the test set.
The LO signal generated by the VTO/driver is phase locked to the source so that the
desired VTO harmonic is 20 MHz greater than the source frequency. The phase-locked loop
process is described in the “System Phase Lock Operation” section of this chapter.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-7
Theory of Operation
85102 IF/Detector
85102 IF/Detector
The IF/detector is the first half of the 8510 network analyzer. It performs a second
down-conversion of the signals, detects them, and digitizes and multiplexes them for input
to the display/processor. It also functions as part of the phase-locked loop. For the most
part, it is controlled by the display/processor.
The assemblies of the IF/detector can be classified in four categories: signal path, control,
phase locked loop, and miscellaneous.
Signal Path Assemblies
The signal path assemblies down-convert, detect, digitize and multiplex the signals.
Figure 3-4
Signal Path Assemblies of IF/Detector
IF Mixers (A9, A11, A13, A14) buffer, filter and mix the 20 MHz signals (with the
19.9 MHz LO signal) down to 100 kHz. The assemblies are electrically and mechanically
identical.
19.9 MHz Local Oscillator (A8) assembly provides the LO signals for the IF mixer
assemblies.
Test and Reference IF Amplifiers (A10, A12) autorange and amplify the signals to
allow the detectors to operate in their optimal range. The assemblies are electrically and
mechanically identical.
Test and Reference Synchronous Detectors (A5, A7) detect the X and Y pairs (test
and reference) that have been mixed down to 100 kHz IF. The assemblies are electrically
and mechanically identical.
Sample and Hold (A17) assembly multiplexes the X and Y pairs from the synchronous
detectors.
Analog-to-Digital Converter (A18) assembly converts the X and Y pairs from the
analog IF waveform to digital bits.
Processor Interface (A24) assembly transmits the digital bits to the display/processor
and enables the IF/detector and display/processor to communicate.
3-8
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
85102 IF/Detector
Control Assemblies
The control assemblies control the functioning and timing of the system and enable
communication within the system. The phase lock assemblies are described later.
Front Panel and Front Panel Interface (A1) assembly enables the user to control the
8510, displays the statues of power (on/off) and the active channel (1 or 2).
ADC Control (A19) provides the control for the A17 sample and hold assembly and the
A18 analog-to-digital converter. It is controlled by the display/processor and works in
conjunction with the A20 sweep ADC assembly.
Sweep ADC (A20) assembly triggers the sample and hold assembly to take data at the
proper frequency intervals. Note that as the 8510 system sweeps, the intervals are
determined by the display/processor.
Clock (A6) assembly provides four reference, timing and calibration signals:
• Reference IF signals for the main phase-locked loop
• Timing signals for the synchronous detectors
• Timing signals for the 19.9 MHz local oscillator
• The 100 kHz calibration signal for the IF
Phase Lock Assemblies
IF Counter (A21) assembly counts the 20 MHz IF signal and checks for the power level
and valid frequency count for both pretune and main lock.
Pretune Phase Lock (A22) assembly lets the system initiate a pretune phase lock based
on the start frequency input to the display/processor. It also counts the VTO fundamental
frequency.
Main Phase Lock (A23) assembly is used during pretune and as part of the main
phase-locked loop.
Miscellaneous Assemblies
Motherboard (A25) assembly interconnects all of the other assemblies.
Regulator (A15) assembly provides four regulated DC voltages:
+15 V
−15 V
+5 V −5 V
Rectifier (A26) assembly rectifies line voltage (ac) to dc for the IF/detector.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-9
Theory of Operation
85101 Display/Processor
85101 Display/Processor
The 85101 display/processor is the system controller, data processor, and display unit for
the 8510 system. It consists of the processor, EEPROM non-volatile memory, the display,
and I/O ports.
The 85101 controls the 85102 IF/detector via a dedicated interface bus (IF/display
interconnect). It controls the test set and source via one dedicated GPIB (HP-IB) port
(8510 system interconnect) and interfaces with an external controller, printer, or plotter
via a second GPIB (HP-IB) port. In addition, the display/processor can address printers
and plotters via two RS-232 ports.
Processor Assemblies
Processor Assembly (A5) performs all system control and computation functions. This
assembly contains:
• The main processor, or CPU (a 68020, 32 bit microprocessor)
•
A separate math coprocessor
• The main processor memory (RAM, 2 Mbyte)
• The system ROM
• LEDs to indicate self test (and subtest) results
Memory Board (A6) consists of 26 EEPROMS arranged in 13 banks. The main program
resides in this nonvolatile memory.
NOTE
The original HP 85101C display/processor incorporated a cathode ray
tube (CRT). The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display
(LCD). In this manual, references to either CRT or LCD apply to both
display designs unless otherwise noted. Some troubleshooting
procedures, schematics, replaceable parts, and replacement procedures
may differ depending on the display installed. In such instances,
display information (CRT or LCD) is documented separately.
Display Assemblies (CRT)
Graphics Processor (A4) provides an interface between the processor and display
assemblies. The CPU converts the formatted data to graphics commands and writes it to
the graphics processor. The graphics processor converts the data to obtain the necessary
video signals and sends the signals to the display. It also produces RGB output signals
which are sent to the rear panel for use by optional external monitors. The assembly
receives two power supply voltages: +5 V (for processing) and +65 V (not used but passed
on to the display).
3-10
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
85101 Display/Processor
CRT Display (A11) is a 7.5 inch raster scan color CRT with associated drive circuitry.
Automatic degaussing is performed when the instrument is turned on to minimize the
magnetization of the CRT. It receives these inputs from the display processor:
• +65 V power supply
• Digital TTL horizontal and vertical sync signals
• RGB (red, green, and blue) video signals
• Background and intensity signals
Display Assemblies (LCD)
Graphics Processor (A14) is the main interface between the A5 central processing unit
(CPU) and the A15 liquid crystal display (LCD). The CPU converts the formatted data into
GSP commands and writes it to the A14 graphics processor (GSP). The GSP processes the
data to generate analog and digital video signals that are used for:
• The analog video signals generated are VGA compatible RGB video signals which are
buffered and routed to the real panel.
• The digital video signals generated are translated to 3.3 volt levels, buffered and routed
to the A15 LCD.
The A14 assembly receives the +5 V power from the motherboard that is used for
processing and supplying power to the LCD (+3.3 V) and backlight inverter (+5 V).
LCD Assembly (A15) is an 8.4-inch liquid crystal display (LCD) with associated drive
circuitry. It receives a +3.3 V power supply from the A14 graphics processor. The display
receives the following signals from the A14:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
digital horizontal sync
digital vertical sync
digital blanking
data clock
digital red video
digital green video
digital blue video
The A15 LCD display includes the backlight lamp and inverter. The lamp attaches to the
LCD display frame but is electrically separate. The backlight is powered by a separate
connection to the attached backlight inverter (A16), which is also electrically separate.
Backlight Inverter (A16) is a part of the A15 LCD assembly. It receives a +5 V power
supply and control signals from the A14 graphics processor. The control signals include
backlight intensity. It outputs a high voltage used to drive the backlight lamp.
Input/Output Assemblies
Disc Drive Assembly (A2) is a 1.44 Mbyte, double-sided disc drive. It can use standard or
high-density 3.5 inch disks.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-11
Theory of Operation
85101 Display/Processor
I/O Assembly (A7) is the main interface for the system. The main processor data,
address, and control buses are routed throughout the 85101 via the motherboard and this
assembly. It enables various parts of the system to communicate by supporting these
components:
• real-time clock
• disc drive
• two RS 232 ports1
• two GPIB ports
• 85101 interrupt system
• 85102 interface
• front panel interface
• RPG counters
NOTE
1) The RS 232 port in conjunction with 0.5 Mbyte DRAM on the
processor assembly permit spooling data to printers and plotters.
2) RS 232 ports share only a small part of the 0.5 Mbyte DRAM; 400 K
DRAM for port 1, and 100 K DRAM for port 2.
Power Supply
The power supply is a switching power supply. Its functions are distributed between the
preregulator, post-regulator, and display assemblies.
Preregulator (A10) steps down and rectifies the line voltage. It provides a fully
regulated +5 V digital supply, and several preregulated voltages that go to the A3
post-regulator assembly for additional regulation. Figure 3-5 is a simplified block diagram
of the power supply group.
Figure 3-5
3-12
Power Supply Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
85101 Display/Processor
The preregulator assembly includes the line power module, a 60 kHz switching
preregulator, and overvoltage protection for the +5 V digital supply. It provides LEDs,
visible from the rear of the instrument, to indicate circuit status.
Line Power Module includes the line power switch, voltage selector switch, and main
fuse. The voltage selector switch adapts the instrument to local line voltages of
approximately 115 V or 230 V. The main fuse protects the input side of the preregulator
against drawing too much line current.
Preregulated Voltages are converted from line voltage by the switching preregulator.
The regulated +5 V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard. The following partially
regulated voltages are routed to the post-regulator for final regulation:
+70 V
−8 V
+8 V
+18 V
Regulated +5 V Digital Supply is regulated by the control loop in the preregulator. It
goes directly to the motherboard, and from there to all assemblies requiring a digital
supply. A +5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to the preregulator.
In order for the preregulator to function, the +5 VD supply must be loaded by one or more
assemblies, and the +5 V sense line must be working. If not, the other preregulated
voltages will be incorrect. However, this condition will not cause damage as all circuits are
over- and under-voltage protected.
Shutdown Indications
• The green LED is on in normal operation. It is off when line power is not connected, not
turned on, or set too low, or if the line fuse has blown.
• The red LED is off in normal operation. It lights to indicate a +5 V supply fault or power
transformer circuitry fault such as an undervoltage, overvoltage, overcurrent, or
overtemperature condition.
Post-Regulator (A3) filters and regulates the dc voltages received from the preregulator.
It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies. It distributes
regulated constant voltages to individual assemblies throughout the instrument. Five
green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies:
• +65 V (for CRT display, not used for LCD)
• −15 V (for the fan and [dropped to −12 V] for RS 232 ports)
• +5 PREREG (digital supply, also called +5 VDIG)
• +12 V (variable for the fan and fixed for RS 232 ports)
• +5 DSK MTR (for the disc drive motor)
The post-regulator consists of these circuits (among others):
• Shutdown circuit
• Variable fan speed circuit
• Low power circuit
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-13
Theory of Operation
85101 Display/Processor
Shutdown Circuit is triggered by overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, or
overtemperature. It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to
be shut down. The voltages that are not shut down are the +5 VDIG digital supply from the
preregulator and the fan supplies. If a fault occurs in any of the post-regulated voltages
except +65 V, all but the +65 V and +5 VDIG shut down.
The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes. But do so
quickly and carefully or components may be damaged.
Variable Fan Speed Circuit and an air flow detector provide fan power as needed. Fan
power is derived directly from the +18 V and –18 V supplies from the preregulator. The fan
is fused only with the line fuse so that it will continue to provide airflow and cooling when
the instrument is otherwise disabled. If overheating occurs, the main instrument supplies
are shut down and the fan runs at full speed. Full speed is normal at initial power-up.
Low Power Fail Warning Circuit (LPFW) detects low power and shuts down the CPU
gracefully.
Voltage Indicators
The five green LEDs along the top edge of the post-regulator assembly are on in normal
operation, to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply. If they are off or
flashing, refer to Chapter 4 to trace the cause of the problem.
Display Power is routed through the motherboard to the graphics processor assembly
and then to the CRT/LCD.
3-14
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
8510 Typical System Measurement Sequence
8510 Typical System Measurement Sequence
1. The 8510 display/processor sets the source and test set VTO start frequencies.
2. The system achieves phase lock as explained in “System Phase Lock Operation.”.
3. The source begins one of two basic types of frequency sweep:
• Step sweep mode: the system phase locks at each frequency point. This mode is
accurate, relatively fast for current synthesizers, and relatively slow for older
models.
• Ramp sweep mode: the system phase locks at the start of each band crossing. This
sweeper mode is fast but less accurate.
4. The test set separates RF power from the source into test and reference signals. The
test signal is applied to the DUT and transmitted through or reflected from it.
5. The test set down-converts the RF signals (test and reference) into separate 20 MHz IF
frequencies.
6. The IF/detector down-converts the 20 MHz signals to 100 kHz. It autoranges IF gain
steps to maintain the IF signals at optimum levels for detection over a wide dynamic
range.
7. The IF/detector applies each IF signal to a synchronous detector which generates DC
voltages proportional to the magnitude and phase of each input signal. The
synchronous detectors use digital techniques to develop outputs equal to the real (X)
and imaginary (Y) parts of the signal.
8. The IF/detector digitizes the X and Y sample pairs.
9. The display/processor reads the sample pairs, processes them, and displays them on the
CRT/LCD.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-15
Theory of Operation
System Phase Lock Operation
System Phase Lock Operation
Components of the phase lock system are in each of the 8510 system instruments: the
source, the test set, the IF/detector, and the display/processor. Therefore, a malfunction or
bad connection in any of the instruments can cause a phase lock problem and generate a
running error message.
Running error messages indicate that a fault was detected at a particular step in the phase
lock sequence, not at a particular physical location. Running error messages allow the
system to keep running. Until cleared, the messages remain on display even if the problem
has ended.
Four main assemblies constitute the phase lock system:
• Pretune assembly (in the IF/detector)
• VTO summing amp assembly (in the test set)
• IF counter assembly (in the IF/detector)
• Main phase lock assembly (in the IF/detector)
Additionally the display/processor memory and processor assemblies are involved in
controlling and monitoring the phase lock system. The IF/detector IF mixer assemblies are
part of the main phase-locked loop (but they are less important in determining loop
operation).
The 8510 uses two separate phase-locked loops: a pretune phase-locked loop and a main
phase-locked loop. The pretune phase-locked loop is a narrow bandwidth, synthesized,
high accuracy loop. The main phase-locked loop locks to 20 MHz and has enough
bandwidth to track the fast sweeping ramp.
Pretune Phase Lock Sequence
A pretune phase lock sequence precedes the beginning of every sweep and each band
crossing. Its main purpose is to generate an LO frequency about 20 MHz higher than the
RF. To do this the processor computes the start frequency and all other necessary
programming information. That information includes digital information for a DAC which
drives the VTO, the appropriate harmonic number of the VTO, and a divide-by-N number.
3-16
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
System Phase Lock Operation
Figure 3-6
Simplified Pretune Phase-Locked Loop
As shown above, during pretune, the pretune assembly tunes the VTO by putting the S/H
(sample-and-hold circuit) into the track-always mode. In this mode, the main phase-locked
loop is switched away from the phase detector to a DAC. The processor chooses a VTO
frequency such that a resulting VTO harmonic comb frequency is 20 MHz above the RF of
the source. The VTO summing amp assembly in the test set sums the pretune voltage and
main lock voltage to tune the VTO to the desired frequency.
To confirm that the VTO frequency is correct, the pretune board divides it by N and
compares it to a 50 kHz reference signal. If the frequency is not correct, the VTO is retuned
with an error voltage. When the pretune frequency is correct, a comparator on the pretune
board detects lock. In turn the processor reads a bit from the comparator. If the pretune
circuit is unable to generate the correct VTO frequency, the processor displays this running
error message: PRETUNE FAILURE.
For example, if the start frequency entered on the front panel is 1.8 GHz, the processor
calculates the LO frequency required to produce a 20 MHz IF (1.8 GHz + 20 MHz =
1.82 GHz). Since 1.82 GHz is beyond the frequency range of the VTO, the actual LO
frequency is a harmonic of the VTO, in this case the ninth harmonic. The VTO frequency is
about 202.2 MHz (1.82 GHz / 9).
In summary, the pretune phase lock sequence tunes the VTO to a fundamental sampling
rate and locks the pretune loop, based on the N number chosen by the processor.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-17
Theory of Operation
System Phase Lock Operation
Pretune IF Count Sequence
This sequence consists of two or three steps: an IF count, an IF search routine when
needed, and a check step.
Pretune IF Count is less a count than a check. It determines whether a comb frequency
is near the RF input frequency. The IF counter of the IF/detector checks the presence and
frequency of the IF. The processor selects the active IF sampler (a 1, or a2) with the PIN
switch on the IF counter board.
The 8510 pretune synthesizer is accurate enough to pretune the comb frequency to within
±5 MHz of the desired LO frequency. Ideally this creates an IF at 20 MHz (±5 MHz), the IF
counter detects that the IF is strong enough to lock to, and then the IF counter counts the
IF to within 10 kHz resolution.
If the IF is not approximately 10 MHz to 30 MHz, or if the IF counter has over-ranged, or if
the IF is too weak to lock to, the processor ignores the count and begins the IF search
routine.
IF Search Routine is a series of ever-widening steps of approximately 10 MHz that
attempts to find the IF. After several attempts, if a valid count is found, the check step is
performed. If the check step is successful, the main phase lock is released. If the check step
is not successful, the search continues for two more sequences.
The IF may not be counted at the default location for several reasons. It could be out of
range or too weak. Source linearity (including band-cross locations) and sweep point
quantization errors on the sweep ADC board are the two major sources of error in the
location of the IF. Bandpass filtering on the sampler preamps in the test set limits the
available search window to about 20 MHz (± 10 MHz). The filter is down about 15 dB at
the edges.
Check Step Sequence algorithm determines (1) whether the IF is a product of the RF
and (2) whether the IF is the correct sideband of the desired harmonic.
The algorithm initiates a second pretune to move the IF towards 20 MHz by approximately
5 MHz. If the comb frequency is on the high side (the correct side), the IF decreases. The
processor begins the main phase lock sequence (described below).
If the comb line is on the low side (the wrong side), the IF increases. When the wrong
sideband is detected, the processor pretunes the IF 40 MHz higher. Then it repeats the
check step.
For example, assume the first count is 23 MHz. If the comb frequency is on the high side,
the check step count is 18 MHz (it has moved toward and through 20 MHz). If the comb
frequency is on the low side of the RF, the check step count is 28 MHz (it has moved away
from 20 MHz).
In summary, if the IF is not detected, if the check step fails, or if the IF is not found after
the IF search routine, the processor displays this error message: NO IF FOUND
3-18
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
System Phase Lock Operation
Main Phase Lock Sequence
After a successful pretune sequence, the processor switches from pretune to main phase
lock. During the switch, timing is very important. Any drift in source frequency, decrease
in power, or fluctuation in the pretune loop could prevent phase lock.
Figure 3-7
Simplified Main Phase Lock Loop
As shown above, the S/H on the test set VTO summing amp holds the pretune voltage and
VTO frequency constant. The main phase lock tracks the error signal of the phase detector
to acquire the IF (about 20 MHz). Then it locks the IF to the 20 MHz reference signal. Once
the IF is locked on 20 MHz, the processor begins the sweep. The phase-locked loop remains
locked while holding the IF at a zero phase error (for the ramp output of the main phase
lock board). If the loop cannot lock, the processor displays this error message:
PHASE LOCK FAILURE.
Monitoring Phase Lock
While making the measurement sweep, the processor monitors the IF count and power. If
phase lock is lost during the sweep, the processor displays this error message:
PHASE LOCK LOST.
The system attempts to lock one more time during the sweep. Lock may be recovered or
not. If lock is not recovered, the loop stays unlocked until the next bandcrossing. In any
case, the error message is displayed.
Phase lock problems of this nature may be caused by the main phase lock board (A23), or a
power hole in the reference channel.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-19
Theory of Operation
System Phase Lock Operation
Monitoring the VTO
If the VTO is driven near the end of its tested range but maintains lock, the processor
displays this error message: VTO OVER-RANGE.
In essence, the system (especially the VTO) is operating near its limits. The system is still
functioning properly, but it may become unreliable. Often this condition indicates the
source should be calibrated to the 8510 through its trim sweep adjustment (refer to the
8510 Operating and Programming Manual).
Phase Lock Learn Mode
This mode enables the system, especially a sweeper-based system, to sweep quickly and
accurately after the first sweep. In this context, the first sweep means the first sweep at a
new start or stop frequency or new sweep speed. The first sweep takes longer than
subsequent sweeps for two reasons:
1. Prior to the first sweep, the processor determines band-crossing frequencies based on
default or calculated values. This determination takes some time.
2. At the end of the first sweep, the processor recalculates the band-crossing frequencies
based on where it found the IF.
Recall that the sweep linearity of sweepers (like the Agilent 8350 and its associated
plug-in) is approximately ±50 MHz. This wide range almost invariably forces the 8510 to
enter an IF search routine. The frequency inaccuracy of the sweeper displaces the IF and
forces the search.
For example, assume a start frequency of 500 MHz. The 8510 pretunes the VTO to produce
an LO of 520 MHz (20 MHz above the RF) and it expects to find the IF at 20 MHz (required
for phase lock). But if the sweeper RF is actually 478 MHz, the IF would be 42 MHz (not
20 MHz as calculated). The 8510 would not find the IF initially. But after retuning the LO
to 498 MHz, it would find the required 20 MHz IF.
LO (VTO)
RF (Sweeper)
IF (LO-RF)
Calculated
520
500
20
Actual
520
478
42
Required
498
478
20
Finally, and here's where the learning takes place, the processor learns (remembers) the
required LO frequency for an IF of 20 MHz (and phase lock). It then uses that value on
subsequent sweeps. It sweeps faster because it need not recalculate pretune frequencies or
search for the IF. The process is the same for the start frequency and all of the band
crossings. The process is used after the system has maintained phase lock through all of
the band crossings of the complete sweep.
3-20
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Phase Lock Cycle Summary (Including Running Error Messages)
Phase Lock Cycle Summary (Including Running Error Messages)
The phase lock cycle occurs at every start frequency, at every band crossing, and at every
point in step mode as follows:
Pretune Phase Lock Sequence pretunes a harmonic to the source frequency +20 MHz,
locks the frequency, and checks for proper lock. If unsuccessful: PRETUNE FAILURE.
Pretune IF Count Sequence counts the IF, searches for it if unsuccessful, and checks
the harmonic and sideband following a valid count. If unsuccessful: NO IF FOUND.
Main Phase Lock Sequence holds the pretune frequency, locks the main phase-locked
loop, and checks for a 20 MHz IF. If unsuccessful: PHASE LOCK FAILURE.
If phase lock is lost during a sweep: PHASE LOCK LOST.
If the VTO reaches the end of its range before band crossing: VTO OVER-RANGE.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
3-21
Theory of Operation
Phase Lock Cycle Summary (Including Running Error Messages)
3-22
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
4-1
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Overview
Overview
This “Main Troubleshooting Procedure” provides a systematic series of checks to follow if
the 8510 system appears to be faulty. If you follow these checks in the sequence given here,
it will help you to isolate the cause of a problem in the least possible time. The checks in
this main section are relatively brief. Wherever a problem is indicated, you will be referred
to more detailed information in the following sections. The service flowchart is an
abbreviated version of the detailed procedure on the opposite page. It is provided as a
quick summary to be used by people who are already familiar with 8510 troubleshooting.
NOTE
The original 85101C display/processor incorporated a cathode ray tube
(CRT display). The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display
(LCD). In this manual, references to either CRT or LCD apply to both
display designs unless otherwise noted. Some schematics, diagrams,
replaceable parts, and replacement procedures may differ depending on
the display. In such instances, display information (CRT or LCD) is
documented separately.
If your 85101C display/processor is equipped with an LCD, you will find troubleshooting
information for the A14 graphics display (GSP), A15 LCD assembly, and A16 inverter
board in the “LCD Failures” section.
Also included are the following diagrams for reference in troubleshooting:
• 8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram (equipped with a CRT display)
• 8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram (equipped with an LCD)
• 85101C Display/Processor Overall Block Diagram (equipped with a CRT display)
• 85101C Display/Processor Overall Block Diagram (equipped with an LCD)
• 85102 IF/Detector Overall Block Diagram
• 8510C Phase Lock Block Diagram
• 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (equipped with a CRT display)
• 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (equipped with an LCD)
• 85102 A25 Motherboard Wiring Diagram
This manual provides troubleshooting information for the system and the 8510 network
analyzer. You may also need to refer to the service manuals for the test set and the source.
4-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Troubleshooting Outline
WARNING
Death or injury can result from voltages inside the instrument
when it is connected to ac line power. Only qualified personnel
who are aware of the hazards involved should perform service
on this instrument when its covers are removed.
CAUTION
Turn off the line voltage before removing or replacing assemblies, to
avoid damage to the instrument. Use an antistatic work station to avoid
damage from static discharge.
The troubleshooting strategy uses several different processes. This main procedure
explains the appropriate times when each of these troubleshooting processes should be
used.
• Control, configuration, and cabling pre-operational checks. These can quickly identify
many failures.
• Specific procedures for certain obvious failures. When the nature of a failure is obvious,
the procedure goes immediately to symptom-related troubleshooting steps.
• Internal diagnostics. The service program checks various circuits in the network
analyzer.
• Hardware service tools. Test devices emulate the test set and source, to determine if the
problem is in the analyzer.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-3
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
What’s Wrong
First consider four questions before any other troubleshooting is attempted. These
questions quickly focus the direction troubleshooting should take. The questions are:
• Are there any self-test failures?
• Are there any running error messages?
• Is there an unratioed power failure?
• Is there any other obvious failure type?
Before you continue with the individual troubleshooting for each of these problems, go to
the “Control, Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational Checks” on page 4-8. These
checks can quickly correct up to 70% of failures.
Self Test Failures
The network analyzer performs a series of self-tests each time it is powered up. If the
analyzer passes all the tests, it loads and runs the operating system program.
A self-test failure is indicated on the display by one of the 14 self-test messages listed at
the right side of the 8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram. If one of these
messages appears, go to “Control, Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational Checks” on
page 4-8 and then, if necessary, to “Self Test Failures” on page 4-51.
4-4
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-5
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Running Error Messages
Running error messages are the messages numbered 15 or higher listed on the right side of
the 8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram. They occur if the CPU detects an
error during normal operation. When an error is detected and a running error message is
displayed, the system usually continues to make measurements. Before troubleshooting a
running error message, be sure it is consistent and repeatable. Press ENTRY OFF to remove
the message from the screen, then press MEASUREMENT RESTART to initiate another
sweep. Many times, a message such as PHASE LOCK LOST is only a momentary loss of lock
that can be corrected on the next sweep. If the message disappears, there is no real
problem. If the message repeats, go to “Control, Configuration, and Cabling
Pre-Operational Checks,”and then if necessary to “Running Error Messages.”
Unratioed Power Failures
A standard analyzer measurement is a ratio of two signals. For troubleshooting purposes,
the frequency response of one signal only is checked in an unratioed absolute power mode
through each of the signal paths. Observed problems can then be isolated to the
components in the faulty signal path.
Go to “Control, Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational Checks,” and then follow the
procedures in “Unratioed Power Failures” on page 4-85.
Other Obvious Failure Types
Sometimes the nature of a failure may be obvious to a trained Agilent 8510 repair person,
and you can go straight to the troubleshooting section for that type of failure. Obvious
failure types (in addition to self-test failures, running errors, and unratioed power failures)
are power supply failures, performance test failures, and software failures. (These failures
may or may not seem obvious. It is not important to be able to recognize them; the total
troubleshooting sequence will isolate them.)
Power Supply Failures
If the analyzer appears dead, or the display is dark, or the fan is not operating properly, or
the front panel LEDs are either not functioning or all remain lit, go to “Control,
Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational Checks” on page 4-8 and then to “Power
Supply Failures” on page 4-97.
Performance Test Failures
If you have performed the verification procedures in Chapter 8 and any part of the tests
resulted in a failure, go to “Control, Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational Checks”
on page 4-8 and then to “Performance Test Failures” on page 4-119.
Software Failures
If you have trouble running the operating system, or if there are problems controlling the
system over GPIB, go to “Control, Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational Checks” on
page 4-8 and then to “Software Failures” on page 4-121.
4-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart (cont.)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-7
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Control, Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational Checks
Refer to the 8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram at the end of this section.
Front and Rear Panel Checks
• Switch off power to all instruments. Switch them on, in this sequence: the source, test
set, 85102, (also 85101 if an early version with power switch).
• If the display is not clear, try to improve it with the intensity control.
• Source front panel: switch settings are of no concern, except for the line power switch,
because the source is under analyzer control.
• Make sure the power line modules on all instruments are set to the appropriate local
line voltage.
• Check the GPIB addresses of all instruments.
• If the source is an 8360, make sure the language switch is set to 001 as shown:
• If the source is an 8340/8341, make sure the rear panel FREQUENCY STANDARD
switch is set to INTERNAL.
Cabling Checks
• Make sure the system cables are connected as shown in Figure 4-1, “System
Connections.”
• Make sure the test set rear panel reference port extension cables are in place. See
Chapter 9 , “System Installation,” for an explanation of these cables.
• Make sure the IF/detector interconnect cable AND the GPIB cable are connected
between the 85101 and 85102.
• Make sure the source RF output cable is connected to the test set.
• If the source is an 8360, remove the SWEEP OUT/IN connections from the 8360 and
85102. Replace with TRIGGER IN/OUT.
• Disconnect the bias port BNCs and all other BNC cables (except SWEEP OUT/IN or
TRIGGER IN/ OUT) for now. Exception: if the test set is an 8516, leave the SOURCE
CONTROL cable connected between the source and the test set to double the 20 GHz
source signal.
4-8
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart (cont.)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-9
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Figure 4-1
System Connections
NOTES:
1. Power cables must be connected to 85101,
85102, test set, source, and any
peripherals.
2. Connect the reference port extension
cables as shown in Figure 9-8. (Not
applicable for 85110, 8516, 8517.)
4-10
3. For systems without controllers, connect any
peripherals to the 8510 interconnect on the
85101. For systems with controllers, connect
any peripherals and the controller to the
GPIB connector on the 85101.
4. An 8340 or 8360 requires a source
interconnect cable connection when the test
set used is an 8516.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart (cont.)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-11
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Firmware Revisions
Check the 8510 operating system firmware revision. It must be C.06.00 or higher. On the
analyzer, press SYSTEM, [MORE], [SERVICE FUNCTIONS], [SOFTWARE REVISION].
Upgrading an Agilent 8360 Source
For complete compatibility with revision C.07.00 or greater firmware, your source must be
an Agilent 8360 series source. If an 8360 series source is not used, power domain and
receiver calibration functions will not work.
The 8510C works with all 8360 synthesized sweeper models. However, some 8360
instruments must be upgraded to take advantage of two 8510C system features (quick step
mode and test port power flatness correction). Refer to Table 4-1.
Table 4-1
Agilent Model
Upgrade Summary
Serial Prefix
Required for Test Port Flatness Correction
and Quick Step Mode
All
No modification required1
< 3103A
83601A upgrade kit2
83621A
3103A
08360-60167 firmware kit
83631A
3104A to 3111A
08360-60201 firmware kit
≥ 3112A
No modification required1
83622A
≤ 3103A
08360-60167 firmware kit3
83623A
3104A to 3111A
08360-60201 firmware kitc
83624A
3112A to 3144A
No modification required1,3
83640A
≥ 3145A
No modification required1
83630A
83650A
83651A
83620A
83642A
1. Fully compatible at time of shipment.
2. Includes installation.
3. Quick Step cannot be retrofitted to these models.
4-12
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart (cont.)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-13
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Table 4-2
Source Compatibility
Agilent Instrument1
Firmware Revision Number Modification Kit
(or Higher)
8360 series synthesized sweeper
all2
all
all
all
all
6
8340A synthesized sweeper
8340B synthesized sweeper
8341 A synthesized sweeper
8341 B synthesized sweeper
8350A sweep oscillator
unnecessary2
unnecessary
unnecessary
unnecessary
unnecessary
08350-601003
08350-60101
83525-60074
83525-60074
83525-60074
83525-60074
83550-60041
83525-60074
83572-60074
83590-60074
83592-60074
83592-60100
83592-60102
83594-60074
83595-60074
83595-60104
83596-60002
83597-60021
unnecessary
8350B sweep oscillator
6
83522A RF plug-in
6
83525A/B RF plug-in
6
83540A/B RF plug-in
6
83545A RF plug-in
6
83550A RF plug-in
6
83570A RF plug-in
6
83572A RF plug-in
6
83590A RF plug-in
7
83592A RF plug-in
7
83592B RF plug-in
7
83592C RF plug-in
7
83594A RF plug-in
7
83595A RF plug-in
7
83595C RF plug-in
7
83596A RF plug-in
7
83597A RF plug-in
7
8360-series synthesizer
all
8620 sweep oscillator
cannot be used
86200-series RF Plug-ins
cannot be used
1. The sources listed above are the only compatible sources as of December 1990. Consult your
Agilent customer engineer for additional information. To check the firmware revision on your 8360,
press [SHIFT], [49]. The revision appears in the FREQUENCY/TIME window. To check the firmware
revision on your 83500 series RF plug-in, press [SHIFT], [99]. The revision appears in the POWER
window. The firmware revision for all synthesized sweepers appears when the instrument power is
switched.
2. To take advantage of the quick step and test port power flatness correction features, some
8360-series synthesized sweepers must be upgraded. See Table 4-1 for a summary of upgrade kits
required.
3. Converts 8350A to 8510 compatibility
4-14
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
8360 Series Coupler to Bridge Detector
All 8510B/C systems when used with an 8360 series source that have a bridge detector
inside will potentially cause an over-modulation running error message. If your 8510C has
Rev.7.0 or greater, an RF unleveled caution message will also be displayed.
Agilent Model
Coupler to Detector Conversion Prefix
Determination
83620
Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A
will cause problem
83622
Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A
will cause problem
83630
Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A
will cause problem
83650
Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A
will cause problem
83621
Prefix equal to and greater than 3139A
will cause problem
83631
Prefix equal to and greater than 3139A
will cause problem
83651
Prefix equal to and greater than 3139A
will cause problem
83623
Couplers only
will not cause problem
83624
Couplers only
will not cause problem
Workaround
Increase your source power and use test set attenuators, or use a source that has a coupler
in its leveling loop. The problem is caused by dc switching spikes from the test set RF pin
diode switch getting back into the sources leveling loop and causing an unleveled
condition. If this is not satisfactory, there are three upgrade kits available: the
8514B/8515A/85110A (08510-60119), 8517A/B (08510-60118), and the 85110L
(08510-60121) test sets. The upgrade kit will eliminate the RF switching spikes from
getting back into the source leveling loop by installing a dc return between the RF input
and RF pin diode switch inside the test set. Contact an Agilent customer engineer for
installation of these kits.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-15
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
• Switch off power. Switch on the source, the test set, then the analyzer. Check that each
instrument preset condition is correct. Then check the system preset condition by
pressing Instrument State RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET]. The resulting analyzer
display should be similar to Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2
4-16
System Factory Preset State
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart (cont.)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-17
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
• Remove the 85101C top cover. Remove the A5 CPU board and make sure the free run
switch A5S1 is set to all zeroes. See Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3
Location of Switch A5S1
• Remove the test set top cover. Check the setting of configuration switch A3S1. The
correct settings are shown at the left side of the 8510C System-Level Troubleshooting
Block Diagram at the end of this procedure.
• If the source is an 8350, check the setting of configuration switch A3S1. The correct
settings are shown at the left side of the 8510C System-Level Troubleshooting Block
Diagram at the end of this procedure.
If you have completed the control, configuration, and cabling checks, and you still have a
self-test failure, running error message, unratioed power failure, or other obvious failure
type, go to the appropriate troubleshooting section. Otherwise, continue with “No Obvious
Failure Type” on page 4-20.
4-18
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated System Service Flowchart (cont.)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-19
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
No Obvious Failure Type
Verify the 85101C Display/Processor
The best approach to troubleshooting an 8510C when you are not aware of any obvious
failure type is to verify that the 85101C display/processor is working properly. When its
operation is verified, it will act as your diagnostic controller.
Reduce the analyzer system to its basic structure. Disconnect all peripherals such as
printer, plotter, controller, and all their cables. The core system remaining should consist
only of:
8510 network analyzer
test set
source
The system should be connected as shown in Figure 4-1 on page 4-10.
If the 85101 display/processor passed the self-tests at power-up without displaying
self-test failure messages 1 to 14, it is already verified to a 70% confidence level. The
following tests will verify it to a 95% confidence level.
Run all the tests in the “85101 Display/Processor Service Program Menu” on page 4-131. If
a service program test fails, follow the instructions in the “Service Program” section. If all
the tests pass, the problem is almost certainly in one of the remaining instruments: the
85102 IF/detector, the source, or the test set (or their interfaces).
Verify the 85102 IF/Detector
Next, run the all the 85102 IF/Detector tests in the service program. This verifies the
IF/detector to an 80% confidence level.
4-20
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart (cont.)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-21
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Hardware Emulator Tools
Now that you know with a high degree of confidence that both halves of the network
analyzer are working, the next step is to check the test set and the source. Special service
tools are available that emulate a test set and a source: the part numbers are provided in
Chapter 5 , “Replaceable Parts.”
Test Set Emulator
This is a service adapter that substitutes for the test set, by connecting the 20 MHz IF
signal from the 85102 back into the amplifier of the 85102. The total effect on the analyzer
system is similar to connecting a good test set in a normal configuration. This can
determine if a fault is in the test set or the 85102. Refer to “Unratioed Power Failures” on
page 4-85 for the procedure.
If this test indicates that the 85102 IF/detector is not the problem, its confidence level is
now increased from 80% to 95%.
Source Emulator
This is a 60 MHz bandpass filter, which is used to pass the third harmonic of the 85102
output signal to the test set to emulate a signal from an external source. (Actually, almost
any source that has a 60 MHz signal or higher can be used.)
Refer to “Other Failures” for a procedure that uses the source emulator/tripler to
determine whether or not the problem is in the source. Also available is an 8360 front
panel emulator kit. This is an overlay that can be placed over the front panel keys of the
85102 IF/detector. The 85102 keys can then be used to run the built-in service diagnostics
of the 8360, according to the key codes on the overlay. Press SERVICE, [FULL SELF TEST] to
access the procedure.
Other Tests for the Source
For additional assurance that the source is working, you can run the operator's check
procedure in the source manual.
If the procedures in this 8510 service manual indicate a fault in the source, refer to the
troubleshooting procedures in the service manual for that particular source.
4-22
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart (cont.)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-23
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
This page intentionally left blank.
4-24
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8510C System-level Troubleshooting Block Diagram
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
4-26
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
4-28
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8510C Display/Processor Overall Block Diagram
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
4-30
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
4-32
8510C On-Site Service Manual
85102C IF /Detector Overall Block Diagram
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
4-34
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8510C Phase Lock Block Diagram
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting Outline
4-36
8510C On-Site Service Manual
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (1 of 2)
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (2 of 2)
To Page
2 of 2
ss425c
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (LCD) (1 of 2)
To Page
2 of 2
ss425c
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (LCD) (1 of 2)
To Page 1 of 2
ss425c
85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (LCD) (2 of 2)
85102C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (1 of 2)
85102C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram (2 of 2)
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
LCD Failures
LCD Failures
NOTE
The information in this section is specific to an 85101C
display/processor equipped with an LCD. Unless otherwise noted, this
information does not apply to instruments with CRT displays.
This procedure is intended to isolate the faulty assembly (A14, A15, or A16) if the display
is dim, dark, or blank. If the display is illuminated and showing an image, but the color
mix is faulty (or other image problems), refer to the A15 section, “Troubleshooting Image
Problems.”
1. If the display is dim, the backlight assembly is probably defective. Refer to “LCD
Assembly Details” on page 6-18 for replacement procedures.
2. If the display remains dark after the instrument is turned on, follow the procedure in
“Verifying the Inverter Board and Backlight Lamp” on page 4-49.
3. If the display lights-up when the instrument power is turned on, but the display
remains blank, continue with the following:
a. Connect an external VGA monitor to the rear panel VGA output connector on the
instrument.
b. If the external VGA monitor is blank, the A14 GSP display interface board assembly
is probably defective.
Remove the top cover of the instrument to facilitate troubleshooting.
c. If the external VGA monitor is functioning as expected, verify that the LCD data
cable (W7) is properly connecting the A14 GSP display interface board to the A15
LCD. If the cable is properly connected and the display is blank, the most probable
cause is the A15 LCD. If the LCD is defective, replace the complete display assembly.
Refer to “A15 LCD Assembly Replacement” on page 6-16.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-43
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
LCD Failures
A14 GSP Display Interface Board
Circuit Description
The A14 graphics system processor (GSP) display interface board is the main interface
between the A5 central processing unit (CPU) board and the A15 liquid crystal display
(LCD). The A5 CPU board converts the formatted data into GSP commands and writes it
to the A14 GSP display interface board. The GSP processes the data to produce/generate
the necessary analog and digital video signals that are used for the following purposes:
• The analog video signals are used for the VGA compatible RGB output signals which
are then routed to the rear panel.
• The digital video signals are translated to 3.3 volt levels and routed to the A15 LCD.
The A14 assembly receives +5 V from the motherboard that is used for processing and
supplying power to the A16 backlight inverter board (+5 V) and the A15 LCD (3.3 V).
Diagnostic Tests
Self tests and service program tests (see “85101 Display/Processor Service Program Menu”
on page 4-131) check the functionality of the A14 graphics display (GSP) and the A15 LCD.
If any of these display-related tests fail, it usually indicates that the display interface
board needs to be replaced.
Reference Information for Troubleshooting
Refer to Figure 4-4 and Table 4-3 for connector locations on the A14 GSP and pinout
information from A14J4 to motherboard.
4-44
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
LCD Failures
Figure 4-4
A14 Graphics Display Board Connectors
Table 4-3
A14J4 Pinouts
J4 Pin
Signal
I/O
J4 Pin
Signal
I/O
1
GRD
I
18
ID3
I/O
2
GRD
I
19
ID0
I/O
3
ID14
I/O
20
ID1
I/O
4
ID15
I/O
21
GRD
I
5
ID12
I/O
22
GRD
I
6
ID13
I/O
23
IA2
I
7
ID10
I/O
24
IA3
I
8
ID11
I/O
25
RD/LWR
I
9
ID8
I/O
26
IA1
I
10
ID9
I/O
27
GRD
I
11
GRD
I
28
GRD
I
12
GRD
I
29
LDISPACK
O
13
OD6
I/O
30
LDISP
I
14
ID7
I/O
31
LDISPINT
O
15
ID4
I/O
32
LRESET
I
16
ID5
I/O
33
GND
I
17
OD2
I/O
34
GND
I
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-45
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
LCD Failures
A15 LCD
Circuit Description
The A15 LCD assembly is an 8.4-inch liquid crystal display (LCD) with associated drive
circuitry. It receives a +3.3 V power supply from the A14 graphics processor. The display
receives the following signals from the A14:
• digital horizontal sync
• digital vertical sync
• digital blanking
• data clock
• digital red video
• digital green video
• digital blue video
The A15 LCD display includes the backlight lamp and inverter. The lamp attaches to the
LCD display frame but is electrically separate. The backlight is powered by a separate
connection to the attached backlight inverter (A16), which is also electrically separate.
Backlight Inverter (A16) is a part of the A15 LCD assembly. It receives a +5 V power
supply and control signals from the A14 graphics processor. The control signals include
backlight intensity. It outputs a high voltage used to drive the backlight lamp.
Troubleshooting Image Problems
The following information assumes that the display is illuminated when the instrument is
turned on. If the display remains dim, dark, or blank, refer to the section “LCD Failures.”
Display Troubleshooting Procedure
The display should be bright with annotations and the text should be readable. This
procedure allows you to check for non-functioning pixels and other problems.
1. Activate the default colors: Press DISPLAY, [ADJUST DISPLAY], [DEFAULT SETTINGS]. If
this does not correct the color problem, proceed to step 2.
2. Exercise the display test patterns by referring to Table 4-4. Check for damaged pixels;
look for the symptoms described in “How to Identify a Faulty Display” and other serious
abnormalities.
If the A15 LCD is defective, replace the complete display assembly. Refer to “A15 LCD
Assembly Replacement” on page 6-16.
4-46
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
LCD Failures
What Is A Faulty Pixel?
A pixel is a picture element that combines to create an image on the display. They are
about the size of a small pin point. Damaged pixels can be either “permanently on” or
“permanently off.”
• A “permanently on” pixel is red, green, or blue and is always displayed regardless of the
display setting. It will be visible on a dark background.
• A “permanently off” pixel is always dark and is displayed against a background of its
own color.
How to Identify a Faulty Display
The display test has a sequence of red, green, blue, white, and black backgrounds. One or
more of the following symptoms indicate a faulty display.
• complete rows or columns of “permanently on” or “permanently off” pixels
• more than five “permanently on” or “permanently off” pixels (not to exceed a maximum
of two red or blue, or three green)
• two or more consecutive “permanently on” or “permanently off” pixels
• “permanently on” or “permanently off” pixels less than 6.5 mm apart
If any of these symptoms occur, replace the display.
Display Test Patterns
Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments, diagnostics, and
troubleshooting. They may be used for field service as needed. Test patterns are executed
by pressing the following keys: SYSTEM, [MORE], [SERVICE FUNCTIONS], [TEST MENU],
2, 2, =MARKER, 1, =MARKER, 3, =MARKER, 7, =MARKER and enter the test number.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-47
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
LCD Failures
Table 4-4
Tests Pattern Descriptions
Test Name
Description
Test Pat. 1
Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output of the A15 display and
checks for color purity.
Test Pat. 2–4
Displays a red, green, and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of the display and
also the ability to independently control each color.
Test Pat. 5
Displays an all black screen. This is used to check for stuck pixels.
Test Pat. 6
Displays a 16-step gray scale for verifying that the A14 display interface board can
produce 16 different amplitudes of color (in this case, white). The output comes from
the RAM on the GSP board, it is then split. The signal goes through a video DAC and
then to an external monitor or through some buffer amplifiers and then to the internal
LCD. If the external display looks good but the internal display is bad, then the
problem may be with the display or the cable connecting it to the display interface
board. This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope for troubleshooting.
The staircase pattern it produces will quickly show missing or stuck data bits.
Test Pat. 7
Displays the following seven colors: Red, Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, Magenta and
White.
Test Pat. 8
Displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the A14 display interface
board to display 15 colors plus white. The numbers written below each bar indicate the
tint number used to produce that bar (0 and 100=pure red, 33=pure green, 67=pure
blue). This pattern is intended for use with an external display.
Test Pat. 9
Displays the three primary colors (Red, Green, and Blue) at four different intensity
levels. You should see 16 color bands across the screen. Starting at the left side of the
display the pattern is: Black, four bands of Red (each band increasing in intensity),
Black, four bands of Green (each band increasing in intensity), Black, four bands of
Blue (each band increasing in intensity), Black. If any one of the four bits for each
color is missing, the display will not look as described.
Test Pat. 10
Displays a character set for showing the user all the different types and sizes of
characters available. Three sets of characters are drawn in each of the three character
sizes. 125 characters of each size are displayed. Characters 0 and 3 cannot be drawn
and several others are control characters (such as carriage return and line feed).
Test Pat. 11
Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the EXTERNAL display.
It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes. Each stripe should
be clearly visible. A limited bandwidth would smear these lines together. This is used
to test the quality of the external monitor.
Test Pat. 12
Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting, using an oscilloscope. It is similar
to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 20 times across the screen. Each of the 3
outputs of the video palette will then show 20 ramps (instead of one staircase) between
each horizontal sync pulse. This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing
circuit of the A14 display interface board.
Test Pat. 13
Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color convergence of
the external monitor.
Test Pat. 14–15
Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color convergence,
linearization alignment. This is useful when aligning the LCD in the bezel.
4-48
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
LCD Failures
A16 Backlight Inverter Board
Circuit Description
The A16 inverter assembly supplies the ac voltage for the backlight lamp in the A15 LCD
assembly. This assembly takes the +5 Vdc from the A14 GSP and converts it to
approximately 680 Vac steady state. At start-up, the voltage can reach up to 1.5 kVac.
There are two control lines:
• digital ON/OFF
• analog brightness
— 100 % intensity is 0 V
— 50 % intensity is 4.5 V
WARNING
High voltage is present on the inverter board. Be careful when
measuring signals and voltages on the board.
Make sure the plastic cover on the inverter board is held
securely in place by one of the mounting screws. This cover
protects against inadvertent contact with the high voltage
generated by the inverter.
Verifying the Inverter Board and Backlight Lamp
Remove the top cover of the instrument to facilitate troubleshooting. Using Figure 4-5 as a
reference, measure the signals and voltages indicated in Table 4-5. If the signals and
voltages measure correctly, the inverter board is functioning properly.
Figure 4-5
A16 Inverter Board Test Point Locations
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-49
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
LCD Failures
Table 4-5
A16 Inverter Board, Voltages and Signals
Test Point
Signal or Voltage
Test Point
Signal or Voltage
CN1 pin 1
+5.1 Vdc
CN1 pin 5
0 V (ground)
CN1 pin 2
+5.1 Vdc
CN1 pin 6
0 V to +5.1 V
CN1 pin 3
39 mV
CN2 pin 11
+900 V peak sinewave
@ 38 kHz
CN2 pin 5
ac neutral
(referenced to pin 1)
(after completion of power-on)
CN1 pin 4
0 V (ground)
1. This signal is referenced to chassis ground. For easier access to pin 1 of CN2, slide the
plug slightly out of the fully seated position. This will expose a small piece of metal
electrically connected to pin 1. (See detail CN2).
After measuring the test points on CN1 and CN2, match the results and perform the
rework as indicated in the action column in Table 4-6. After successful troubleshooting and
repair, the LCD should operate normally, or at least be illuminated when the instrument is
turned on.
Table 4-6
Inverter Board Troubleshooting Steps
Input
(CN1)
Output
(CN2)
Good
Good
Replace the backlight lamp. See “LCD Assembly Details” on page 6-18.
Good
Bad
Replace the A16 inverter. See “LCD Assembly Details” on page 6-18.
Bad
Bad
Replace the flat flex cable (W8), or the A14 display interface board.
4-50
Action
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Self Test Failures
Overview
The 8510 self test sequence is a series of fourteen individual diagnostic tests that
constitute the major part of the test menu. The test menu also contains four system
commands, three disk commands, and two service commands. This section explains all of
these tests and commands beginning with the self tests.
The self tests sequentially test most of the buses and circuits of the 85101C
display/processor and a few circuits of the 85102 IF/detector. The self test sequence is
initiated automatically at power-up but can also be run manually. If the 8510 passes all of
the tests in the sequence, it loads and runs the operating system program.
How to Use This Section
How you use this section depends on your situation. These are the major topics:
Self Test and Other Failures describes what happens prior to and during the self test
sequence. It gives an example of a failed self test, describes the power-up self test
sequence, and explains what subtests are.
How to Identify a Self Test Failure tells how to spot a self test and subtest failure.
How to Troubleshoot a Self Test Failure explains how to troubleshoot the 8510 when a
self test fails.
How to Access the Test Menu and Run a Self Test tells how to access and run one or
all of the self tests.
System, Disc, and Service Commands explains how to access and use these commands.
Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting lists all of the self tests, shows the most likely
causes of failures (with percentages), and offers additional troubleshooting hints.
How to Reload the Operating System explains how to do this from memory and disc.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-51
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Self Tests and Other Failures
Before or during self tests, the instrument may detect other failures. These are known as
instrument errors and default test 15. The next paragraphs and “What to Do If the
R-L-T-S-8-4-2-1 LEDs Stay Lit (Default Test 15)” explain these conditions.
What to Do If an Instrument Error Occurs
An instrument error may occur at power-up before the self test sequence runs or as it runs.
If this happens, one of the following messages is displayed on the display:
Abort
Break
Instruction Error
Address Error
Processor Error
An example of a processor error message is displayed below.
PROCESSOR ERROR
The processor encountered, an error
from which it could not recover.
Technical Details:
Address executed or
at that time was SR
Top of memory stack
0002 FFAG 2700 0000
next instruction was PC = 000 009C Status register
= 2700
after the error:
009C FFF1 423C 016C 0002
Reason for the error was:
Vector offset = 0010
Processor illegal instruction error
If any of the five messages above are displayed, reload the operating system (explained at
the end of this section).
NOTE
Do not use the memory operations menu softkeys: [GO][SHOW],
[WRITE], [CSHOW], and [CWRITE]. Agilent recommends that only
qualified Agilent service personnel use these selections.
If reloading the operating system does not eliminate instrument errors, contact your
Agilent customer engineer.
4-52
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
What to Do If the R-L-T-S-8-4-2-1 LEDs Stay Lit (Default Test 15)
Default test 15 is the condition when all eight of the front panel display/processor LEDs
(R-L-T-S-8-4-2-1) stay lit.This condition occurs at the beginning of the self tests sequence.
If it persists, it probably means that the sequence could not start or the processor was
unable to clear the front panel LEDs.
If this condition occurs, check the numbered items below using the information on the
power supply test points located in “Power Supply Failures” on page 4-97, or refer to the
test points on the 85101 block diagram.
1. Check the +5 V power supply at the post-regulator. Refer to the “Power Supply Failures”
section for information on power supply test points.
2. Confirm that the A4 GSP assembly (A14 GSP if equipped with an LCD) is properly
seated.
3. Confirm that the A5 CPU assembly is properly seated.
4. Check that all A5S1 switches (see Figure 4-8) are closed.
5. Check these pins of the A5 assembly
Pin
Reading
Line
P2-13
> +2.5 V
LHMF
P2-45
< +0.7 V
HMULBSY
P2-59
> +2.5 V
LGINT (low general interrupt masked)
P2-68
> +2.5 V
LPOP (low power on pulse, from post-regulator)
6. Remove these assemblies: A7 I/O board, A6 EEPROM board, A4 graphics system
processor board (A14 GSP if equipped with an LCD). Disconnect the IF/detector
interconnect cable and the GPIB cable from display/processor rear panel. Verify that
default error 15 is still present. If so, the trouble is isolated to the A5 CPU board
assembly.
Self Test Sequence
The sequence starts testing with the processor-ROM circuit (the kernel) in the
display/processor and then tests: RAM, the data bus, various input/output registers, math
processor, IF/detector interface, and the display/processor keyboard. Some of the tests are
not completely exhaustive, but they do give an indication that these circuits are functional.
When no failures occur, the self test sequence runs as described below.
1. Press and hold the TEST button located on the front panel of the display/processor. The
button is recessed about 1/2 inch. Use an adjustment tool or paper clip to reach it.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-53
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Figure 4-6
Location of Display/Processor LEDs and Test Button
The eight LEDs (shown above) all light. This indicates that the +5 volt supply in the
display/processor is operating properly.
NOTE
The events of the next seven steps happen quickly (about 15 seconds). If
you do not observe each event, do not be concerned.
2. Release the TEST button. All of the LEDs go out to signal the beginning of the self test.
3. The four numbered LEDs (1, 2, 4, 8) briefly flash. They indicate the number of the
current test.
4. TESTING appears on the display.
5. The disk drive LED blinks.
6. LOADING OPERATING SYSTEM appears on the display. The system has completed the
self test sequence. It is now loading the operating system software from nonvolatile
memory into RAM, using a program in the self test ROM.
7. SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS
RECALLING INSTRUMENT STATE appears on the display. The self test ROM has turned
over control to the program stored in RAM. The initialization process continues.
8. INST STATE RECALLED appears on the display with a graticule (grid) and
measurement trace (see Figure 4-7). The measurement/operating system software is
now running.
4-54
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Figure 4-7
Typical Power-Up Display
The type of display that you see depends on the contents of instrument state 8. This
power-up state is factory set to an S11 log-mag display over a typical default frequency
range of 2 GHz to 18 GHz. However, instrument state 8 can be changed. Therefore, your
display may appear different.
Subtests
Subtests are the buildings blocks of most self tests. Subtests further isolate a self test
failure by revealing which part of the self test failed. This information can help to further
verify that a particular board is faulty.
In most repair situations, subtest information is not required or useful because of Agilent’s
assembly level repair strategy for this instrument.
If you want to simulate this type of failure to see an example of a failure message, press 9
and keep it pressed in. Then press TEST. Keep the entry key (9) pressed in until the
failure message appears.
How to Identify a Self Test Failure
Self test failures are displayed three ways:
• By the LCD/CRT
• By the front panel LEDs
• By the CPU board LEDs.
When the display is operating properly, it displays self test failure information as shown
above. In such instances, read the “most likely causes for failure” and troubleshoot
accordingly. To rerun the self test sequence (or a single self test) to verify the fault, refer to
“How to Run the Self Test Sequence Repeatedly.”
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-55
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
How to Identify a Self Test Failure When the Display Is Not Working
When the display does not indicate a self test failure but you suspect a failure, observe the
front panel LEDs. They may or may not indicate the failed self test.
If all of the front panel LEDs are lit, refer to “What to Do If the R-L-T-S-8-4-2-1 LEDs Stay
Lit (Default Test 15)” on page 4-53. (This is not a self test failure but default test 15
condition.)
If some combination of the 8-4-2-1 LEDs stays lit (and none of the R-L-T-S LEDs are lit),
the binary sum of the numbers indicates the failed self test. Continue with the
troubleshooting procedures below.
If some combination of the 8-4-2-1 LEDs stays lit (and only one, two, or three of the
R-L-T-S LEDs are lit), the binary sum of the numbers indicates the failed subtest. To see
what self test failed, continue with the next paragraph.
How to Identify a Self Test Failure with the CPU Board LEDs
When neither the display nor the front panel LEDs indicate a self test failure but you
suspect a failure, check the A5 CPU board as explained below.
1. Turn off the display/processor. Remove its top cover and locate the A5 board. It has red
pull levers and six LEDs near its upper edge. The LEDs are labeled 32 16 8 4 2 1.
Figure 4-8
4-56
Diagnostic LEDs and Switch A5S1 on A5 CPU Board
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
2.
At power-up, all six LEDs light for approximately two seconds. If a self test fails, the
LEDs corresponding to the failed test will light for two seconds. Then the LEDs that
correspond to the subtest number light and stay on. Self test 1 does not display a
subtest number. Self test 15 is not coded.
a. Turn on the instrument and note the first LED pattern. It is the self test number in
binary format.
b. Note the second LED pattern. It is the subtest number in binary format.
3. Either refer to Table 4-7 on page 4-60 to identify and troubleshoot the problem, or rerun
the test to confirm it.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-57
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
How to Troubleshoot a Self Test Failure
If a self test failure message is visible on the display, troubleshoot the instrument based on
the most likely causes for the failure. If the most likely causes for failure are not displayed,
or for additional troubleshooting suggestions, refer to the appropriate self test paragraph
in “Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting” on page 4-60.
How to Access the Test Menu and Run a Self Test
To run a self test, you must first access the test menu. Then you can run the self test in one
of three diagnostic modes:
• Run one test repeatedly
• Run the self test sequence once and stop (in case of a failure) or go on to run the main
program (normal operation)
• Run the self test sequence in a repeating (and failure logging) loop.
How to Access the Test Menu
If the operating system is running properly, press the SYSTEM key. Then press [MORE],
[SERVICE FUNCTIONS], [SERVICE MENU]. The self test selections should appear with other
selections.
If the instrument is off, press and hold in any key and turn on the instrument. When the
keyboard self test failure message appears, release the key. Press =MARKER to enter the
test menu.
With the instrument on, press and hold in any key. Then press and release the recessed
TEST button. When the keyboard self test failure message appears, release the entry key.
Press to enter the test menu.
Unless you entered the menu with the SYSTEM key, test 14 (binary 8 4 2) should be
indicated on the front panel LEDs of the display/processor. If a fault occurred before
test 14, the self test sequence has stopped and the LEDs indicate the test that failed. Press
=MARKER to enter the test menu.
How to Run a Single Self-Test Repeatedly
NOTE
This mode in not recommended for field use. It is typically used at the
factory.
Use this repeating mode with external test equipment to trace waveforms and signals
through circuits in question and detect intermittent failures. Note that if an error is found,
the front panel LEDs do not clear until you rerun the entire self test sequence (even if the
fault has cleared).
Access the test menu and enter the number of the self test with the entry keys. Then press
=MARKER. The test repeats continuously unless a processor error halts it.
To exit the loop, press any entry key.
4-58
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
How to Run the Self Test Sequence Once
Press the recessed TEST button to run the self test sequence once.
Alternatively, access the test menu and enter number 17 (rerun self test) with the entry
keys. Then press =MARKER.
How to Run the Self Test Sequence Repeatedly
Access the test menu and enter number 18 (repeat test loop) with the entry keys. Then
press =MARKER. Test 18 runs the entire self test continuously. It displays the number of
times the sequence has passed, failed, and which test and subtest (if any) last failed.
In order to avoid wearing out EEPROM memory cells, the EEPROM write test routine is
only performed for the first 20 cycles of a repeat loop. This applies only to the self test
selections 12 (nonvolatile memory test) and 18 (repeat test loop).
How to Exit Self Test
Press the recessed TEST button to exit any self test.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-59
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting
This part lists each of the 14 self tests and suggests troubleshooting techniques in the
event of a failure. The conditions listed under “Most Likely Causes of Failure” are a
duplicate of information displayed on the display.
The original 85101C display/processor incorporated a cathode ray tube
(CRT). The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display (LCD).
NOTE
Self tests for the A4 display/processor (CRT design) and the
A14 display/processor (LCD design) are functionally equivalent. The
notation A4 (A14) indicates that the information applies to both
designs.
Self Test Menu
The self test part of the main Service Functions test menu appears below in Table 4-7. The
LED pattern represents the binary code which appears on the front panel and A5 CPU
board as explained earlier.
Table 4-7
Self Test Menu and LED Pattern
LED Pattern
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Name of Test
A5 Processor EPROM
A5 Processor RAM
A7 Data Bus
A4 (A14) Display Processor
A4 (A14) Display Ram
A7 Timer/Clock/RS-232
A7 Public GPIB (HP-IB)
A7 System Bus
Interrupt System
A5 Multiplier
A7 Disk Controller
A6 Nonvolatile Memory
IF/Detector Data
Keyboard
(performed after test 2)
32
16
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
8
no code
·
·
·
·
·
·
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4
2
1
·
·
O
O
O
O
·
·
·
·
O
O
O
O
O
·
·
O
O
·
·
O
O
·
·
O
O
·
O
·
O
·
O
·
O
·
O
·
“.” = LED off, “O”= LED on
The following paragraphs list the most likely cause of failure for each test. The percentage
in parentheses is the probability that a particular item is at fault. The percentages may
not always total 100%. One percent (1%) means very low probability.
Supplemental troubleshooting help is provided by these features:
• Additional troubleshooting hints (part of each test description)
• System-level troubleshooting block diagram
• Service program menu of the firmware and the Service Program section in this manual.
4-60
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Test 1: A5 Processor EPROM
Most likely cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
A5 EPROM failure (60%)
A5 processor board failure (40%)
A8 motherboard trace/connector failure (1%)
A4 (A14)/A6/A7 trace problem (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• Check the seating of the A5 board.
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the CPU
Board Tests (A5).
Test 2: A5 Processor RAM
Most likely cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
A5 RAM failure (80%)
A5 processor board failure (20%)
A8 motherboard trace/connector failure (1%)
A4 (A14)/A6/A7 trace problem (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• Remove A4 (A14), A6, and A7 from the instrument and rerun self test 2. If the failure
clears, suspect one of the boards removed.
• In the main Service Functions menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the CPU
Board Tests (A5).
Test 3: A7 Data Bus
Most likely cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
A7 I/O board failure (80%)
A5 processor board failure (20%)
A8 motherboard trace/connector failure (1%)
A4 (A14)/A6/A7 trace problem (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• Minimize the system: remove the A6 EEPROM board and A4 (A14) graphic signal
processor board. Rerun test 3. If removing A6 or A4 (A14) appears to fix the problem,
suspect A4 (A14), A6, and A7. The interrupt circuits on A7 may be faulty but only
appear faulty with A6 and A4 (A14) installed.
• In the main Service Functions menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the I/O Board
and Front Panel Tests (A1, A2, A7).
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-61
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Test 4: A4 (A14) Display Processor
Most likely cause of failure:
• A4 (A14) graphics signal processor board failure (90%)
• A5 processor board failure (10%)
• A8 motherboard trace/connector failure (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510 service
program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run display board
and CRT tests (A4, A11) or LCD tests (A14, A15).
Test 5: A4 (A14) Display RAM
Most likely cause of failure:
• A4 (A14) graphics signal processor board failure (90%)
• A4 (A14)/A6/A7 trace problem (5%)
• 85102 motherboard or connector or cable failure (5%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510
service program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run
display board and CRT test (A4, A11) or LCD tests (A14, A15).
Test 6: A7 Timer/Clock/RS-232
Most likely cause of failure:
• A7 I/O board failure (90%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the I/O Board
and Front Panel Tests (A1, A2, A7).
Test 7: A7 Public GPIB (HP-IB)
Most likely cause of failure:
• A7 I/O board failure (90%)
• A5 CPU board failure (10%)
• A8 motherboard trace/connection failure (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• Minimize the system: remove A6 and all GPIB cables. Rerun self test number 7. If it
does not pass, check the control lines.
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the I/O Board
and Front Panel Tests (A1, A2, A7).
4-62
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Test 8: A7 System Bus
Most likely cause of failure:
• A7 I/O board failure (80%)
• A5 CPU board (20%)
• A8 motherboard (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• Minimize the system: remove A6 and all GPIB cables. Rerun self test number 8. If it
does not pass, check the control lines.
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the I/O Board
and Front Panel Tests (Al, A2, A7).
Test 9: A9 Interrupt System
Most likely cause of failure:
• A7 I/O board failure (90%)
• A5 processor board failure (10%)
• A8 motherboard trace/connector failure (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the CPU
Board Tests (A5).
Test 10: A5 Multiplier
Most likely cause of failure:
• A5 processor board failure (100%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the CPU
Board Tests (A5).
Test 11: A7 Disc Controller
Most likely cause of failure:
• A7 I/O board failure (50%)
• A1A1 disk drive (50%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• Check the power supply to the disk drive. If out of tolerance, check the supplies on the
power supply board.
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the I/O Board
and Front Panel Tests (A1, A2, A7).
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-63
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Test 12: A6 Nonvolatile memory
Most likely cause of failure:
• A6 nonvolatile memory board failure (70%)
• Nonvolatile memory not initialized (30%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• Make sure the A6 board is properly seated.
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the
Non-Volatile Memory Board Tests (A6).
Test 13: IF/Detector Data
Most likely cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
•
•
85102 interconnect cable missing or damaged (50%)
85102 A24 failure (20%)
85101 A7 I/O board failure (20%)
85102 A6 failure (10%)
85102 motherboard or connector or cable failure (1%)
85101 A8 motherboard or connector failure (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and run the CPU
Board (A5) Tests and the I/O Board and Front Panel Tests (A1, A2, A7).
• To troubleshoot the IF/detector, refer to the 85102 IF/Detector tests part of the “Service
Program” section.
Test 14: Keyboard Test
Most likely cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
•
85101 keyboard key was held down during power-up (80%)
A7 I/O board failure (10%)
A1 keyboard failure (10%)
Keyboard connecting cable missing or damaged (1%)
85101 A8 motherboard or connector failure (1%)
Additional troubleshooting hints:
• In the main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 2, =MARKER to enter the 8510 Service
Program menu. Select 85101 Display/Processor Service Program and then select the I/O
Board and Front Panel Tests (A1, A2, A7). Run the Keyboard and LEDs Test (A1, A7).
Self Test 14 Selected from Main Service Functions Test Menu
To manually verify the complete operation of each key on the 85101 display/processor and
85102 IF/detector, select test 14. As you press each key, the LCD/CRT should display a
different hex code. To exit this test, press the recessed TEST button.
4-64
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
System, Disc, and Service Commands
System Command 15: Run Main Program
The processor runs the self test sequence but disregards (does not stop for or report) any
failures. Then it loads the operating system from memory to RAM and begins program
execution.
System Command 16: Memory Operations
CAUTION
You can destroy the operating system in memory with this
selection.
Agilent recommends that you do not use this selection unless assisted by a qualified
Agilent customer engineer. This routine allows direct access to individual memory
locations. Thus you can observe or change data. If you destroy the operating system in
memory, reload the operating system with disk command 19 (below).
System Command 17: Rerun Self Test
The processor runs the self test sequence once but stops if there are any failures. If there
are no failures, it loads the operating system and begins program execution.
System Command 18: Repeat Test Loop
The processor runs the self test sequence continuously. The LCD/CRT displays the number
of times the sequence has passed (run without failure) and failed. This selection is a
powerful mode for troubleshooting intermittent failures.
Press the recessed TEST button to exit the test loop.
Disc Command 19: Load Program Disc
Use this selection to load or reload the operating system.
Slide the operating system disk into the disk drive. Press SYSTEM, [MORE], [SERVICE
FUNCTIONS], [TEST MENU] to enter the Main Service Functions test menu.
In the Main Service Functions test menu, press 1, 9, =MARKER. Select the program file
labeled PG_8510C and press [LOAD FILE] to load the operating system program into the
network analyzer from the program file PG_8510C on the disk. In about a minute, the
operating system should be loaded and running. Refer to “How to Reload the Operating
System” on page 4-67 for more information on reloading the operating system.
If the memory board has not been initialized, refer to the “85101 Nonvolatile Memory
Board (A6) Tests” part of the “Service Program” section.
The program file PG_8360FPE is the 8360 series Front Panel Emulator program. It is not
necessary to load this program separately as it is loaded automatically when the operating
system PG_8510C is loaded. See the “8360 Service Program Menu” on page 4-145 for details
on using the 8360 front panel emulator.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-65
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
Disc Command 20: Record Program Disc
Use this selection to record a backup copy of the operating system on an initialized (see
below) blank disk. Use [DEFAULT TITLE] to select the default program filename PG_8510C.
Use [REPLACE MENU] to overwrite an existing program file on the disk.
Slide the disk into the disk drive. In the Main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 0,
=MARKER. Press [DEFAULT TITLE], and press [STORE FILE] to record the operating system
program from the network analyzer to a program file PG_8510C on the disk.
Disc Command 21: Initialize Disc
Use this selection to initialize a disk prior to recording the operating system on it. You can
use a disk that has been recorded on before or not, but it should be double-sided high
density (1.44 MB) and of good quality.
Slide the disk into the disk drive. In the Main Service Functions test menu, press 2, 1,
=MARKER. In about a minute, the disk will be initialized in the LIF format needed for
recording the operating system.
Service Command 22: Run Service Program
Refer to the “Service Program” section to use this selection.
Service Command 23: Diagnose a Failure
This selection displays the failure message for a self test and subtest of your choice. Use it
to read failure messages when the display goes blank but is not faulty. Refer to “How to
Identify a Self Test Failure” toward the beginning of this section. Obtain the self test and
subtest numbers as directed.
Press SYSTEM, [MORE], [SERVICE FUNCTIONS], [TEST MENU] to enter the Main Service
Functions test menu. Then press 2, 3, =MARKER to display the “diagnose a failure” screen.
Enter the self test and subtest numbers obtained above and press =MARKER. The
LCD/CRT should display the appropriate failure messages.
4-66
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
How to Reload the Operating System
You can reload the operating system from RAM or from the disk.
To reload from RAM, press the recessed TEST button. This re-initializes the system, reruns
the self tests sequence, and (if no failures occur) displays the power-up instrument state
number 8.
If the operating system does not reload properly from RAM, you can reload it from disk.
But do so only as a last resort. Refer to “Disc Command 19: Load Program Disc” on page
4-65.
If the “Disc Command 19: Load Program Disc” or the Main Service Functions test menu
cannot be accessed because of an operating system or loading error, then turn off the
85101C display/processor. Hold down the =MARKER key on the front panel while turning
on the 85101C. Keep the =MARKER key pressed until the keyboard self test failure message
appears on the display. Then release the =MARKER key. Press and release the =MARKER
key again and the Test Menu will appear. “Disc Command 19: Load Program Disc” can now
be used to reload the operating system.
If it does not solve the problem, contact an Agilent customer engineer for assistance.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-67
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Self Test Failures
This page intentionally left blank.
4-68
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Running Error Messages
Running Error Messages as Built-In Diagnostics
Running error messages appear on the 8510C display whenever the 85101C CPU detects
an error during normal operation. As a built-in diagnostic test, the CPU is constantly
monitoring the overall system operation, especially that of the phaselock between the
85102 IF/detector, the test set and the source. Internal firmware routines are constantly
checking power levels, phase relationships, frequency changes, operator commands, and so
forth.
A message is displayed on the LCD/CRT whenever the CPU detects a fault. In other words,
running error messages inform you of any detected faults while the system is running.
When an error is detected and a running error message is displayed, the system will
usually continue running (making measurements). At this time the system has already
passed the power-on self test diagnostics. Therefore, it is unlikely that a running error
message indicates a problem in the 85101C display/processor unless the CPU has failed.
Whenever you get an error message, be sure it is a consistent and repeatable error. Press
the ENTRY OFF key to remove the message from the display and then press the
MEASUREMENT RESTART key to take another sweep. Many times, an error message like
PHASELOCK LOST is only an intermittent loss of phase lock that can be corrected on the
next sweep. If the message is gone, then there is no real problem. However, if the error
message repeats, find that message in this section and note the possible causes and
troubleshooting suggestions.
Different Types of Running Error Messages
The four types of 8510C error messages are:
•
•
•
•
Cautions
Prompts
Tells
Errors
These four types are described below. Only those error messages which are related to
service and repair are documented in this section. Refer to the Keyword Dictionary for an
explanation of caution and tell messages. Messages such as those following are not
documented in this section because they are not related to service and are mostly
self-explanatory.
•
•
•
•
FILE NOT FOUND (caution type)
POSITION SLIDE THEN PRESS KEY TO MEASURE (prompt type)
RECALLING CAL SET (tell type)
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY (error type)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-69
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Error Message Characteristics
The general characteristics of each type of error message are described in the following
paragraphs.
Caution Type Messages
These messages are preceded with the word CAUTION and are accompanied by a beeping
tone. They usually indicate a problem with the 85102 IF/detector, test set, source, or disk
drive. They are the main subject of this section because they are related to hardware
failures more than the other types of messages. Except for those caution messages that are
concerned with the disk or disk drive, most of these messages relate to the hardware
phaselock system.
For example, if you disconnect the RF source power from the test set, the message
CAUTION: NO IF FOUND will be displayed. Immediately, the CPU has determined that
there is insufficient IF power and reports the error on the display. However, because the
CPU uses the information supplied by the 85102 A21 IF counter assembly, it is possible
that this board (A21) is faulty and not the IF signal. Therefore, be careful in your
interpretation of these error messages. Remember, the message indicates that a problem
has been detected on a certain assembly, but the message does not always indicate where
the actual problem is located.
Prompt Type Messages
Prompts are displayed whenever the CPU wants you to act during the normal running of
the instrument. These messages do not indicate a failure. For example, if you have just
finished calibrating the system and you do not have enough room to store the calibration,
the prompt NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL; DELETE A CAL SET will be displayed. Here, the CPU
knows that you have previously saved calibrations in all of the available cal sets. It is
prompting you to delete one or more cal sets so that you can store the one you have just
finished.
Tell Type Messages
Tell messages are displayed whenever the CPU is telling you what it is doing or has done.
This type of message does not indicate a failure or a problem unless the message is
unrelated to a key you thought you pressed. For example, if you want to save the current
state of the 8510C for any reason, you would press the INSTRUMENT STATE SAVE key on the
85102. The CPU would immediately recognize your command and tell you that it is
obeying by displaying the message: SAVING INST STATE.
Error Type Messages
These messages are displayed whenever the system cannot continue running because of a
programming error. Error messages are not related to CAUTION messages. For example, if
you have programmed the 8510C to perform a function requiring moving data to its
internal memory and it does not have enough room to store the data, the message
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY will be displayed on the LCD/CRT.
4-70
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Things to Remember about Running Error Messages
• They may be caused by either an internal problem or an operator error.
• In many cases, they will not stop the measurement sweep.
• They can be intermittent or permanent and, in the case of cautions, the message
indicates where the failure is detected and not always where the problem exists.
• They may be caused by an 85101C CPU failure or error, not necessarily by the cause
indicated in the message. However, this type of failure is rare.
• They remain on the display until you clear the message by correcting the problem,
pressing ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART.
Categories of Caution Running Error Messages
The following four types of CAUTION running error messages are used for service and
troubleshooting:
Phase Lock Running Error Messages
NOTE
•
•
•
•
•
•
Refer to Chapter 3 for a detailed description of how these phase lock
error messages are generated.
PRETUNE FAILURE
PRETUNE LOST FAILURE
NO IF FOUND
PHASE LOCK FAILURE
PHASE LOCK LOST
VTO OVER RANGE
IF/Detector ADC Running Error Messages
•
•
•
•
•
ADC NOT RESPONDING
ADC CAL FAILED
IF CAL FAILED
IF OVERLOAD
AUTORANGE CAL FAILED
Source Sweep Running Error Messages
• SOURCE SWEEP SYNC ERROR
• SWEEP TIME TOO FAST
GPIB (HP-IB) Running Error Messages
• SOURCE SYNTAX ERROR
• SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR
• TEST SET SYNTAX ERROR
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-71
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Running Error Message Troubleshooting
System-Level Troubleshooting Block Diagram
Use the system-level troubleshooting block diagram, as a reference guide for
troubleshooting running error messages. Read “How to Read This Block Diagram” to the
left of the block diagram. The running error messages are listed on the right, and have
numbers associated with each message that cross-reference locations on the block
diagram.
Helpful Troubleshooting Hints
Before troubleshooting a caution running error message, first do the following:
• Make sure that the line power applied to all instruments is correct. Check all
connections. Refer to Chapter 9 , “System Installation,” if necessary.
• Make sure the source RF power and frequency are correct, as some phase lock errors
are caused by these being improperly set.
• Be sure that the test set is properly downconverting the RF source input signal to
20 MHz. Refer to “Unratioed Power Failures” to verify test set operation.
• Always press the ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART keys several times after an
error message is displayed. This will allow you to obtain the best indication of the true
failure.
This is necessary because a running error message may be the result of the CPU executing
a firmware instruction at the time of failure. Therefore, the displayed error message is
indicating a related failure—not the actual failure. It is indicating a failure at the wrong
place or wrong assembly. The error message that continually repeats is the running error
message you want to troubleshoot.
• Make sure the system is powered up in the proper order, to avoid a possible phaselock
error. The instrument power-on sequence is:
In systems with external controllers, switch on power to the controller last, the 85101C
next to last.
In systems without external controllers, switch on power to the 85101C last.
• Always disconnect all unnecessary peripheral instruments and non-terminated GPIB
cables from the system when troubleshooting.
• Check the cables and the connections to the boards. Remove the 85102 top cover and
check that all snap-on cables are connected properly to the boards. Each cable is labeled
with a J (jack) number that corresponds to the J input on the board cover.
4-72
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Alphabetical List of Caution Running Error Messages
Troubleshooting suggestions and probable causes of failure are given with the following
list of messages.
Always press the ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART keys to see if the error message
repeats. If it does not repeat, it is probably NOT a true error, but rather an intermittent
failure. If it does repeat, locate the error message below and follow the troubleshooting
suggestions.
ADC Cal Failed
The 85102 A18 A/D converter assembly is calibrated by the ADC of the A17 sample/hold
board. The 85101C CPU detects incorrect values of the measured bits and displays this
message.
Possible cause of failure:
• 85102 A18 ADC board
• 85102 A17 sample and hold board
• 85102 A19 ADC control board
Troubleshooting:
• Run the 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
• Run the 85102 service program tests 1 (A19), 3 (A18), and 4 (A17).
• If the Service Program found no fault with any assembly, refer to “Other Failures” on
page 4-125 and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test.
ADC Not Responding
The 85102 A18 ADC board is not sending an expected interrupt service request to the
85101C CPU. This message is the highest priority interrupt in the 8510C.
Probable cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
•
85102 A18 ADC
85102 A19 ADC control
85102 A24 CPU interface
85101C interrupt problem
IF/display interconnect cable
Troubleshooting:
•
•
•
•
Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode
Run 85102 service program tests 1 (A19) and 3 (A18)
Run 85101C service program tests (I/O board tests)
If the service program found no fault with any assembly, refer to “Other Failures” on
page 4-125 and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-73
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Autorange Cal Failed
The CPU tries to calibrate the switchable gain amplifiers (0 dB, 12 dB, 24 dB, 36 dB, and
48 dB gain steps) on the 85102 IF amplifier boards (A10 and A12). If the measured values
exceed the normal error limits, this message is displayed.
Probable cause of error:
• 85102 A10 or A12 IF amplifier
Troubleshooting:
• Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
• Run 85102 service program test 5 (A10/A12).
Caution: Optional Function Not Installed
This message occurs if the A8 security key assembly in the 85101C is removed.
Probable cause of failure:
• Missing 85101C A8 security key
Disc Communication Error
This message occurs when an external disk drive loses communication with the 85101C
A7 I/O board assembly.
Probable cause of failure:
• Missing or bad GPIB cable between the 85101C and the external disk drive
• 85101C A7 I/O board
Disc Hardware Problem
This message occurs when attempting access to an external disk drive, and indicates a
hardware type problem with the drive. This message does not indicate a failure with the
8510C internal disk drive.
Probable causes of failure:
• Hardware failure in the external disk drive
Disc Read or Write Error
This message indicates an internal disk drive communication failure. Probable causes of
failure:
• Bad media disk
• 85101C A7 I/O board
• 85101C internal disk drive
4-74
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Disc Media Wearing Out - Replace Soon
This indicates that further use of the disk may cause loss of data. The external drive
counts the number of disk revolutions and records that number on the disk. When a
certain number of revolutions has occurred, the disk drive causes this caution error
message to appear. The message is not prompted by a measure of a disk’s magnetic
properties, and is meant only to advise the user of a potential disk media failure.
Most probable cause of failure:
• Disk media in an external disk drive is old
Failure - Check System Bus Configuration
This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source. This is an indication of incorrect
power level flatness (correction only). Refer to the source service manual for complete
troubleshooting information.
Failure - Fault Indicator On
This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source. Refer to the source service
manual for complete troubleshooting information.
Failure - Overmodulation
This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source. It appears when the RF output of
the source is being overmodulated. Refer to the source service manual for complete
troubleshooting information.
Failure - RF Unlocked
This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source. Refer to the source service
manual for complete troubleshooting information.
Failure - Self Test Failure
This message refers to a failure of the 8360-series source. It indicates a failure of the
source CPU, CPU power supply, or a phaselock unlocked condition. Refer to the source
service manual for complete troubleshooting information.
IF Cal Failed
The 85102 A6 clock board provides a 100 kHz calibration signal to IF amplifiers A10 and
A12. The 85101C CPU uses this signal to calibrate the 85102 IF amplifiers. If the
calibration error exceeds a certain limit, the CPU displays this message on the display.
Probable cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
•
85102 100 kHz cal signal from A6 clock
85102 A10 or A12 IF amplifier
85102 A5 or A7 synchronous detector
85102 A17 sample/hold
4 MHz from the 85102 A6 clock assembly to the A7 and A5 sync detector assemblies.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-75
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Troubleshooting:
• Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
• Run 85102 service program tests 4 (A17), 5 (A10/A12), and 6 (A5/A7).
• Both the test and reference channels may appear faulty, even though only one channel
may have a problem. Swap the A5 and A7 boards, and also the A10 and A12 boards as
they are the same to help determine if one or both of these matched boards are faulty.
• If the service program found no fault with any assembly, refer to “Other Failures” and
run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test.
Further troubleshooting:
When the IF Cal Failed running error message is displayed, the 85102 A17 or A5/A7
boards may be faulty. Also, the A6, A5/A7, and A10/A12 could be faulty because they are
also part of the IF section. The following tests will help you determine which of these board
assemblies is faulty.
If there are spikes on the trace greater than 20 dB at bandpass points (2.4 GHz, 13.5 GHz,
and 20.0 GHz), suspect a failure the A17 board.
Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET] and look for the spikes
explained above. If the error message appears and/or spikes appear at those points, follow
the steps below:
1. Run the 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
2. If the Sync Detector test fails, the following message will appear on the display:
Failed
***SYNC DETECTOR TEST ***
Sample and hold line has no output. Check sample and hold (A17).
Check output amplifier on sync detector board (A7).
If this message appears as is or if it indicates the A5 board instead of A7, continue with
the steps below. If another test failed with another message, refer to the information in
“Service Program” for that test. If no tests fail, do not continue with this test.
3. Run the 85102 Service Program test 4, cal DAC test (A17) and the LCD/CRT should
display: Passed. If it does not indicate Passed, you should suspect the A17 cal DAC
assembly and not the A5 or A7 boards.
4. To determine which board is defective (sync detector A5 and A7 or Cal Dac A17), reverse
the inputs to A17 as follows:
• Swap cables J1 and J3
• Swap cables J2 and J4
This exchange of cables means that the A5 or A7 board inputs to A17 are exchanged.
Remember that the A5 and A7 boards are electrically and mechanically the same.
5. Run 85102 service program test 6, Synchronous Detector Test (A5, A7). If the display
prompt indicates the same sync detector board (A5 or A7) that was in the first failure
message, it means that the A17 board is defective. If the display prompt indicates that
the other sync detector board is the problem, it means that the first sync detector is
defective.
4-76
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
IF Overload (or O)
The error message “CAUTION: IF OVERLOAD” is displayed and/or an O is displayed on the
left side of the display.
Both error messages indicate that the 85102 IF amplifier (A10 or A12) is overloaded. The
CPU detects the overload condition from a status bit on the A10 or A12 IF boards. The O on
the left side of the display is usually an intermittent failure that can disappear during a
measurement sweep.
Do not be overly concerned with this type of error. O can appear if you are measuring a
device with a sharp change in response (typically greater than 24 dB). This is normal and
happens because the 85102 A10/A12 IF amp autoranging cannot respond fast enough to a
step in RF power greater than 24 dB at adjacent data points. It is sometimes possible to
eliminate the O by doing one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Slow down the sweep time
Change ramp sweep to step sweep mode
Change the number of points
Change the frequency span
Probable cause of failure:
• Operator error. The 8510C maybe operated in manual mode with the source power too
high (samplers are receiving excessive RF power).
• There is no 20 dB pad on the thru cable for an R/T test set (8512).
• IF gain is too high. Access the IF gain test and control by pressing AUXILIARY MENUS,
SYSTEM, [MORE], [SERVICE FUNCTIONS], [IF GAIN].
Troubleshooting:
• Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
Initialization Failed
This message occurs when a disk will not initialize in the 85101C disk drive.
Most probable failure:
• 85101C disk drive
• disk media
No IF Found
This error is detected by the level detector and the 85102 A21 IF counter board. This is
done using an algorithm in the 85101C math CPU to calculate the IF frequency. The A21
counter and the CPU check if the IF is within range and has enough power. If not, the CPU
initiates a search mode that attempts to relocate the test set VTO harmonic to re-establish
the 20 MHz IF. This message is displayed if the IF is not found, or is not within range.
Probable cause of failure:
• RF source signal may be absent, low in power, or at an incorrect frequency
• 85102 A21 IF counter board
• Test set samplers. Be sure that the test set A3 summing amplifier assembly has not
biased the samplers off. Measure the voltage on the sampler control pin to each sampler
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-77
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
•
•
•
•
•
to verify TTL levels. 0 volts turns the sampler on and approximately 3 volts or greater
turns it off. You can press the S-parameter front panel keys to toggle the samplers.
Defective cable in the IF signal path
Test set component failure: A weak VTO, bad power amplifier, step recovery diode, or
4-way power splitter in the VTO
85101C A5 math CPU
85102 stop sweep cable not connected
Occasionally, the 85102 A20 sweep ADC can cause this error, accompanied by a Source
Sweep Sync error message.
Troubleshooting:
•
•
•
•
Check the RF source to test set cable.
Run the 85102 service program in the Run All mode.
Run 85101C service program test 1 (CPU A5), and the 85102 tests 2 (A20) and A (A21).
Perform the unratioed power test in “Unratioed Power Failures” to see if the samplers
are working.
• Check the IF test set interconnect cable.
If the test set is an 8514A or 8515A, compare the S11 and S22 traces. If one looks bad and
the other looks good, the 85102 and 85101C are probably working. Therefore, suspect a
problem with the test set or the IF test set interconnect cable. If both S11 and S22 look
bad, first suspect a problem with the 85102 or the source.
NOTE
This check does not work for 8512A and 8513A test sets. However, you
can compare the a1 and b1 channels for unratioed power levels. Refer to
“Unratioed Power Failures.”
Optional Function Not Installed
This message is prompted by attempting to use an option that has not been installed in the
8510C.
Most probable failure:
• Attempted use of an option that has not been installed (time domain or pulse, for
example).
Phase Lock Failure
Because pretune is accomplished and the IF is detected by the time you see this message,
it usually means that the A22 pretune, samplers, A14 VTO, and A21 IF counter are
functioning. When a phase lock failure occurs only after a successful pretune, and the main
phase lock is switched in, and is detected by the 20 MHz IF counter and 85101C math
CPU.
Probable cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
85102 A23 main phase lock assembly
85102 20 MHz reference signal from A6 clock assembly
85102 A21 IF counter assembly
LPRTHLD line to test set A3 summing amplifier (from 85102 A22)
4-78
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
• Weak or noisy VTO in the test set. If you have an intermittent error message, see if the
error message appears as you gently torque the VTO heat sink. If it does, the VTO
assembly has a problem. Also, check the screws around the frequency converter
(samplers) and VTO to be sure they are tight.
Troubleshooting:
• Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
• Run 85102 service program tests 8 (A22), 9 (A23), and A (A21).
• Check the A6 clock board (20 MHz signal). Refer to “Other Failures.”
Phase Lock Lost
This error message indicates that the 8510C was phase locked but lost lock. Loss of phase
lock is detected by the 85102 A21 20 MHz IF counter and the 85101C A5 CPU after
pretune. Also, this error message is often intermittent. Be sure to press the ENTRY OFF and
MEASUREMENT RESTART keys to verify that this is a repeatable message.
If this error message occurs when the 8430/41 source is in the RAMP mode, but not in the
STEP mode, the problem is most likely the source or the 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly.
If so, be sure to check the A20 board with the service program diagnostics.
Probable cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power holes or frequency error in the source
85102 A21 IF counter
85102 A22 pretune phase lock assembly
85102 A23 main phase lock
Test set A3 VTO summing amplifier assembly
Faulty or intermittent VTO assembly with < 15 dB power loss
Troubleshooting:
•
•
•
•
Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
Run 85102 service program tests 8 (A22), 9 (A23), and A (A21).
Check the unratioed power level of test set signal path a1.
Check all rear panel connections.
Pretune Failure (Pretune Lost Failure)
The lock detector on the 85102 A22 pretune control assembly indicates that the pretune
cycle has not occurred. The pretune cycle changes the VTO output to a frequency where
one of its harmonics mixes with the RF to produce the 20 MHz IF.
The power from the VTO sense line must drop about 15 dB (to 18 dBm) before a VTO
failure message occurs. This condition could cause the VTO frequency to be noisy and low
in power.
Probable cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
•
Test set power turned off
Overheated or bad test set VTO
85102 A23 main phase lock board
IF detector/test set interconnect cable
85102 A22 pretune assembly
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-79
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
• Test set A3 VTO summing amplifier
• LPRTHLD line to test set A3 summing amplifier (from 85102 A22 pretune assembly)
Troubleshooting:
•
•
•
•
•
Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode
Run 85102 service program tests 8 (A22) and 9 (A23)
Check test set line power and fuses
Check IF test set interconnect cable
Refer to “Unratioed Power Failures” to check operation of the test set
Pulse Cal Failure On Test/Reference Channel(s) or Both Channels
This error message reports a failure detected in the pulsed-RF circuitry.
Probable cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
85102 A6 clock board (for both channels only)
85102 A2 multiplexer board
85102 A3 and A4 (A14) test and reference channel detector boards
85102 A16 sample and hold board
Source GPIB (HP-IB) Syntax Error
The source does not respond to a known good GPIB command.
Probable cause of failure:
• Source GPIB assembly
• 85101C A7 I/O assembly (GPIB portion)
• GPIB cable between the source and 85101C
Troubleshooting:
•
Run 85101C service program test 2 (A7 I/O tests).
Source Sweep Sync Error
The 8510C is not synchronized with the source. Specifically, the 85102 A20 sweep ADC is
not properly tracking the 0 to 10 volt ramp from the source.
Probable cause of failure:
• 85102 A20 sweep ADC
• Stop sweep or sweep output cables not connected
• Defective source
Troubleshooting:
• Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
• Run 85102 service program test 2 (A20).
• Check all cabling. Refer to Chapter 9 , “System Installation,” particularly noting the
stop sweep and sweep in/out connections.
• Refer to “Unratioed Power Failures” to check source operation.
• Use the trim sweep procedure in the Operating and Programming Manual to adjust the
sweep ADC gain DAC.
4-80
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Sweep Time Too Fast
Too many sweep triggers or too rapid sweep triggers were sent from the 85102 A20 sweep
ADC assembly. The 85102 A19 ADC control assembly sends a status bit indicating it did
not have time to complete an A to D conversion before receiving the next sweep trigger.
Probable cause of error:
• 85102 A19 ADC control assembly
• 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly
• Source sweep speed set too fast, especially in local operation
Troubleshooting:
• Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
• Run 85102 service program tests 1 (A19) and 2 (A20).
• If the service program found no fault with any assembly, refer to “Other Failures” and
run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test.
• Refer to “Unratioed Power Failures” to check source operation.
System Bus Address Error
This message is displayed if the address of any 8510C system instrument is wrong or not
recognized by the 85101C CPU.
Probable cause of failure:
• The source (19), test set (20), or plotter is at the wrong GPIB (HP-IB) address, or their
line power is off.
• GPIB cable is not connected.
• GPIB cable or connector is faulty.
• 85101C A7 I/O assembly (GPIB portion)
• Test set A4 GPIB assembly
Troubleshooting:
•
•
•
•
Run the 85101C service program test 2 (A7).
Run the service program GPIB test for the test set A4 board.
Check the cabling and the addresses on all instruments.
Check the 8510C addresses. Press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM, [HP-IB ADDRESSES].
System Bus SRQ Error
The 8510C system bus SRQ line is stuck and is not responding.
Probable cause of failure:
•
•
•
•
•
Test set A4 GPIB assembly
Source GPIB assembly
85101C A7 I/O assembly
GPIB circuitry of any peripheral on the bus
Bad GPIB cable or connector
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-81
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
Troubleshooting:
• Run 8510C Service program test 2 (A7)
• Run the service program test for the test set A4 GPIB board
• Check all GPIB cables and all addresses
Test Set GPIB (HP-IB) Syntax Error
The test set does not respond to a known good GPIB command.
Probable cause of failure:
• Test set A4 GPIB assembly
• 85101C A7 I/O assembly (GPIB portion)
• GPIB cable between the test set and the 85101C
Troubleshooting:
• Run 85101C service program test 2 (A7).
• Run the service program test for the test set A4 GPIB board.
• Check all cables.
Unable to Lock to Ext 10 MHz Ref
The 10 MHz external input to the 85102 A6 clock assembly is more than +500 Hz off
frequency. The level should be > 0 dBm. If the external input is off frequency or is less than
0 dBm, the A6 assembly sets the LIFSRQ low, alerting the CPU to the unlocked condition.
This message is not applicable unless you are locking to an external source such as in an
8510C millimeter-wave system. In this case the external 10 MHz input on the 85102 is
used to lock to the source.
If this error message occurs when the external 10 MHz input is not used, the probable
causes of failure are:
• A6 clock assembly erroneously sets LIFSRQ low
• The A6 clock LIFSRQ signal is pulled low along the way to the 85101C A5 CPU
• +5 V input to the 85102 A6 clock is intermittent
Troubleshooting:
• Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode
• Check the 10 MHz input signal frequency and amplitude that you are applying to the
rear panel of the 85102
VTO Over-Range
The VTO swept beyond its normal range. It is detected by the A3 VTO “end of range”
detector on the test set A3 VTO summing amplifier.
If this error occurs only when a 8430/41 source is used and is in ramp mode, the problem is
probably either the 8430/41 source or the 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly.
Probable cause of error:
• Test set VTO
• Test set A3 VTO summing amplifier
4-82
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
•
•
•
•
85102 A23 main phase lock
85102 A20 sweep ADC
Source is off frequency
VTUNE line to test set A3 summing amplifier (from 85102 A23 main phase lock
assembly)
• 85102 0-10V swept input BNC cable is not connected (not used with 8360 series
sources)
Troubleshooting:
•
•
•
•
Run the 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode.
Run 85102 service program tests 2 (A20) and 9 (A23).
Check the source, especially the 0 to 10 volt ramp linearity.
Check the test set VTO and A3 summing amp boards. Refer to “Unratioed Power
Failures.”
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-83
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Running Error Messages
This page intentionally left blank.
4-84
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Unratioed Power Failures
Unratioed Power Failures
Overview
This section checks test set RF functionality to isolate the problem to either the test set or
the rest of the system. If the test set is at fault, this section helps to further isolate the
faulty assembly within the test set.
The following test sets are covered in this section:
8514B
8514B Option 002/003
8515A
8516A
8516A Option 002/003
8517B
8517B Option 007
The procedure in this section is divided into two parts.
First, the service adapter is connected to the 85102 IF/detector to simulate basic operation
of the test set. If the 85102 is operating correctly, then the test set is re-connected and the
IF responses of the six RF signal paths are checked to verify test set operation. Knowing
which test set assemblies are common to the RF signal paths of known IF signal responses
is a powerful troubleshooting tool.
Second, you will check the output power levels of each test set sampler/mixer assembly and
its associated IF amplifier alone. This is done by comparing the power levels and shape of
the frequency response trace with traces supplied in this section. As each of the six RF
signal paths are checked, you will record the results in a table. The most probable cause of
failure is listed according to which RF signal path or paths are incorrect.
Definition of Terms
The following terms are explained in greater detail in the Operating and Programming
Manual included with the 8510C documentation.
User 1, 2, 3, and 4
These are user-defined parameters and allow measurement of unratioed power at the first
frequency converter inputs for each of the reference and test signal paths. Therefore, the
displayed frequency response of a user parameter is the combined test set sampler IF
output response of 1) the source RF signal at the first converter input and 2) the test set
VTO local oscillator signal.
The paths are initially defined as follows, and will be redefined during this procedure:
User 1 al
User 2 b2
User 3 a2
User 4 b1
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-85
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Unratioed Power Failures
RF Signal Paths
There are only four user parameters. However, in this procedure you will redefine
parameters to display the IF frequency responses from six possible RF signal paths in the
test set. Table 4-8 shows the relationship between the RF signal path, path definition, and
redefined user parameter as used in this procedure.
Table 4-8
RF Signal Paths and User Parameters
RF Path
Path Description
Redefined User Parameter
Drive
Phase Lock
1
a1
User 1
Port 1
a1
2
a2
User 3
Port 2
a2
3
b1 - Reflection
User 4
Port 1
a1
4
b2 - Reflection
User 2
Port 2
a2
5
b1 - Thru
User 4
Port 2
a2
6
b2 - Thru
User 2
Port 1
a1
Ratioed and Unratioed Responses
A normal power level display for the 8510C is a ratio of two frequency responses; in the
case of S11, the ratio is b1 /a1. The network analyzer automatically supplies power to and
provides phase lock for one or more predefined ports to perform the selected measurement.
Ratioed measurements provide useful data but they can mask certain problems. For
example, when measuring an S-parameter at a specific power level, a faulty RF input
connector on the test set creates a 20 dB power hole. In this case, the power hole might be
invisible because the S-parameter measurement ratios out the frequency response error.
This is why troubleshooting system problems in a ratioed measurement mode can be
deceptive. The solution is to look at the IF signal responses of the six RF paths singly in
order to check them in an unratioed mode.
Troubleshooting with the Service Adapter
The service adapter substitutes for a test set, by connecting the 20 MHz IF signal from the
85102 back into the amplifier of the 85102. This is done to determine if a fault is in the test
set or the 85102. This procedure does not check phase lock circuitry.
NOTE
Ignore any phase lock error messages that may appear during this
procedure.
1. Disconnect the test set from J1 test set interconnect on the 85102. Connect the service
adapter as shown in Figure 4-9. The service adapter is not supplied with each 8510C.
Refer to Chapter 5 to order this servicing tool.
4-86
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Unratioed Power Failures
Figure 4-9
Service Adapter Connections
2. Press the following keys: INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET],
MARKER, STIMULUS MENU, [STEP], PARAMETER MENU.
3. Examine each user parameter (IF response) by pressing the corresponding softkey to
observe the unratioed power level of User 1 through User 4. The traces should be flat
lines, quite close to each other, as indicated by the marker value (typically about
−28 dB ± 5 dB).
Service Adapter Conclusions
If one or more signal paths are incorrect
The problem is most likely with the 85102. Stop this procedure and return to
troubleshooting procedures for the 85102.
If all signal paths are correct
The 85102 is working properly. The problem is most likely with the source or the test set.
Perform the following procedure to verify operation of the test set.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-87
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Unratioed Power Failures
Test Set Unratioed Power Troubleshooting
Use this procedure with the following test sets:
8514B
8514B Option 002/003
8515A
8516A
8516A Option 002/003
8517B
8517B, Option 007
Option 002 deletes the programmable step attenuators and the dc bias tees. Option 003
“reverses” the port 2 coupler to provide high forward dynamic range. Option 007 adds
buffer amplifiers to provide high dynamic range.
Figure 4-10 shows a simplified diagram of RF signal paths tested in the unratioed power
level tests.
Figure 4-10
Simplified Signal Path of Unratioed Power Test
Troubleshooting Foldouts
The following foldout diagrams correspond to different test sets: one each for the 8514B,
8515A, 8516A, and 8517B, and Options 002, 003, and 007 where appropriate. Each foldout
shows all the signal paths and corresponding typical traces, as well as the troubleshooting
procedure. Locate the foldout that corresponds with your test set and follow the
troubleshooting procedure.
4-88
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8514B RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces
8515A RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces
8514B Option 002/003 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces
8516A Option 002/003 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces
8517 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces
8517B Option 007 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Unratioed Power Failures
4-96
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Power Supply Failures
Power Supply Failures
Overview
NOTE
Use these procedures only if you were directed to this section from the
main troubleshooting section and you believe the problem is in the
85101C or 85102 power supply.
This section consists of procedures to troubleshoot the 85101 display/processor and 85102
IF/ detector power supplies to the assembly level. The procedures are designed to let you
identify the bad assembly in either the 85101C or 85102 power supply in the shortest
possible time.
The 85101C and 85102 supplies provide dc voltages to their own units independently. It is
assumed that you know which unit has the suspected bad supply. If they are both
suspected bad, begin by troubleshooting the 85101C power supply.
85101C Power Supplies Summary
Included are a short power supply troubleshooting summary and a longer, in-depth
procedure. The summary is provided for troubleshooters who are familiar with the 85101C
power supply circuitry. The in-depth procedure is provided for troubleshooters having
minimum familiarity with the operation of the 8510C power supplies.
Refer to Figure 4-11. The 85101C display/processor power supply consists of the following
assemblies:
A10 preregulator assembly
A3 post-regulator board assembly
All assemblies are related to A10 and A3 since power is supplied to each assembly.
Therefore, a failure of any assembly can affect the power supply.
NOTE
The 85101C equipped with an LCD uses the same A10 and A3
assemblies as an 85101C equipped with a CRT display. The +65 V
supply from the A3 post-regulator is not used in the 85101C with an
LCD and ends at the motherboard connector for A3. Refer to
Figure 4-11.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-97
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Power Supply Failures
Figure 4-11
85101C Power Supply Simplified Block Diagram
Refer to the “85101C Power Supplies Detailed Block Diagram” at the end of this section to
see signal paths and specific connector pin numbers.
85102 Power Supplies Summary
The 85102 power supply consists of:
• A power transformer with two center-tapped secondary windings
• A separate bridge rectifier for each secondary winding
• Four regulators that supply −5 V, −15 V, +5 V, and +15 V
• Filtered but unregulated supply voltages of − 5 V, −15 V, +5 V, and +15 V
• Fuses, test points, and LEDs for all regulated supplies
The 85102 power supply troubleshooting procedure is located in this section after the
85101C power supply troubleshooting procedure.
4-98
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Power Supply Failures
Table 4-9
Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary (1 of 2)
This summary gives an overview of the power supply troubleshooting procedure. If you
are already familiar with troubleshooting the power supply, you may save time by
following this summary instead of reading the entire procedure. Headings in this
summary match the headings in the procedure. Troubleshooting procedures are
preceded by a check.
85101C Display/Processor Supply Troubleshooting
Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A10 Preregulator
Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post-Regulator
Measure Voltages on the A3 Post-Regulator
Determine Why the Green LED on A10 Is Not On Steadily
✓ Check the line voltage, selector switch, and fuse.
Determine Why the Red LED on A10 Is On or Flashing
✓ Disconnect A10W1.
✓ Check the A10 preregulator and related assemblies.
✓ Measure voltages on A10W1 and at A3J1.
✓ Remove assemblies.
✓ Remove A8 motherboard connector cables.
✓ Check the operating temperature.
✓ Inspect the A8 motherboard.
Determine Why the Green LEDs on A3 Are Not All On
✓ Remove the A3 post-regulator from its motherboard connector (maintain A10W1 cable connection).
✓ Check the A3 fuses and voltages.
✓ Remove more assemblies.
✓ Disconnect display power cable (CRT only).
✓ Disconnect A15 LCD assembly cable and/or A16 backlight inverter cable (LCD only).
✓ Inspect motherboard.
Fan Troubleshooting
✓ Fan speeds
✓ Check the fan voltages.
Intermittent Problems
✓ Replace the A5 CPU board assembly.
✓ If the problem continues, replace the A10 preregulator assembly.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-99
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Power Supply Failures
Table 4-10
Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary (2 of 2)
85102 IF/Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting
Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator
Four green LEDs should be on, one red LED off.
✓ If not, cycle power and measure the test points.
Check the +5 V Test Points on A24 Interface
✓ Remove assemblies and check 5V LED on A15.
Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier
Four green LEDs should be on.
✓ Measure at fuses: ±22 V and ±11 Vdc.
✓ Check line voltage selector.
Check Connector P1
✓ Unplug A26.
4-100
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Disconnect the 85101 IF/display interconnect cable at the 85101C display/processor rear
panel.
• If an error message appears on the display, refer to “Running Error Messages.”
• If the fan is not working, refer to “Fan Troubleshooting” near the end of this section.
Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A10 Preregulator
Turn on the 85101C display/processor and look at the rear panel of the analyzer. Check the
two power supply diagnostic LEDs on the A10 preregulator casting by looking through the
holes located to the left of the line voltage selector switch (see Figure 4-12). Normally, the
bottom (green) LED is on and the top (red) LED is off.
• If these LEDs are normal, then A10 is 95% verified. Continue this procedure at “Check
the Green LEDs on the A3 Post-Regulator.”
• If the red LED is on or flashing, then refer “Determine Why the Red LED on A10 Is On
or Flashing.”
• If the green LED is not on steadily, then the line voltage is missing or is insufficient to
power the 85101C. Continue this procedure at “Determine Why the Green LED on A10
Is Not On Steadily” in this section.
Figure 4-12
Location of A10 Preregulator Diagnostic LEDs
Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post-Regulator
Turn off the 85101C. Remove the 85101C display/processor top cover and make sure that
all board assemblies are firmly seated in their connectors. Turn the 85101C on. Locate the
A3 post-regulator assembly and check to see if the five green LEDs on the top edge of this
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-101
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
assembly are on. Refer to Figure 4-13 for locations of these LEDs.
• If any LED on the A3 post-regulator is off or flashing, refer to “Determine Why the
Green LEDs on A3 Are Not All On” later in this procedure.
• If all of the green LEDs on the top edge of A3 are on, there is a 95% confidence level that
the power supply is verified. To confirm the last 5% uncertainty, continue this procedure
with the next paragraph.
Measure Voltages on the A3 Post-Regulator
Refer to Figure 4-13 and measure the dc voltages on the A3 post-regular test points. This
figure lists the voltage and their limits.
• If the voltages are within their limits, the 85101C power supply is 100% verified.
• If the voltages are not within their limits, replace the A3 post-regulator.
Figure 4-13
4-102
A3 Post-Regulator LEDs and Test Point Voltages
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Determine Why the Green LED on A10 Is Not On Steadily
If the green LED is not on steadily, the line voltage is missing or is not enough to power the
85101C. Continue this procedure with the next paragraph.
Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse
Check the main power line cord, line selector switch setting, line fuse, and actual line
voltage to see that they are all correct.
Figure 4-12 (earlier in this procedure) shows the location of the line voltage selector
switch. Use a small flat-bladed screwdriver to select the correct switch position.
Figure 4-14 shows how to remove the line fuse, using a small flat-bladed screwdriver to pry
out the fuseholder. The line fuse is rated for 250 V at 3 amperes for operation at all line
voltages. A spare fuse is provided in a plastic “drawer” in the line fuseholder as shown in
the figure. The line fuse Agilent part number is 2110-0655.
• If the A10 green LED is still not on steadily after verification of correct line voltage,
replace the A10 preregulator.
Figure 4-14
Removing the Line Fuse
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-103
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Determine Why the Red LED on A10 Is On or Flashing
If the red LED is on, the problem may be in the A10 preregulator, the A3 post-regulator,
the +5 V digital supply, or any of the assemblies obtaining power from the supplies.
Continue with “Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse” and then continue this
procedure with the next paragraph.
Disconnect A10W1
Refer to Figure 4-15. Turn off the 85101C and disconnect cable A10W1 from the A3
post-regulator. Turn on the 85101C.
• If the red LED goes out after removing A10W1, the +5 V digital supply in A10 is
verified. The problem is probably in the A3 post-regulator or one of the assemblies
obtaining power from it. Refer to “Check the A10 Preregulator and Related Assemblies”
to verify that the inputs to A3 and associated assemblies are correct.
• If the red LED is still on or flashing after removing A10W1, the problem is probably in
the A10 preregulator or the +5 V digital supply. Replace the A10 preregulator.
NOTE
An 85101C with an LCD does not have W1 or A4. A10, A3, A10W1,
A10W2 are the same in both CRT and LCD designs. See Figure 5-12 on
page 5-25 for a top view of an 85101C equipped with an LCD.
Figure 4-15
Location of 85101C Cables and Board Assemblies (CRT Only)
4-104
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Check the A10 Preregulator and Related Assemblies
The following paragraphs systematically check the assemblies to find the bad one.
Measure the voltages on A10W1 and at A3J1
Turn off the 85101C and put the A3 post-regulator on an extender board. See Figure 4-16.
NOTE
The A3 post-regulator assembly has its own special extender board for
troubleshooting, Agilent part number 85101-60236. The connector pin
numbers are reversed from extenders for the other board assemblies.
Figure 4-16
A3 Post-Regulator Extender Board
If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT, ribbon cable W1 from the A11 CRT display may
remain disconnected from the A4 GSP board during this procedure. Disconnect A10
preregulator cable A10W1 from the A3J1 post-regulator connector. Turn on the 85101C
and measure the voltages on the connector pins with a small probe. Compare the measured
voltages with the voltages listed in Figure 4-17.
• If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace the A10 preregulator.
• If the voltages are within tolerance, the A10 preregulator is working properly. Continue
with this procedure.
Turn off the 85101C and connect A10 preregulator cable A10W1 to the A3J1 post-regulator
connector. Turn on the 85101C and measure the voltages on the pins of A3J1. Compare
these voltages with the voltages listed in Figure 4-17.
• If the voltages are not within tolerance, either the A3 post-regulator or an assembly
connected to it is loading down the A10 preregulator. Continue this procedure with
“Remove Assemblies.”
• If the voltages are within tolerance, it is likely that the A3 post-regulator is good and
both the A10 preregulator and A3 post-regulator are being loaded down by an assembly
connected to it. Continue this procedure with “Remove Assemblies” to isolate the faulty
assembly.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-105
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Figure 4-17
4-106
A10P1 Plug Detail and Output Voltages
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Remove Assemblies
Check power supply loading from the assemblies that are supplied by A10. Turn off the
85101C. Connect the A10W1 cable to the A3 post-regulator. Remove the following
assemblies and then turn on the 85101C.
A4 (A14) GSP board
A5 CPU board
A6 EEPROM board
A7 I/O board
Disc drive power connector J3 on the A8 motherboard
• If the A10 red LED is still on, continue this procedure with .
• If the A10 red LED is off, disconnect line power from the 85101C. Plug the A4 (A14)
GSP board assembly into the motherboard. If the LED lights, replace the A4 (A14) GSP
assembly or the display assembly A11 (A15 or A16) connected to the A4 (A14) GSP
board. To isolate the problem, check A4 (A14) for loading by the display assembly A11
(A15 or A16) before replacing A4 (A14).
• Continue to plug in the rest of the assemblies until the red LED lights. Replace the
assembly that causes the LED to light.
Remove A8 Motherboard Connector Cables
Turn off the 85101C. One at a time and in the order shown, remove the following cables
from their motherboard connectors and turn the 85101C on until the red LED goes off. The
cable and/or its supplied assembly that causes the red LED to go out when it is removed
from its motherboard connector is bad.
A8J1 keyboard cable
A8J2 disc drive cable
• If the red LED is still on or flashing, continue this procedure with the next paragraph.
Check the Operating Temperature
The temperature-sensing circuitry inside the A10 preregulator may be disabling the
supply. Make sure the operating environment ambient air temperature does not exceed
+55 degrees C (+131 degrees F), and that the 85101C fan is operating.
• If the fan does not seem to be operating correctly, refer to “Fan Troubleshooting.”
• If there does not appear to be a temperature problem, it is likely that the A10
preregulator is bad.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-107
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Inspect the A8 Motherboard
If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of the A10 preregulator, turn off the
85101C and inspect the A8 motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable defects.
Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts. In particular, check the following lines between the
A10 preregulator and the A3 post-regulator:
•
•
•
•
GNDDSENSE
+5VDSENSE
+5V DIG
DGND
Refer to the A8 motherboard wiring diagram to troubleshoot these suspected power supply
lines. The wiring diagram is supplied at the end of the main troubleshooting section.
If the A10 red LED is still on after doing the above checks and isolating the
A3 post-regulator by removing all of the assemblies, the fault is most likely in the
A3 post-regulator or the A10 preregulator. If after replacing A3 and A10 the fault still
exists, them replace the A8 motherboard with a new motherboard/card cage assembly.
Determine Why the Green LEDs on A3 Are Not All On
The green LEDs along the top edge of the A3 post-regulator are normally on.
Flashing LEDs on A3 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A3 post-regulator is
protecting power supplies from over current conditions by repeatedly shutting them down.
This may be caused by supply loading on A3 or on any other assembly in the 85101C.
Remove the A3 Post-Regulator from Its Motherboard Connector
Turn off the 85101C. Remove post-regulator A3 from its motherboard connector but keep
the A10-to-A3 cable (A10W1) connected to A3. If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT,
remove display power cable W1 (see Figure 4-15). Short to chassis ground any of the three
common GND pins located on the top edge of the A3 post regulator. Turn the 85101C on.
• If any A3 post-regulator green LEDs other than +5 V PREREG is still off or flashing,
continue with this procedure.
• If all LEDs are now on steadily except for the +5 V PREREG LED, the A10 preregulator
and A3 post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading
somewhere after the motherboard connections at post-regulator A3. Continue this
procedure with “Remove More Assemblies.”
Check the A3 Fuses and Voltages
If any of LEDs for the following supplies are completely off, first check their fuses:
+65 V
+12 V
+5 V DSK MTR
The fuses for these supplies are all located on the top edge of the A3 post-regulator board
assembly. Their supply circuits, test points and current ratings are listed in Table 4-11.
4-108
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
The part numbers of these fuses are in Chapter 5 in Table 5-5.
Table 4-11
A3 Post-Regulator Fuses
LED/Test Point
Fuse Designator
Fuse Rating
Agilent Part Number
TP1
A3F1
1.5A, 125V
2110-0333
TP4
A3F2
2A, 125V
2110-0425
TP5
A3F3
2A, 125V
2110-0425
If any A3 fuse burns out, replace it. If it burns out again when power is applied to the
85101C, A3 post-regulator or A10 preregulator is bad. Determine which of these
assemblies has failed as follows:
Remove the A10W1 cable at post-regulator A3 and measure the voltages at A10P1 with a
voltmeter having a small probe. Compare the measured voltages with those in
Figure 4-17.
• If the voltages are within tolerance, replace post-regulator A3.
• If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace preregulator A10.
• If all A3 post-regulator green LEDs are now on, the A10 preregulator and A3
post-regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere
after the motherboard connections at A3. Continue this procedure with the next
paragraph.
Remove More Assemblies
Install post-regulator A3. Remove the jumper from the GND pin on the top edge of
post-regulator A3 and chassis ground. This jumper was connected earlier in this
procedure. Remove the following assemblies and turn on the 85101C:
A4 (A14) GSP board
A5 CPU board
A6 EEPROM board
A7 I/O board
Disc drive power connector J3 on the A8 motherboard
A8Jl keyboard cable
A8J2 disk drive cable
• If any of the A3 green LEDs are off or flashing, it is likely that the assemblies just
removed are not causing the problem.
• If all A3 green LEDs are now on, turn off the 85101C.
Reinstall each assembly one at a time and turn on the 85101C after each is installed. The
assembly that causes the A3 green LEDs to go off or flash is suspect. It is possible that this
condition is caused by the A3 post-regulator supplying insufficient current. To check this,
repeat the step but replace the assemblies in a different order to change the loading. If the
same assembly appears to be faulty, replace that assembly. If a different assembly appears
faulty, post-regulator A3 is most likely bad (unless both of the other assemblies are bad).
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-109
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Disconnect Display Power Cable (CRT Only)
Turn off the 85101C. If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT, remove the display power cable
W1 (see Figure 4-15 on page 4-104). Turn on the 85101C.
• If all A3 green LEDs are now on, replace or repair the A11 display.
• If any of the A3 green LEDs are off or flashing, continue with “Inspect Motherboard.”
Disconnect A15 LCD Assembly Cable and/or A16 Backlight Inverter Cable (LCD
Only)
The A15 LCD assembly is powered through the A14 GSP board. Remove cable W7 from
A14J6 to isolate the display. The A16 backlight inverter is also powered through the
A14 GSP board. Remove cable W8 from A14J7 to isolate the backlight (refer to Figure 6-4
on page 6-17 for an illustration of A15 LCD assembly).
• If all A3 green LEDs are now on, replace the associated assembly.
• If any of the A3 green LEDs are off or flashing, continue with “Inspect Motherboard.”
Inspect Motherboard
Inspect the A8 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces.
4-110
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85101C Display/Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting
Fan Troubleshooting
Fan Speeds
The fan speed is continuously variable depending upon temperature. It is normal for the
fan to be at high speed when the instrument is just turned on, and then change to low
speed when the instrument has cooled.
Check the Fan Voltages
If the fan is dead, refer to the “85101C Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram” at the end of
this section. The fan is driven by the +18 V and −18 V supplies coming from the A10
preregulator. Neither of these supplies is fused. The −18 V supply is regulated on A3, and
remains constant at approximately −15 volts. It connects to the fan via the A8.
motherboard.
The +18 V supply changes the voltage to the fan, depending on airflow and temperature
information. Its voltage ranges from approximately +1.0 volts to +14.7 volts, and it also
connects to the fan via the A8 motherboard.
Intermittent Problems
Preset states that appear spontaneously (without pressing INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL,
[MORE], [FACTORY PRESET] typically signal a power supply or A5 CPU assembly problem.
Replace the A5 CPU board assembly as it is the most likely failure. If the problem
continues, replace the A10 preregulator assembly.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-111
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85102 IF/Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting
85102 IF/Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting
Anytime during this procedure, refer to the “85102 Power Supply Detailed Block
Diagram,” for an overview of the 85102 IF/detector power supplies.
Disconnect the interconnect cable from the rear panel. Switch on the 85102. Check to see
that the amber LINE LED on the front panel is on (normal). If the front panel LED is off, it
is likely there is a problem with the 85102 power supply; continue with this
troubleshooting.
Exception: Some early models of 85102 derive the +5 V power for the front panel LED from
the 85101, and the line LED in these models will therefore not light when the 85101 and
85102 are not connected.
Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator
Partially slide back the top cover of the 85102. The A15 regulator is the board furthest
back on the left side. Check the five LEDs on A15. Normally, the four green LEDs should
be on and the red LED should be off. If so, the power supply is verified with 85%
confidence. To increase the confidence level to 100%, go on to “Check the +5 V Test Points
on A24 Interface.”
If the A15 red LED is on and one or more of the A15 green LEDs are off, one of the
following conditions exists:
• A thermal shutdown has occurred.
• The thermal protection circuit has failed.
• The +15 V or −15 V supply has failed.
Cycle power on the 85102 to see if the thermal protection circuit will reset. If the heat sink
temperature becomes too great, the + 15 V supply is disabled. This causes the
+15 V SENSE line to go low and disable one or more of the other supplies (−5 V, −15 V, and
+5 V).
Figure 4-18
4-112
A15 LEDs and Test Points
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85102 IF/Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting
If one or more of the green LEDs is still off, measure the voltages at the corresponding test
points (see Figure 4-18). They should measure:
A15TP5
+15 V
A15TP4
−15 V
A15TP3
+5 V*
A15TP1
−5 V
* If the +5 V regulator is indicated as the suspected fault, the +5 V supply may be loaded
down by another assembly. Continue to “Check the +5 V Test Points on A24 Interface.”
Otherwise, continue to “Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier.”
Check the +5 V Test Points on A24 Interface
Measure the voltage at test points A24TP5, TP8, and TP7 on the A24 processor interface
board. They should all measure +5 Vdc ±25 mV with < 10 mV p-p ripple. If so, the power
supply is now verified with a confidence level increased to 100%.
If any of the test points does not measure +5 Vdc, the supply is probably being loaded down
by another assembly. Switch off the instrument and try removing assemblies one at a time.
(Switch on power after removing each, and switch off power again before removing the
next.) Check the +5 V LED on A15 after each assembly is removed. When removing a
particular assembly causes the LED to light, that assembly is probably defective and
should be replaced.
If removing assemblies does not cause the +5 V LED to light, the fault is probably in the
A15 regulator. Replace A15.
Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier
Check the four green LEDs on rectifier A26. They should all be on.
• If all the LEDs are off, check the power line module and P1 connector plug.
• If any one LED is out, check the continuity of the corresponding fuse. See Figure 4-19.
• If an LED is off but its fuse is good, A26 is bad: replace it.
• If you change a fuse and its LED is still out, go to “Check Connector P1” to check the
continuity of P1 and the unloaded ac secondary voltages from transformer T1.
• If the LEDs are on, this means that voltages are present, but it does not necessarily
mean they are at the correct values.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-113
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85102 IF/Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting
Figure 4-19
A26 Rectifier Fuse Locations
Next measure the four unregulated output voltages of the rectifier. Measure at either side
of the fuses (see Figure 4-19). The voltages should measure approximately ±22 Vdc out of
the 15 V rectifier, and ±11 Vdc out of the 5 V rectifier.
• If all the voltages are low, check the line voltage selector setting for the proper line
voltage.
• If the A26 voltages are correct, but one or more A15 LEDs are off or the voltages on A15
are incorrect, the problem is in A15 or the interface between A26 and A15.
• If the voltages are present but not correct, continue with the next paragraph.
4-114
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85102 IF/Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting
Check Connector P1
The line voltage may be loaded down by the A26 rectifier. Unplug P1 from A26J1. Refer to
Table 4-12 and check the open end of P1 for unloaded ac secondary voltages from
transformer T1.
Table 4-12
P1 AC RMS Voltages (Approximate)
Measure Between P1 Pins
Wire Color
ac Voltage (RMS Approx.)
1
Yellow
37 V
2
Yellow
1
4
Yellow
Red
18.5 V
2
Yellow
18.5 V
4
Red
3
6
Blue
Blue
19.5 V
3
Blue
10 V
5
Grey
6
Blue
5
Grey
10 V
• If the voltages are approximately correct, replace A26.
• If the voltages are incorrect, the problem is in the power line module, transformer T1, or
the connections.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-115
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
85102 IF/Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting
This page intentionally left blank.
4-116
8510C On-Site Service Manual
85101C Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram
85102C Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Performance Test Failures
Performance Test Failures
Overview
A performance test failure occurs whenever the performance verification data is not within
specification limits. If you have performed the verification procedures in Chapter 8 and
any part of the tests has resulted in a failure, follow the steps below.
Procedure
1. The measurement calibration is the first thing to suspect. If the failure was in an S11 or
S22 measurement, suspect the sliding load, open and/or short connection made during
the calibration. If the failure was an S21 or S12 measurement, suspect the test port
cable and connectors.
2. Check the calibration devices to be sure they are clean, properly gaged, and not worn
out. If the device has a collet or slot, make sure it is not damaged. Make sure all pin
depths are correct. The manuals for the various kits include the device specifications.
Refer to the connector care section for information about making connections and caring
for calibration devices.
3. Check the verification devices to be sure they are clean, properly gaged, and not worn
out. If a test set connector is out of tolerance when gaged, it may be repaired or
shimmed to bring it into tolerance: refer to the appropriate kit manual. (If a test set
connector is shimmed or repaired, recalibrate before repeating the verification.)
4. Check the ambient temperature. System performance is specified at an ambient
temperature of +23 ±3 ºC. Therefore the environmental temperature must remain in
the range of +20 ºC to +26 ºC. Once calibrated, the environmental temperature must not
vary more than ±1 ºC. The temperature of the devices is also important, because their
electrical characteristics change with temperature. The devices should have been
removed from their slots in the boxes and set on top of the foam to allow them to reach
room temperature.
5. Check the standards data in the verification printout against the printed data that
came with the verification kit. Make sure that the cal coefficients are the correct ones
for your kit. For example, the 85052B calibration kit should be using a revision B.xn.xx
or B.n cal coefficient disk or tape where B = B type cal kit, n = revision number, x = don’t
care. If they do not agree, contact your Agilent customer engineer.
6. Perform the calibration and verification procedures again. Make sure all connections
are good and properly torqued. (When you connect a device, you can gently tap on it
with your finger to see if the display trace is stable. If not, reconnect the device and try
again.)
7. If the procedure still fails and another calibration kit or verification kit is available, try
substituting kits.
8. Use the verification program to print out the system error terms. If necessary, you will
use this printout in step 10.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-119
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Performance Test Failures
9. If the verification is still not successful, the problem is elsewhere in the system. Go to
“Unratioed Power Failures” and perform the troubleshooting procedures in that section
to see if the problem is in the test set.
10. If step 9 did not resolve the problem, refer to “Error Terms” and use the information
there to analyze the error terms printout made in step 8.
11. If the verification still fails, return to the main troubleshooting procedures to check the
system hardware.
4-120
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Software Failures
Software Failures
Overview
Use the information in this section if you are having problems running the operating
system or the verification software, or controlling the system over GPIB. Only use this
section after going through the “Control, Configuration, and Cabling Pre-Operational
Checks” in the “Main Troubleshooting Procedure.”
This section explains how to resolve software and firmware failures, and provides a list of
8510 operating system revisions, beginning with revision A.01.00.
How to Resolve Software and Firmware Failures
The following procedure for the resolution of software and firmware failures is in two
parts:
1. Make a list of programming codes or key-presses. Check the programming code
descriptions with the documentation to verify that the intended operation is valid.
2. List all system components and the 8510C and source firmware revisions. For
assistance, see “Contacting Agilent” on page iii in the front matter of this manual.
Part 1
List Programming Codes
If the 8510C system is manually controlled, make a list of 8510 key presses used to create
the conditions that showed the problem. If you are using GPIB to control the system, check
your program and list the GPIB programming codes being sent to the 8510 when the
problem occurred. This list will be used in the following steps.
Check Programming Code Descriptions
Check the information on key press functions and/or mnemonics in the Keyword
Dictionary. The entries in this document contain detailed descriptions of the manual
operation and programmed operation of each function. Use the manual to verify how the
commands should operate rather than assume they will operate in a certain way. Refer to
the Operating and Programming Manual for example programs.
If the actual behavior of a function is different than its documented, intended behavior,
continue this procedure with “Part 2.”
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-121
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Software Failures
Part 2
List System Components and Firmware Revisions
Write down the following information prior to contacting Agilent in the next part of this
procedure. The customer engineer (CE) will serve you better when this information is
available:
• The exact system configuration including the model numbers of all system components
in the system.
• The firmware revisions and serial numbers of the 8510C and the source(s) used. Check
the 8510 revision by pressing AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM, [MORE], [SERVICE
FUNCTIONS], [SOFTWARE REVISION].
• The list of key presses or GPIB programming codes used to create the conditions that
showed the problem. This list was created in “List Programming Codes,” earlier in this
procedure.
• Any other details about the state of the system during failure that may be important to
troubleshooting.
Contact Agilent
If you need assistance, contact Agilent by internet, phone, or fax (see “Contacting Agilent”
on page iii). Your CE has access to a software tracking system that includes reports of
known problems and their solutions or workarounds.
Firmware Revisions
The following firmware revisions for the 8510A, 8510B, and 8510C are listed for historical
purposes. Information about any later versions used with the 8510C will be published as
they occur.
4-122
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Software Failures
Table 4-13
8510 Operating System History
Revision
Number
Analyzer1
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Significant Contribution
A.01.00
8510A
85101-100012,3
8510A first release. Order A.02.00.
A.02.00
8510A
85101-100012
11575A upgrade. Contains latest 8510A
Operating System.
B.03.00
8510B
See Note 3
8510B first release. Major speed and feature
enhancements.
B.03.11
8510B
85101-80070
11575B upgrade. Many improvements. New
features for millimeter systems.
B.04.00
8510B
85101-80078
11575C upgrade. Requires two ICs. Adds many
new features including 8516A operation. May
require 8340/41 to be upgraded using 11875A kit.
B.05.00
8510B
85101-800813
Adds pulsed RF capability and improved external
triggering. Included in both the 85111A and
11575D upgrade kits.
B.05.14
8510B
85101-80111
This release allowed operation of the 83420
lightwave test set software. It also fixed
anomalies found with dual channel cal, TRL cal,
millimeter system TRL cal, and triggering in
FASTCW mode. Included in both the 85111 A
and 11575E upgrades.
C.06.00
8510C
85101-800983
8510C first release. Features include a color and
4-parameter display, 3.5-inch disc drive, and
RS-232 interface. 83650/51 50 GHz compatibility.
B.06.00
8510B
See Note 3
C.06.30
8510C
85101-80098
Released for DOS support and color paintjet
support.
B.06.30
8510B
85101-80102
Released for 8510B support of 50 GHz
(83650/51), 8517 and quickstep.
C.06.50
8510C
85101-80113
11595G Rev. C.06.00-C.06.50 to C.06.54
(minor bug fixes)
B.06.50
8510B
85101-80109
11575F Rev. B.03.00-B.05.14 to B.06.54
(minor bug fixes)
C.06.54
8510C
85101-80113
11575G Rev. C.06.00-C.06.50 to C.06.54
B.06.54
8510B
85101-80109
11575F Rev. B.03.00-B.05.14 to B.06.54
C.06.58
8510C
85101-80132
Bug fix-8510 firmware problem with writing year
2000 and higher DOS file dates.
C.06.60
8510C
85101-80132
Bug fix-8510 firmware problem with 8360 series
source firmware dated year 2000 and higher.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-123
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Software Failures
Table 4-13
8510 Operating System History
Revision
Number
Analyzer1
HP/Agilent
Part Number
Significant Contribution
C.07.00
8510C
85101-80116
Allows 8510C to work with 8517B Option 007
and power domain functions, limit lines,
dissimilar connector compensations, and color
printer compatibility features.4
C.07.10
8510C
85101-80116
Compatibility to calibrate inside of a pulse
(instead of CW) for TRL calibrations and minor
bug fix.4
C.07.14
8510C
85101-80116
Bug fix-8510 firmware problem with writing year
2000 and higher DOS file dates.4
C.07.16
8510C
85101-80116
Bug fix-8510 firmware problem with 8360 series
source firmware dated year 2000 and higher.4
C.08.XX
8510C
85101-80116
Released to support 8510C equipped with color
liquid crystal display (LCD).4, 5
1. Replacement of 8510A or 8510B operating systems with time domain (option 010) must be
ordered through Agilent (see “Contacting Agilent”). In this case, the 85101 serial number is
required.
2. Revision A.01.00 is not orderable, even though it has the same part number as revision A.02.00.
Revision A.02.00 is available.
3. Not recommended for replacement; may contain many bugs.
4. Included in 11575J Upgrade Kit. 11575J upgrades revision C.06.xx to the current version
(C.07.xx or higher).
5. An 85101C equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD) requires C.08.XX or greater.
4-124
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Other Failures
Other Failures
Overview
This section presents additional tests that can be used for the small percentage of failures
that are not resolved by the other troubleshooting sections.
Noisy Display Trace Test
Whenever the noise on the trace is greater then 1 dB when you first turn the instrument
on, it means that the 85102 A18 ADC board may be faulty.
If the line power is cycled (off then on again), the noise may go away. If this occurs, there is
probably a fault with the 85102 A18 ADC board although no apparent symptoms are
present. Also, there may be no running error messages, no self test failures, and no service
program test failures.
If the trace noise disappears when the power is cycled, replace the 85102 A18 ADC board.
20 Hz Sine Wave Test
This test checks the 85102 A17 sample and hold, 85102 A18 ADC, and the 85102 A19 ADC
control board assemblies.
This procedure describes how to inject a signal into 85102 A17 J1, J2, J3, and J4 in order
to test the A17 sample and hold capability for each of the four synchronous detector inputs.
The procedure also tests the 85102 A18 ADC linearity and ability to do an analog-to-digital
conversion. If this test passes, the 85102 A19 ADC control board is also functioning
properly.
A signal generator is required that is capable of generating a 1.5 V p-p sine wave at
approximately 20 Hz.
Running error messages displayed when these boards fail are included below:
ADC Cal Failed
ADC Not Responding
IF Cal Failed
Sweep Time Too Fast
Procedure
1. Remove the 85102 IF/detector top cover. Then remove all four snap-on RF cables from
A17 J1, J2, J3, and J4.
2. Use an external signal generator to inject an approximate 1.5 V p-p 20 Hz sine wave
into A17J1. You can also use 50 or 60 Hz if your signal generator is not capable of
producing 20 Hz.
3. On the 8510, press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET]. Set both
start and stop frequencies to 500 MHz.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-125
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Other Failures
4. Set one of the A17 assembly multiplex inputs by pressing the following keys:
PARAMETER MENU, and then select the appropriate USER 1-4 keys as follows, beginning
with User 1:
[USER 1 a1] softkey for A17J3 or J4
[USER 2 b2] softkey for A17J1 or J2
[USER 3 a2] softkey for A17J1 or J2
[USER 4 b1] softkey for A17J1 or J2
Press: FORMAT, MENU and select one of the following:
[REAL] softkey for A17J2 or J4
[IMAGINARY] softkey for A17J1 or J3
5. Press STIMULUS MENU, [MORE], [SINGLE].
6. Press RESPONSE AUTO.
7. The 8510C LCD/CRT should display two cycles of the 20 Hz sine wave.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 of the procedure for each of the A17 inputs J2, J3, and J4.
If the LCD/CRT does not display two cycles of the 20 Hz sine wave, then suspect the 85102
A17, A18, or A19 boards. Perform all of the possible tests for these boards to isolate the
failure.
Source Emulator/Tripler Test
This test uses a source emulator in place of the source to verify system operation when the
source is suspected of having a fault. A 60 MHz signal is injected into the test set to
emulate the source.
The “tripler” is a 60 MHz bandpass filter specially designed for the 8510. It operates by
passing the third harmonic of the 85102 20 MHz output signal to the test set. However,
almost any source that has a 60 MHz signal can be used. The 60 MHz bandpass filter is
listed in Chapter 5 , “Replaceable Parts.”
Procedure
1. Connect the 60 MHz bandpass filter to the 85102 20 MHz out BNC connector. Then
connect a flexible RF cable from the filter to the test set rear panel RF input connector
Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET]. After the system has
done a factory preset, change the source GPIB address to 31. Press AUXILIARY MENUS,
SYSTEM, [HP-IB ADDRESSES], [SOURCE #1]. Then press 31, x1.
2. Press INSTRUMENT STATE, RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET], MENUS, MARKER,
STIMULUS, CENTER, 60, M/u, STIMULUS, SPAN, 100, k/m, STIMULUS, MENU, [STEP] to set
the displayed frequency to 60 MHz. Press PARAMETER, MENU, [USER 1 a1], RESPONSE,
[SCALE], 20, x1 to observe the user a1 parameter.
The LCD/CRT should display a trace at the marker value of approximately 50 dB. This
power level is typical for the output of the 20 MHz out signal after filtering with the
bandpass filter. If a power level within this range is displayed, it means that this RF
4-126
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Other Failures
path is working in the system and that the source could be faulty. Refer to “Unratioed
Power Failures” to further check the RF paths.
Check the remaining user parameters (RF paths). The results should be the same for
each one. Remember that these user parameters are the output power levels for the
incident, reflected, and transmitted signal paths from the test set frequency converter.
Press PARAMETER MENU, [USER 2 b2], [REDEFINE PARAMETER][DRIVE] [PORT 2] [SCALE]
20, x1 to observe the user b2 parameter.
3. Press PARAMETER MENU, [USER 3 a2], [REDEFINE PARAMETER], [DRIVE], [PORT 2],
[SCALE], 20, x1 to observe the user a2 parameter.
4. Press PARAMETER MENU, [USER 4 b1], RESPONSE, [SCALE], 20, x1 to observe the user b1
parameter.
If all the user parameters (RF paths) look good, the source is probably faulty. If they all
look bad or if any one looks bad, the test set is faulty (probably the VTO or a sampler).
Refer to “Unratioed Power Failures” to further check the RF paths in the test set.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-127
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Other Failures
This page intentionally left blank.
4-128
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
Service Program
Overview
The diagnostic tests and commands contained in the 8510 service program give a relatively
fast and complete check of the 8510 system. When your 8510 system appears to have a
failure, you can use this program along with other procedures to check the instrument
board assemblies. The service program tests do not completely check all board assemblies,
but are designed to exercise the most vulnerable parts of each board. If all tests pass, there
is a 90% confidence level that all board assemblies tested are good.
After you familiarize yourself with this program, you can refer to the menu map included
in this section. It is a map of all service program tests and the assemblies checked by each
test.
Run the service program to:
•
•
•
•
identify/verify a failed assembly after a self test failure.
identify/verify a failed assembly after a running error message.
check board assemblies whenever a board assembly problem is suspected.
verify repair of a replaced board assembly.
Tools Required
The following items are required to run all parts of the service program:
• 85102 emulator board assembly
• 8510 service adapter
• Two BNC cables
The 85102 emulator board assembly and the 8510 service adapter are available
individually. Refer to Chapter 5 for Agilent part numbers and ordering information.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-129
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
Running the 8510 Service Program
AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM, [MORE][SERVICE FUNCTIONS], [TEST MENU]
22, =MARKER
Refer to the menu map included in this section. It shows all service program tests and
assemblies tested.
How to Interpret Service Program Test Results
The service program tests do not completely check all board assemblies, but are designed
to exercise the most vulnerable parts of each board. If all tests pass, there is a 90%
confidence level that all board assemblies tested are good.
If service program tests indicate a failure in a board assembly, there is a 75% probability
that the board assembly indicated is bad. First make sure there are no fundamental
problems such as an improperly-seated board, and so forth.
If the 8510C has failed and the service program tests pass, then check to see that there are
no fundamental problems such as wrong cable connections, error messages due to
improperly-seated boards, or “extra” GPIB cables attached to the analyzer but not to
anything else.
8510 Service Program Menu Map
The service program menu map is located at the end of this section. From this map, you
can access separate menus for testing the 85101C, 85102, the test set or source.
4-130
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
85101 Display/Processor Service Program Menu
From this menu access four different menus associated with 85101C troubleshooting. You
can enter this menu by pressing 1, =MARKER. Use it to select the specific menu that you
want. The four categories correspond to the four boards in the card cage—instructions for
removing and replacing boards in it are given in Chapter 6 , “Replacement Procedures.”
Note that the boards tested in each menu are shown in parentheses below.
NOTE
If you disconnect the 85101 display/processor from all of the other
instruments, you can verify its stand-alone operation. Disconnect all
GPIB cables and all other cables so that only the line voltage cord
remains. Turn on the 85101C by pressing the line switch on the left
edge of the 85101C.
85101 CPU Board Tests (A5)
This menu tests the functions of the CPU board, the address bus, and the data bus. The
tests marked with an asterisk are intended for factory use only.
DRAM Refresh Test.. 1
Tests the dynamic RAM refresh controller. The interrupt system is turned on and is
delayed by 8 ms before checking that a refresh interrupt occurred.
Read/Write/Shift Accumulator Test.. 2
Tests the math processor on the A5 CPU. Press 0 and =MARKER to run this test
automatically. Data is written into the accumulators, shifted, and then read back and
checked for proper results. A manual version of this test is for factory use only.
Multiplier Test.. 3
Tests the math processor by doing multiplication in the registers. Run this test in auto
mode to find any failures in the multiplier. A manual version of this test is for factory use
only.
Complex Multiply Test.. 4
This is the same test as self test 10 except for one difference. If there is an error, it displays
the expected and received data rather than just the fact that it is faulty due to an error.
Circle Test (Exercises Multiplier).. 5
This sets up a data pattern to the multiplier bus in order to troubleshoot the multiplier
circuits. This test was designed for factory troubleshooting only.
Signature Analysis - Multiplier.. 6
Signature analysis is intended for factory use only. This test generates a pattern that can
be used to check math processor signatures on the A5 CPU.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-131
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
Signature Analysis - Address Bus.. 7
Signature analysis is intended for factory use only. This test provides a stimulus for
checking signatures on the address bus.
Signature Analysis - (Data Bus).. 8
Signature analysis is intended for factory use only. Provides a stimulus for checking
signatures on the Display Generator data bus.
4-132
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
85101 I/O Board and Front Panel Tests (A1, A2, A7)
The A7 I/O board is located in the card cage. The A1 front panel board includes the
keyboard, and A2 is the disk drive assembly. These assemblies work together to perform
front panel commands and disk media transfer operations.
Disc Controller Bus Test (A7).. 1
This test reads and writes to registers on the A7 I/O that control the disk drive.
Disc Write/Read Test (A2, A7).. 2
This tests the status of the disk drive, adjusts to high or low density disks, and then writes
and reads to one sector of the disk on each side. It writes again in another location, then
reads back everything and verifies. If there is no disk in the drive, or if it is
write-protected, then the status will be displayed and the test halted.
Timer Test (A7).. 3
This tests all three sections of the programmable timer. It is set up with a known value and
then read back to see that it has counted down.
Serial I/O Test (A7).. 4
A special interconnect electronic tool is required to perform this test. This tool is not
available to the field. This tests the bi-directional communication of the serial I/O ports on
the rear panel of the 85101C. Data flow is from RS-232 Port 1 to RS-232 Port 2, and then
the data is sent back to RS-232 Port 1.
Timer Clock Peripheral (TCP) Tests (A7).. 5
This is a combination of seven tests that check out and set the TCP chip for beeper and
time/date functions.
CPU to GPIB (HP-IB) Test (A7).. 6
This routine creates a test pattern, then initializes the GPIB chip to cause an internal echo
of the data. The resulting data is compared to the original, and error messages are
generated. The above sequence is repeated for each port. Nothing should be connected to
the rear panel during this test.
Bidirectional GPIB (HP-IB) Test (A7) .. 7
Tests the ability of the GPIB chips to communicate with each other in both directions (to
and from). The display message will prompt you to connect the GPIB to the SYSTEM bus.
Use the GPIB cable that would normally connect the test set to the 85101C, and make the
connection from the system bus to the GPIB on the rear panel of the 85101C. Then run the
test. If the test fails, the A7 board, the cable connection, or the cable may be faulty.
Static Interrupt System Test (A7).. 8
This routine exercises the CPU interrupt system on the A7 I/O board. This is a “static” test
of the interrupt system; it is a simple means of detecting major system problems.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-133
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
RPG Test (A1, A7).. 9
Tests the RPG (rotary pulse generator) knob and front panel interface to that knob. Run
the test and verify that the displayed RPG count is 00 Hex. Turn the knob
counterclockwise and verify that the count increases. Then turn the knob clockwise and
verify that the count decreases. You can go either way because the count wraps around
from 00 Hex to FF Hex.
Keyboards and LEDs Test (A1, A7).. A (G/n)
Tests the front panel keys and LEDs and their interface to the A7 I/O board. Run the test
and first check that the 85101C front panel LEDs (RLTS 1248) are flashing on and off. If
they are not, the A1 or A7 board is faulty. However, if they are flashing, continue the test
by pressing the key that is displayed on the LCD/CRT. After each key is displayed, press
that same key on the front panel.
85102 Interface Test (A7).. B (M/u)
This test verifies that the 85101C can communicate with the 85102. It requires the 85102
emulator (listed in Chapter 5 ). This emulates or takes the place of the 85102 IF/detector.
The emulator can be connected in two different ways:
1. Connect the male end directly to the IF-display interconnect on the back of the 85101C.
2. Connect the IF/display interconnect cable to the IF-display interconnect, and then
connect the female end to the other end of the cable. Using it this way, you can
determine if there is any problem with the IF-display interconnect cable.
Dynamic Interrupt System Test (A7).. C (k/m)
This test is used in the factory only and is not intended for use in the field. It requires a
different 85102 electronic emulator board.
Security Keys Interface Test (A7).. D (x1)
This test is used in the factory only and is not intended for use in the field. A special
electronic tool is required.
Watchdog Timer Test (A7).. E (+/–)
Tests the ability of the CPU watchdog timer to reset the processor. Running this test will
also reset the 8510C as if you pressed the recessed front panel TEST button. It will be
necessary for you to enter the service program again if you run this test.
4-134
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
85101 Display Board and CRT Tests (A4, A11) or LCD Tests (A14, A15)
GSP Address Decoder Stimulus Loop..1
This test strobes the interface address lines between the CPU and the graphics system
processor (GSP) for oscilloscope troubleshooting. A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on
the A7 I/O board. LED 1 is lit to indicate this test is active to help the troubleshooter who
may not have a functioning display. The scope pattern is not clear except to those familiar
with the patterns of good working units.
GSP Data Line Stimulus Loop.. 2
This test sends a continuous loop of “walking 1s” to the CPU-GSP interface data lines for
scope troubleshooting. LED 2 is lit to indicate an active test. A scope trigger is provided by
HTEST on the A7 I/O board. Press the recessed front panel TEST button to exit this test.
Ramp Background DAC Loop.. 3 (CRT) or
Ramp Background DAC Loop.. 3 (LCD)
A continuous negative-going staircase pattern should be seen at TP4 on the A4 or
A14 (LCD) GSP board. A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 I/O board. This
signal is generated by applying a digital ramp to the background (or backlight) DAC. LEDs
1 and 2 are lit to indicate that the test is active.
Ramp Intensity DAC Loop.. 4 (CRT) or
Ramp Intensity DAC Loop.. 4 (LCD)
A continuous negative-going staircase pattern should be seen at TP5 on the A4 or
A14 (LCD) GSP board. A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 I/O board. This
signal is generated by applying a digital ramp to the intensity (or unused) DAC. LED 4 is
lit to indicate that the test is active.
Calibrate Background and Intensity.. 5 (CRT) or
Save Time, Date, and LCD Backlight Settings.. 5 (LCD)
CRT: A password is required to run this test. It also requires a special digital photometer
with probe and a light occluder. A three-step grayscale is used to set background where all
three steps are just visible. Intensity is then set. All settings and the date are then stored.
For a complete procedure, refer to Chapter 7 , “Adjustments.”
LCD: This test is used in the factory to save the time, date, and LCD backlight settings
after adjustment.
Recall Background and Intensity Calibration.. 6 (CRT) or
Recall Time, Date, and LCD Backlight Settings.. 6 (LCD)
CRT: This recalls the calibration that is stored in nonvolatile memory and loads the
appropriate DACs with the data.
LCD: This test is used in the factory to recall the time, date, and LCD backlight settings
for diagnostic purposes.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-135
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
Screen Test Patterns.. 7
CRT: This test provides 15 screen patterns for use in evaluating and adjusting the display.
With these patterns, the following display qualities can be evaluated:
color purity
grayscale
focus
astigmatism
geometric distortion
convergence
Use the up/down keys, RPG knob, or the numeric keypad to select different patterns. To
exit this test, press =MARKER.
LCD: This test is used for diagnostics and troubleshooting. Refer to “Display Test Patterns”
on page 4-47 in the “LCD Failures” section for more information.
Softkey Label Alignment Pattern.. 8
This is a screen test pattern used to vertically align the display to the softkey positions.
(This test is for CRT displays only and does not apply to LCDs.)
4-136
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
85101 Nonvolatile Memory Board (A6) Tests
CAUTION
These tests require initialization of the EEPROMs on the A6 EEPROM
board. This procedure erases parts of the operating system. The
operating system MUST be reloaded after these tests are completed. Do
not run these tests unless you are sure they are required for service,
and unless you can reload your operating system from disk, when
finished.
Password Entry
When the A6 EEPROM board test menu is selected from the 85101 Display/Processor
Service Program menu, a message is displayed that requires a password to allow access to
these tests. The password is 8515.
The purpose of the password is to ensure that these destructive tests are not run by
accident.
Initialize Memory Board.. 1
This routine is used to initialize a new or repaired A6 EEPROM board prior to loading the
operating system. It must be done at least once to an A6 board or the assembly will not
function. This test should not be used for any other reason because it will erase the
operating system code in that area of memory. It takes approximately five seconds to
complete.
When the test is run, the message “Board Initialization in Progress...” will be
displayed. When the EEPROMs have been initialized, the message “Initialization
Completed” will be displayed.
After the test, it may be necessary to recalibrate the display and the beeper frequencies.
Complete Memory Board Unformatted Write/Read Test.. 2
This test checks the ability of non-volatile memory (EEPROMs) to correctly store data.
This test takes approximately two minutes to complete.
The test writes to and reads from each EEPROM and reports where the first error occurred
by giving the memory bank position, including upper (most significant) or lower (least
significant) byte in the bank.
The subtest number that failed is reported. Normally, a good memory will report subtest 0.
Press =MARKER to re-initialize memory and return to the main menu of the nonvolatile
memory board tests.
Complete Memory Board Formatted Write/Read Test.. 3
This test prompts the user for a hexadecimal bit pattern to write into and read from
memory. Then it prompts for the start and stop page numbers. Normally, you would start
at page 0000 and stop on the last available page in memory. These page numbers depend
on how many EEPROMs are loaded in the A6 EEPROM board. Running test 8 will show
how many pages are in your A6 EEPOM board, provided the board successfully initialized.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-137
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
In the 85101C there is error-correction firmware that can cover up defects in EEPROM in
this test. The usefulness of this test may therefore be limited and may best be used to
check the error-correction capabilities. Use “Write Unformatted Data to Selected Memory
Locations.. 5” to perform pattern writes in an uncorrected mode. This will destroy
initialization and hardware calibration data.
Read/Verify Test 3 Data Again.. 4
This test re-verifies the data stored in memory from the prior test. It reports the first failed
page. As explained in the previous test, error-correction is on the test and will not reliably
show EEPROM failures.
Write Unformatted Data to Selected Memory Locations.. 5
The board must be re-initialized after this procedure. This test allows the user to input the
size of the memory to write to, and the location and pattern. It reports problems with the
write if any, and prompts to allow looping writes. The test reads the pattern back, and
reports all locations where a pattern mismatch exists. There is no formatting, and
hardware cal data may be lost. Also, repeated looping writes to EEPROM will reduce
memory life span.
Read/Verify Test 5 Data Again.. 6
This test re-verifies the data stored in memory from the previous test. It displays any
errors exactly as the previous test would display them. This re-verification is useful for
detecting the type of EEPROM failure where memory is lost after a lapse of time.
Read Locations Where Hardware Cal Data Is Stored..7
This lists the data stored in formatted pages 1 and 2 of the A6 EEPROM board, and the
data stored in page 1 of the timer clock peripheral RAM on the A7 I/O board. The date for
the background and intensity DAC cal is also stored.
Show Non-Volatile Memory Parameters.. 8
This uses the EEPROM driver firmware to find out how it has calculated certain memory
parameters. The A6 EEPROM board must be initialized for the driver to have the
information. It returns the value for number of formatted pages and the present position of
the memory pointer.
Reset Memory to Default Hardware Cal Data.. 9
This is meant for use by the factory only. This test requires the user to enter a password. It
initializes memory and then loads pages 1 and 2 with the hardware default cal data. This
should be done only as a last resort when all memory is lost.
4-138
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
85102 IF/Detector Service Program Menu
This is the primary 85102 menu. It allows you to select any of the tests for the IF/detector.
NOTE
Read the following instructions before using the 85102 diagnostics.
Hardware
These tests require that the source, test set, and all peripherals be disconnected from the
system. In place of the source and test set, connect the 85102 test adapter. Refer to
Chapter 5 , “Replaceable Parts,” for the part number of this tool.
Connect the adapter, using a BNC cable, from the 20 MHz output on the rear panel of the
85102 to the J1 Test Set Interconnect (IF interconnect), also on the rear panel of the 85102.
This test adapter takes a fixed 20 MHz IF reference signal from the 85102 and uses it in
place of the 20 MHz IF from the test set. The test set downconverts the source RF to a
20 MHz IF. To verify the 20 MHz output, use an oscilloscope terminated in 50 ohms and
you should see an approximate 0.7 volt p-p square wave signal with rounded corners. Or, if
the scope is not terminated in 50 ohms, the 20 MHz signal is a distorted signal (like a
sine-wave with a large third harmonic) of about 1.8 volts p-p.
Also connect a separate BNC cable from the ANALOG ±10V to the SWEEP IN 0-10V, both
located on the rear of the 85102. This connection will provide a trigger input to the sweep
ADC in the 85102.
85102 Prompt Message
A message will appear on the display, prompting you to make the connections explained in
the paragraph titled “Hardware” above. Be sure you make these connections, or the
diagnostics will not report valid results.
After making the connections, press =MARKER to get to the 85102 IF/detector service
program menu. Remember to reconnect the proper system cables after you are finished.
Refer to Chapter 9 , “System Installation,” if necessary.
Order of Testing
These tests must be run in a specific order because of the relationship between the boards
in the 85102. There is a specific signal flow that corresponds to the arrangement of the
boards in this instrument. Therefore, it is recommended that you use the Run All mode
first whenever you suspect a problem or replace a board in this instrument. This Run All
mode will run all the tests in a specific order. Later, you can run the tests individually.
Also, the Run All or any individual tests can be looped repeatedly to look for intermittent
errors.
Again, because of the interdependence of the boards, it is possible to fail a specific test
although the real failure is due to a problem on a different board. This is because the other
board provided a faulty signal to the board that appeared to fail.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-139
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
The following sequence is recommended to minimize the chance of erroneous test failures.
When running the tests separately, run them in the order below:
1. ADC control test (A19)
2. Sweep ADC (A20), ADC (A18), and 100 kHz IF amplifiers (A10, A12)
3. Cal DAC (A17), Mixers (A9, A11, A13, A14), synchronous detectors (A5, A7), and all
others
If the Test Does Not Verify or Isolate the Failure
If after running these service program tests, you suspect a single board, use the Run All
mode first and then run the single board test afterward. If running the test does not verify
the failure, refer to “Other Failures.” That section contains additional information about
some of the tests in this program. For example, if you have a running error message, and
you are referred to this section to run a test, but it passes, check “Other Failures” to see if
there is any further testing you can do.
Failure After Repair
If a failure is detected after a board is replaced, the failure may be the result of a board
that is indirectly related to the failed board. If this happens, you should check the following
boards: A15 power supply, A6 clock board, and the A24 processor interface. Those boards
affect all other boards and, if they are faulty, they can cause most other boards to fail a
test. Be sure to check those boards if a replaced board still fails a test.
ADC Control Test (A19).. 1
Tests the ability of the A18 ADC board to execute a complete set of conversions and
generate an ADC interrupt request. This test verifies that the processor can trigger the
ADC state machine on the A19 ADC control board. It also verifies that the state machine
on A19 sequences properly and that a conversion is actually completed by the closely
related A18 ADC board. Also, it verifies that the A19 repeat and delay counters are
working properly.
Other causes of failure on this test may be:
• A faulty A6 clock board
• A faulty 10 MHz input to the A19 ADC control board
• A faulty 800 kHz signal in to the A18 ADC board
Sweep ADC Test (A20).. 2
This test checks the following items on the A20 sweep ADC board:
•
•
•
•
•
•
pulse generator
trigger generator
sweep counter
input buffer
sweep crossing detector
staircase generator
It also tests the analog output DAC programmability of the A21 IF counter board. The A6
clock board must be working properly for this test to pass.
4-140
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
ADC Test (A18).. 3
This test verifies that the board can be operated in calibration mode. It also verifies proper
operation of the offset current source, 12-bit ADC, and all data RAMS. Failure messages
may indicate which data bits are faulty. These types of messages are only useful for factory
repair technicians.
Other causes of failure of this test may be:
• The multiplexer of the A17 sample and hold board is injecting a signal into the A18
ADC board. If it does fail, remove the W24 cable that connects A17 sample and hold to
A18 ADC. If it passes after that, the A17 sample and hold board is probably faulty.
Cal DAC Test (A17).. 4
This test verifies that the CAL DAC on the A17 sample and hold board can properly
calibrate the eight-bit DAC on the A18 ADC board. The ADC test should be run prior to
this test. Additionally, the running error message “ADC CAL FAILED” can be the result of a
faulty A17 sample and hold board.
Other causes of failure of this test may be:
• A faulty A18 ADC board, primarily the 10 volt reference.
100 kHz IF Amplifier Test (A10, A12).. 5
This test verifies the ability of the test and reference amplifier boards (A10 and A12,
respectively) to pass and amplify the 100 kHz IF signals.
Other causes of failure of this test may be:
•
•
•
•
Faulty A24 processor interface board
Faulty 100 kHz IF address decoder on the A6 clock board
Faulty 100 kHz Cal signal on the A6 clock board
If both boards (A10, A12) fail, the A6 clock is probably faulty.
Synchronous Detector Test (A5, A7).. 6
This test verifies that both A5 and A7 synchronous detector boards are working properly. It
is also used to detect failures with the A17 sample and hold board circuitry. However, you
must run the ADC test (A18) and 100 kHz IF amp test (A10, A12) before running this test.
If those tests pass, then you can run this test and have confidence in the results.
Other causes of failure of this test may be:
• Faulty A18 ADC and/or A19 ADC control board
• Faulty A10 or A12 IF amplifiers
• Faulty A6 clock board
20 MHz Mixer Test (A9, A11, A13, A14).. 7
This test verifies the ability of the A9, A11, A13, and A14 mixer boards to downconvert the
20 MHz IF signals to 100 kHz. This test is a good example of the use of the 20 MHz output
of the 85102. Before running this test, be sure that the 100 kHz IF amplifier test (A10,
A12) has passed.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-141
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
Other causes of failure of this test may be:
• Faulty A10/A12 IF amplifier boards
• Faulty 20 MHz signal from the A6 clock board
• Faulty 19.9 MHz signal from the A8 LO generator
Pretune Phase Lock Test (A22).. 8
This test verifies the ability of the A22 pretune control board to count the 20 MHz signal
on the VTO sense line. The test also verifies that the phase detector on the A22 pretune
control is working. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Theory of Operation,” for more information on how
the phase lock system operates.
Main Phase Lock Test (A23).. 9
This test verifies the operation of the attenuator switches, lock indicator, search/off set
DAC, and mode switch. Refer to Chapter 3 , “Theory of Operation,” for more information on
how the phase lock system operates.
IF Counter Test (A21) .. A (G/n)
This test verifies the operation of the following circuits on the A21 IF counter:
•
•
•
•
Reference channel select switch
Counter circuit
Gate generator
Amplifier limiter
Other causes of failure of this test may be:
• A13 and/or A14 mixer boards that provide the 20 MHz signals to the A21 IF counter
Run All the Above Tests - - B (M/u)
Each test is run sequentially.
85102 Front Panel Test.. C (k/m)
This test allows you to check each front panel key. You press the key and the test verifies
its operation. This test is not done in the Run All The Tests selection.
4-142
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
Test Set GPIB (HP-IB) Service Program Menu
The tests on this menu verify the ability of the A4 GPIB board in the test set to execute
certain commands. Also, these tests verify operation of the A5 attenuator/switch driver
board for S-parameter test sets only. These tests can be run with the test set connected to
the entire system and also with the test set only connected to the 85101C. For more
troubleshooting information about the test set, refer to “Unratioed Power Failures.”
Preset Test Set.. 1
This test initializes the test set to its own preset state:
•
•
•
•
0 dB attenuation
Power to port 1
S11 display
Active light on port 1
The test set must be at GPIB address 720 or just 20 on the switches. If this test fails, the
failure message will remain on the display even if you run any other test or if you run this
test again and it passes. To clear the failure message from the display, exit this menu and
return.
Switch Active Light.. 2
This test toggles the front panel active light when the =MARKER key is pressed. This test
verifies that the light is working properly.
Switch Port 1,2 Lights.. 3
This test switches the two front panel LEDs on an S-parameter test set to display all four
possible states: 00, 01, 10, 11. This test verifies that the A5 board can switch power
between the ports—separately and together. Also, the test set A5 attenuator/switch driver
board has two LEDs that should also light as you press the =MARKER key to toggle the
power to all four states.
Activate Port 1,2 Attenuator.. 4
This test alternately activates/deactivates port 1 and 2 attenuators. This test is used
together with the following test to verify that the attenuators in the S-parameter test set
are functioning.
Increment Active Attenuator .. 5
This tests the test set attenuator of the activated port (selected by test 4 above) by
incrementing attenuation in 10 dB steps (0 to 90 dB). You may be able to hear the relays
clicking as the values are changed. The value of the sum of the ON green LEDs on the A5
attenuator/switch driver board should equal the number indicated on the display.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-143
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
Select New GPIB (HP-IB) Address.. 6
This test changes the address that the 85101C will seek when performing future test set
GPIB commands. Remember, it does not change the address of the actual test set DIP
switches. If you use this routine to change the 8510C test set address, remember to change
the switches on the test set to match the changes you make.
4-144
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
8360 Service Program Menu
This menu accesses the menus and corresponding functions resident in the 8360 series
sources. This is done by communicating with the source over the GPIB, sending commands
to and receiving responses from the source.
GPIB (HP-IB) Test.. 1
This tests the communication between the 85101C GPIB interface and the 8360 source
GPIB interface. The 85101C sends a command to the 8360 source asking for identification
and the source sends back its identifying string if the communication is successful.
Front Panel Emulator.. 2
This is primarily used to access the menus resident in 836X1 sources that do not have a
front panel. It is used to perform diagnostics and calibration of the source. This is done by
using a combination of the softkeys on the 85101C and hardkeys on the 85102. A front
panel overlay for the 85102 shows the location and function of the keys on the 85102 that
access the menus and control the various source functions. The front panel overlay is
shown in the available service tools section in Chapter 5 , “Replaceable Parts.”
Change GPIB (HP-IB) Address (default is 19).. 3
This allows you to select the source within a system to be addressed by the front panel
emulator. This is used if the system has multiple sources (i.e, RF and LO) or an RF source
at a different GPIB address than the default. Make sure that the dip switches on the
desired source are set the same as this selection.
The default address for an RF source in an 8510 system is 19. The default address for an
LO source is 18.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-145
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Service Program
This page intentionally left blank.
4-146
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Error Terms
Error Terms
Overview
Error terms are factors used for error correction, or accuracy enhancement, in the analyzer
system when correction is turned on. Error terms are numbers generated and stored in
internal arrays during a measurement calibration. They are also known as E-terms or
measurement calibration coefficients. Descriptions of the individual error terms are
provided at the end of this section.
Error terms can also serve a diagnostic purpose. Specific parts of the analyzer system and
accessories contribute to the values of the error terms. Since we know this correlation and
we know what typical error terms look like, we can examine error terms to monitor system
performance or to identify faulty components in the system.
Error terms are created by measuring well-defined calibration devices over the frequency
range of interest and comparing the measured data with the ideal model for the devices.
Neglecting drift and random errors (such as noise), the differences represent systematic
(repeatable) errors of the network analyzer system. The resulting measurement
calibration coefficients are good representations of some raw error sources of the system.
Use the procedures in this section to generate and examine error terms. This information
can be useful in two ways.
Preventive Maintenance
A stable, repeatable system should generate repeatable error terms over long time
intervals, for example six months. Make a hardcopy record (print or plot) of the error
terms, then periodically compare current error terms with the record. A sudden shift in
error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic errors or a degradation of cal standards,
and may indicate the need for further troubleshooting. A long term trend usually reflects
drift, connector or cable wear, or gradual degradation of calibration devices, indicating the
need for further investigation and preventive maintenance. Note that the system may still
conform to specifications. The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging connectors
and cal standards or inspecting cables.
Troubleshooting
If a subtle failure or minor performance problem is suspected, the magnitude of the error
terms should be compared against values generated previously with the same system and
calibration kit. This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem.
Consider the following while troubleshooting. These procedures are especially good for
determining if a calibration is bad or the test set is faulty.
✓ All parts of the network analyzer system, including cables and calibration devices, can
contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms.
✓ Connectors must be clean, gaged, and within specification for error term analysis to be
meaningful.
✓ Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement
calibration, to minimize cable instability errors.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-151
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Error Terms
✓ Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration. The connector
interface must be repeatable. Refer to information in the test set manual and cal kit
manuals for information on connection techniques and on cleaning and gaging
connectors.
✓ Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor, subtle performance problems. Refer to
the main troubleshooting procedures in the beginning of this chapter if a blatant failure
or gross measurement error is evident.
✓ It is often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice (using two separate measurement
calibrations) to establish the degree of repeatability. If the results do not seem
repeatable, check all connectors and cables.
✓ The errors displayed by the verification program may be greater than the specified total
uncertainty errors that you print out using the specifications program. This can be due
to bad connections during calibration or verification; or to devices, cables, or rear panel
test set extension links that are faulty (dirty or damaged). In addition, defective
calibration devices can be the cause of degraded error term data, just as careless
calibration methods can.
Measurement Calibration
Always perform a measurement calibration before doing the error term inspection. If the
system includes an S-parameter test set, do a full 2-port calibration. For systems with a
reflection/transmission test set, do a one-path 2-port calibration.
Error Terms Inspection Procedure
This procedure uses the specifications software to display and print out the system error
terms. It compares the raw error terms to the printout of the specifications, to show
whether any E-terms are out of specification.
Equipment
• HP 9000 200 or 300 series controller (except 9826) with 4 megabytes of available
memory after loading BASIC, or PC with BASIC for Windows.
• Specifications/verification software
• Calibration kit
• Compatible printer
Procedure
1. Set up the system with the controller connected to the 8510 over GPIB.
2. Refer to Chapter 8 , “Performance Verification and Specifications,” for instructions on
running the specifications/verification software.
3. Within the specifications/verification program, use the controller softkeys to select the
configuration of your system.
4. Select the system specs menu, then test port errors (correction off) to view the forward
direction E-terms. Print out the E-terms.
4-152
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Error Terms
5. Select the reverse direction E-terms, and print them out.
6. Perform the appropriate measurement calibration (2-port for a system with an
S-parameter test set, one-path 2-port for a transmission/reflection test set).
7. Select the verification program with the VERIFY SYSTEM selection. Select DISPLAY
ETERM to display the error terms.
8. On the printouts you made in steps 4 and 5, find the column of raw error terms. Use
these raw error term figures to compare to the displayed E-terms.
9. Select each E-term and compare the display trace to the raw specifications in the
corresponding printouts. Use the 8510 marker to read the trace values.
If the trace values are close to or better than the specified values, this is a normal
situation.
If the trace value is significantly worse than the specified value, first suspect the
calibration. Recalibrate, and display the E-terms again. If this does not solve the problem,
the fault is in the cables or calibration devices, the test set, or the source. Try substituting
cables and calibration devices. If the problem still exists after another recalibration, refer
to the section “Unratioed Power Failures” on page 4-85.
NOTE
If you cannot solve the problem, save the results of this entire
procedure, and contact an Agilent customer engineer.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-153
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Error Terms
Error Term Descriptions
The following paragraphs describe the individual error terms, the devices used to
characterize them in a measurement calibration, the measurements they affect, and
explain how they relate to faults in the system.
Directivity (Edf and Edr)
These are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity errors of the system (mainly of
the test set). These terms vary with frequency, but values that are worse than the
specifications may indicate an error or mechanical malfunction in the test set or in the
devices used for the reflection calibration. The calibration device used to characterize the
directivity error term is usually a load. This may be a lowband fixed load for frequencies
below 2 GHz, a broadband fixed load, a sliding load for frequencies above 2 GHz, or it may
be an offset load for higher frequencies. The measurements most affected by directivity
errors are low-reflection measurements: high-reflection measurements may appear
normal.
Source Match (Esf and Esr)
These are the forward and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port. The
source match, in this case, is determined primarily by the match of the test set power
splitter and the main line coupler or bridge. In some test sets, the match of the bias tees
and step attenuators is also included. The calibration devices used to characterize source
match are the short and the shielded open, or offset short for millimeter-wave devices. A
bad connection of either of these during the calibration procedure can cause bad source
match E-term data. The measurements most affected by source match errors are
high-reflection measurements, and transmission measurements of highly reflective DUTs.
Poor source match, when associated with poor directivity, is probably an indication of a
defective coupler or bridge in the test set. Poor source match alone may be caused by a
mismatch in the test set, the test set port connector, the cable between the RF source and
the test set, or the RF source itself. Try inserting a 3 dB or 6 dB pad between the RF source
cable and the test set rear panel to see if this improves the source match error. If it does,
the problem is most likely the cable or the RF source.
Reflection Tracking (Erf and Err)
Tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference channel and the
frequency response of the test channel. Large variations in the reflection tracking E-terms
may indicate a problem in the reference or test signal path in the test set, or bad
connections during the measurement calibration procedure. The calibration devices used
to characterize the reflection tracking error terms are the short (or offset short) and the
shielded open. All reflection measurements (of both high and low reflection devices) are
affected by the reflection tracking errors.
4-154
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Error Terms
Isolation (Crosstalk) (Exf and Exr)
These are the uncorrected forward and reverse isolation error terms that represent the
leakage between the test port paths. The isolation error coefficients are characterized
when fixed loads are connected to both test ports in the calibration procedure. Any signal
that appears in the test channel is coupled from the reference channel. The crosstalk term
should be very small. It affects both reflection and transmission measurements, primarily
when the test channel signal is at a very low level, especially transmission measurements
where the insertion loss of the DUT is large (for example >40 dB attenuation).
Load Match (Elf and Elr)
These are the forward and reverse uncorrected load match errors, a measure of the
impedance match of the output port of a two-port device, including the match of test port
cables. Load match error terms are characterized by measuring the responses of a thru
connection during the calibration procedure (S11 for all test sets plus S22 for S-parameter
test sets). Large variations in the forward or reverse load match error terms may indicate a
bad thru cable or, if a reflection/transmission test set is used, a bad system attenuator. The
measurements most affected by load match errors are all transmission measurements, and
reflection measurements of a two-port device with low insertion loss (for example an
airline).
Transmission Tracking (Etf and Etr)
Tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference channel and the
frequency response of the test channel. Large variations in the transmission tracking
E-terms may indicate a problem in the reference or test signal path in the test set, or bad
connections during the measurement calibration procedure. Transmission tracking error
terms are characterized from the transmission measurements of a thru connection in the
measurement calibration procedure. All transmission measurements are affected by
transmission tracking errors.
Notes
1. The TRL (thru-reflection-line) calibration method uses a thru connection, an airline,
and a short or open to obtain all twelve error terms. No individual TRL device is
identified with any single error term using this method.
2. Be extremely cautious when interpreting the results of E-term displays compared with
specification printouts. A system failure is indicated only if the error is significantly
worse than the specification.
3. The values listed for reflection tracking and transmission tracking refer only to the
ripple of the frequency response. However, the reflection and transmission tracking
E-terms include both the tracking E-term (ripple) and the frequency response rolloff. It
is difficult to determine what part of the E-term ripple is independent of the rolloff.
Therefore, the reflection and transmission tracking E-terms may not be as useful as the
other values.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
4-155
Main Troubleshooting Procedure
Error Terms
4-156
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5
Replaceable Parts
5-1
Replaceable Parts
Overview
This chapter contains illustrations and corresponding parts lists of the major assemblies,
cables, and other hardware, software, and accessories for use with the analyzer.
Parts tables for individual test sets and sources are in their respective manuals.
Sections include parts listings for:
• Software and documentation
• Available service tools
• 85101C equipped with a CRT display
• 85101C equipped with an LCD
• 85102B
NOTE
The original 85101C display/processor incorporated a cathode ray tube
(CRT display). The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display
(LCD).
Exchange Assemblies
Some of the major assemblies can be replaced on a rebuilt exchange (R-E) basis. Exchange,
factory-repaired and tested assemblies are available only on a trade-in basis; the defective
assemblies must be returned for credit, within 30 days. For this reason, assemblies
required for spare parts stock must be ordered by the new assembly part number.
Figure 5-1 explains the rebuilt module exchange procedure. R-E assembly part numbers
are listed in the parts list below the part numbers for the corresponding new assemblies
Ordering Information
To order a part listed in the replaceable parts tables, quote the Agilent part number,
indicate the quantity required, and address the order to the nearest Agilent office.
5-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-1
Module Exchange Program
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-3
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-1
Reference Designations, Abbreviations, Multipliers and
Manufacturer’s Code List
Reference Designators
C
G
A.....................................Assembly
C.................................Capacitance
GROM.............................Grommet
B...................................Fan,Motor
CA.........................................Cable
GRV..................................Grooved
C.....................................Capacitor
CBL.......................................Cable
H
E.....Miscellaneous Electrical Part
CER..................................Ceramic
HD.........................................Head
F.............................................Fuse
CHAM..............................Chamfer
HEX..............................Hexagonal
Fl...........................................Filter
CKT....................................Circuit
HLD........................................Hold
J..................Electrical Connector
(Stationary Portion), Jack
CNDCT.........................Conductor
HNDL.................................Handle
MP.....Miscellaneous, Mechanical
Part
CNTR .............Control, Controller
HT..........................................Heat
Q.....Silicon, Controlled Rectifier
(SCR), Transistor, Triode,
Thyristor
CONN............................Connector
I
R........................................Resistor
CONT..............Control, Controller
IC......................Integrated Circuit
T................................Transformer
CONVTR.......................Converter
ID....Identifying, Inside Diameter
U......................Integrated Circuit
Microcircuit
CPU........Central Processing Unit
IF............Intermediate Frequency
W.......Cable, Transmission Path,
Wire
CVR......................................Cover
IN............................................Inch
X................................ Crystal Unit
(Piezoelectric Quartz)
D
INTL.................................Internal
Abbreviations
DARL...................Darlington Pair
I/O............................Input/Output
A
DBL....................................Double
J
AD......................Analog to Digital
DEG....................................Degree
JKT......................................Jacket
ADC..Analog to Digital Converter
DET..................................Detector
K
ADPT................................Adapter
DIP.............Dual In-Line Package
KB...................................Keyboard
AL...............................Alumninum
E
L
AMP................................Amplifier
EEPROM.................Electronically
Erasable Programmable Read
Only Memory
L..............................................Left
APC...............Amphenol Precision
Connector
EMU...............................Emulator
LBL.......................................Label
ASSY..............................Assembly
EXT...............External, Extension
LFT..........................................Left
AWG..........American Wire Gauge
F
LG..........................................Long
AY...................................Assembly
F.........................................Female
LK...........................................Lock
B
FEM...................................Female
LKWR.......................Lock Washer
B............................................Band
FL............................................Flat
LO.........................Local Oscillator
BD........................................Board
FLG.....................................Flange
M
BLK.......................................Black
FLTR.....................................Filter
M...............................Male, Metric
BNC..................Type of Connector
FM..........................................Film
Mach..............................Machined
BP.................................Band Pass
FRNT....................................Front
MFR........................Manufacturer
BSC.......................................Basic
FRT.......................................Front
MISC.......................Miscellaneous
BSHG...............................Bushing
FT.........Current Gain Bandwidth
MM...............................Millimeter
FXD.......................................Fixed
MO............................Metal Oxide
5-4
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-1
Reference Designations, Abbreviations, Multipliers and
Manufacturer’s Code List
MTG...............................Mounting
REF................................Reference
SYS....................................System
MTLC.................................Metalic
RF.......................Radio Frequency
T
MXR....................................Mixer
RFI.....................Radio Frequency
Interference
T.........................Thickness, Teeth
N
RGB....................Red, Green, Blue
TA..................................Tantalum
NO....................................Number
RND.....................................Round
TC...........................Thermoplastic
NPN.................Negative, Positive,
Negative (Transistor)
RPG.........Rotary Pulse Generator
THD....................................Thread
NYL......................................Nylon
RR..........................................Rear
THK......................................Thick
O
RT..........................................Right
THKNS..........................Thickness
OD.....................Outside Diameter
S
THRM..............................Thermal
P
SCE.....................................Source
TNG....................................Tongue
PAN......................................Panel
SCR.......Screw, Silicon Controlled
Rectifier
TPG...................................Tapping
PAN-HD.........................Pan Head
SER.......................................Serial
TTL......Transistor Transistor Log
PC..........................Printed Circuit
SGL......................................Single
TX...........................................Torx
PD...............Pad, Palladium, Pitch
Diameter, Power Dissipation
SHFT.....................................Shaft
U
PERF............................Perforated
SI.........................................Silicon
UL...Underwriters’ Laboratories,
Inc.
PKG..................................Package
SK...........................................Sink
UNCT.............................Undercut
PL........Phase Lock, Plain, Plate,
Plug
SKT...........................Skirt, Socket
V
PNP...Positive, Negative, Positive
(Transistor)
SLDR...................................Solder
V..............................................Volt
POLYU....................Polyurethane
SMB..............Subminature type B
(Snap-on Conductor)
VGA........Video Graphics Adapter
POZI................................Pozidrive
SMPL.................................Sample
W
PROC..............................Processor
SPCL..................................Special
W.................................Watt, Width
PVC..................Polyvinyl Chloride
STR........................Strapped, Stop
WD.......................................Width
PW...................Power Wirewound
SUBMIN..................Subminature
X
PWR....................................Power
SW.......................................Switch
XDCR..........................Transducer
R
SWP.....................................Sweep
XSTR.............................Transistor
R.......................................Right
SYNC.....................Synchronous
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-5
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-2
Abbreviations, Multipliers, and Manufacturer’s Code List
Multipliers
Abbreviation
Prefix
Multiple
Abbreviation
Prefix
Multiple
Abbreviation
Prefix
Multiple
T
tera
1012
da
deka
10
n
nano
10–9
G
giga
109
d
deci
10–1
p
pico
10–12
M
mega
106
c
centi
10–3
f
femto
10–15
k
kilo
103
m
milli
10–3
a
atto
10–16
µ
micro
10–6
Manufacturer’s Code List
Mfr. No.
Manufacturer Name
00000
Any satisfactory supplier
00853
Sangamo Elec Co S Carolina Div
Pickens
SC
29671
01295
Texas Instr Inc Semicon Cmpnt Div
Dallas
TX
75222
24355
Analog Devices Inc
Norwood
MA
02062
28480
Agilent Co Corporate Hg
Palo Alto
CA
94304
56289
Sprague Electric Co
North Adams
MA
01247
75402
Trw Inc Philadelphia
Philadelphia
PA
19108
91673
Dale Electronics
Columbus
NE
68601
5-6
Address
Zip
Code
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Software, Documentation, and Accessories
Software, Documentation, and Accessories
Table 5-3
Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
Software
85101-80116
1
Operating System Firmware (for LCD or CRT
displays)
28480
85101-80116
08510-10033
1
Test Set Specifications and Performance Tests
Disk. Note - These tests are used for all test sets
except the 8511A/B.
28480
08510-10033
08510-10024
1
85102 and Test Sets Adjustment Software
28480
08510-10024
08510-10034
1
Master Calibration Disk
28480
08510-10034
85103-10002
1
Software Toolkit Disk
28480
85103-10002
28480
08510-90275
Documentation
08510-90275
1
8510C Operating and Service Manual Set
Includes the following separately available manuals:
08510-90281
1
Operating and Programming Manual
28480
08510-90281
08510-90280
1
Keyword Dictionary
28480
08510-90280
08510-90282
1
On-Site Service Manual
28480
08510-90282
08510-90283
1
Test Sets and Accessories Binder
28480
08510-90283
Accessories
6010-1134
Dove Grey touch–up paint for front panel frame
and painted portions of front handles
28480
6010-1134
6010-1137
French Grey touch–up paint for side, top, and
bottom covers
28480
6010-1137
6010-1138
Parchment Grey touch–up paint for rack mount
flanges, rack support shelves and front panels.
28480
6010-1138
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-7
Replaceable Parts
Available Service Tools
Available Service Tools
Table 5-4
Ref
Desig
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
27
Agilent Part
Number
08510–20001
08510–20002
08517–20019
08513–60009
5061–1022
5062–7230
0955–0417
5086–7408
1250–0780
1250–1236
1250–1200
1250–0669
1250–2330
1250–1391
8710–0630
1400–0088
1490–0025
85101–60209
85101–60236
85101–60237
85102–60210
85102–60030
8493C OPT 010
2110–0001
2110–0002
2110–0012
2110–0083
2110–0333
2110–0342
2110–0425
2110–0655
9300–1367
9300–0980
23
9300–0797
08511–60016
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
08511–20025
08511–20031
11667C
08490-60011
08490-60012
85138B
85138A
1250–2188
08510–60022
34
35
08510–90268
85102–80115
5-8
Description
Mfr
Code
CABLE RF – TEST 1
CABLE RF – TEST
CABLE FLEX SOURCE, 50 GHZ
CABLE FLEX SOURCE 26.5
CABLE ASSEMBLY
CABLE ASSEMBLY BNC– SNAP
FILTER, BP 60 MHZ, BNC – SOURCE EMULATOR
POWER SPLITTER
ADAPTER M TYPE – N F BNC
ADAPTER F BNC F SMB
ADAPTER F BNC M SMA
ADAPTER M SMB M SMB
ADAPTER M 3.5 MM M 2.4 MM*
ADAPTER TEE MFM SMB
ALIGNMENT TOOL .08 SCDR
ALLIGATOR CLIP
TEST PROBE
BOARD ASSY– 85102 EMULATOR
85101 POST– REGULATOR EXTENDER BOARD
85101 STANDARD EXTENDER BOARD
SERVICE ADAPTER–TEST SET EMULATOR
BOARD ASSEMBLY – SERVICE EXTENDER
APC 3.5 10DB PAD
FUSE 1A 250V 85102 A26F3*
FUSE 2A 250V 85102 F1 LINE FUSE*
FUSE .51 250V 85102 A24F1*
FUSE 2.5A 250V 85102 A26F1, A26F2*
FUSE 1.5A 125V– 85101C A3F1*
FUSE 8A 250V – 85102 A26F4*
FUSE 2A 125V – 85101C A3F2, A3F3*
FUSE 3.15A 250V – 85101C LINE FUSE*
WRIST STRAP, ANTI – STATIC, ADJUSTABLE
(DOES NOT INCLUDE CORD)*
GROUNDING CORD, 5 FEET LONG (USE WITH WRIST
STRAP)*
ANTI-STATIC EQUIPMENT MAT (4 FT. X 2 FT.)*
8511B SERVICE TOOLS KIT
THE FOLLOWING 8511B SERVICE TOOLS MAY BE
ORDERED AS A KIT OR ORDERED SEPARATELY:
RF TEST CABLE (TWO SUPPLIED IN KIT)
RF CABLE SOURCE, 2 FT LG
50 GHZ POWER SPLITTER
FIXED ATTENUATOR, 6 DB (TWO SUPPLIED IN KIT)
FIXED ATTENUATOR 20 DB
FIXED LOAD, 50 OHM F 2.4 MM
FIXED LOAD, 50 OHM M 2.4 MM
ADAPTER F 2.4MM F 2.4MM
8510/8360 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR KIT
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE INCLUDED IN THE
8510/8360 FRONT PANEL
EMULATOR KITS ARE AVAILABLE SEPARATELY:
INSTALLATION NOTE
PANEL OVERLAY
*NOT ILLUSTRATED
Mfr Part
Number
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
08510–20001
08510–20002
08517–20019
08513–60009
5061–1022
5062–7230
0955–0417
5086–7408
1250–0780
1250–1236
1250–1200
1250–0669
1250–2330
1250–1391
8710–0630
1400–0088
1490–0025
85101–60209
85101–60236
85101–60237
85102–60210
85102–60030
8493C OPT 010
2110–0001
2110–0002
2110–0012
2110–0083
2110–0333
2110–0342
2110–0425
2110–0655
9300–1367
28480
9300–0980
28480
28480
9300–0797
08511–60016
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
08511–20025
08511–20031
11667C
08490-60011
08490-60012
85138B
85138A
1250–2188
08510–60022
28480
28480
08510–90268
85102–80115
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Available Service Tools
Figure 5-2
Available Service Tools
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-9
Replaceable Parts
Available Service Tools
Figure 5-3
5-10
Available Service Tools
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Available Service Tools
This page intentionally left blank.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-11
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Table 5-5
Ref
Desig
Agilent Part
Number
85101C Top Internal with CRT
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
A1
85101–60249
1
FRONT PANEL WITH KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
28480 85101–60249
A2
0950–2075
1
DISC DRIVE
28480 0950–2075
A3
85101–60244 1
POST–REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 85101–60244
A3
85101–69244
POST–REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY (R–E)
28480 85101–69244
A3F1
2110–0333
1
FUSE 1.5A 125V NTD
28480 2110–0333
A3F2
2110–0425
1
FUSE 2A 125V NTD .25 X .27
28480 2110–0425
A3F3
2110–0425
1
FUSE 2A 125V NTD .25 X 2.7
28480 2110–0425
A4
85101–60243 1
GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 85101–60243
A4
85101–69243
GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY (R–E)
28480 85101–69243
A5
85101–60245 1
CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY
28480 85101–60245
A5
85101–69245
CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY (R–E)
28480 85101–69245
A6
85101–60238 1
EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 85101–60238
A6
85101–69238
EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY (R–E)
28480 85101–69238
A7
85101–60272 1
INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 85101–60272
A8
85101–60263 1
SECURITY KEY BOARD ASSEMBLY (NEW)
(NO IC SUPPLIED)
28480 85101–60263
A8IC1 85101–69273
SECURITY KEY IC, 8510C STANDARD
(REBUILT– EXCHANGE ONLY)
Revision 6.XX–8.XX firmware
28480 85101–69273
A8IC2 85101–69268
SECURITY KEY IC, 8510C TIME DOMAIN OPT 010
(REBUILT-EXCHANGE ONLY)
28480 85101–69268
A9
85101–60246 1
REAR PANEL WITH BOARD ASSEMBLY
28480 85101–60246
A10
0950-3488
1
PREREGULATOR ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 0950-3488
A10F1 2110–0655
1
FUSE 3.15A 250V
28480 2110–0655
A11
2090–0210
1
DISPLAY ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 2090–0210
W1
85101–60257 1
RIBBON CABLE ASSEMBLY
28480 85101–60257
W2
85101–60254 1
RIBBON CABLE – DISK DRIVE
28480 85101–60254
W3
85101–60259 1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, DISK DRIVE POWER
28480 85101–60259
1
0515–2086
5
MACH SCREW M4.0 7MM TX
28480 0515–2086
2
0515–0377
4
MACH SCREW M3.5 10MM TX
28480 0515–0377
3
85101–40014 11
PC BOARD SPACER
28480 85101–40014
4
85101–20055 1
RFI GASKET, TOP
28480 85101–20055
5
0515–0372
MACH SCREW M3.0 8MM FLP TXP
28480 0515–0372
6
85101–00051 1
CARD CAGE COVER
28480 85101–00051
7
0515–1400
2
MACH SCREW M3.5 8MM FLP TXP
28480 0515–1400
8
0515–0433
4
MACH SCREW M4.0 8MM TX
28480 0515–0433
5-12
21
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Figure 5-4
85101C Top Internal with CRT Display
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Figure 5-5
Ref
Desig
85101C Bottom Internal with CRT Display
Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
0515-2086
5
MACH SCREW M4.0 7MM TX
28480
0515-2086
2
0515-0377
4
MACH SCREW M3.5 10MM TX
28480
0515-0377
3
85101-60267
1
MOTHERBD/CARD CAGE ASSY
(INCLUDES FRAME CORNER STRUTS)
28480
85101-60267
4
5180-8500
1
MYLAR DISPLAY INSULATOR
28480
5180-8500
5
0515-1400
2
MACH SCREW M3.5 8MM FLP TX
28480
0515-1400
6
0515-0372
21
MACH SCREW M3.0 8MM PN TX
28480
0515-0372
5-14
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Figure 5-6
Ref
Desig
85101C Front Panel External with CRT Display
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
85101–40011
1
BEZEL SUPPORT
28480
85101–40011
2
08757-40005
1
LINE SWITCH BUTTON
28480
08757-40005
3
1460-1573
1
SPRING-EXTENSION.138-IN-OD
28480
1460-1573
4
08753-00048
1
LINE SWITCH ACTUATOR
28480
08753-00048
5
08753-00036
1
SWITCH INSULATOR
28480
08753-00036
6
5062-7208
1
SUBASSEMBLY, BEZEL
28480
5062-7208
7
0515-1402
1
SCREW MACH M3.5 8 PCPNTX
28480
0515-1402
8
0515-1402
1
SCREW MACH M3.5 8 PCPNTX
28480
0515-1402
9
08757-40012
1
SOFT YS COVER
28480
08757-40012
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-15
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Table 5-6
Ref
Desig
85101C Front Panel Internal with CRT Display
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
85101-60249
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
FRONT BEZEL AND SUBPANEL
28480
85101-60249
1
85101–20056
1
FRONT BEZEL
28480
85101–20056
2
85101–00062
1
SUB PANEL
28480
85101–00062
3
0515–1946
6
MACH SCREW M3.0 6MM TX
28480
0515–1946
4
85101–80084
1
FRONT DRESS PANEL
28480
85101–80084
5
7121–4611
1
LABEL–MADE IN USA
28480
7121–4611
6
0510–1148
3
PUSH ON RETAINER
28480
0510–1148
7
85101–60239
1
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
28480
85101–60239
8
85101–20053
1
AIR DAM
28480
85101–20053
9
3050–0105
8
WASHER FLAT .125 ID
28480
3050–0105
10
0515–0430
8
MACH SCREW M3.0 6MM TX
28480
0515–0430
11
85101–60234
1
ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR (RPG)
28480
85101–60234
12
2190–0016
2
WASHER LK INTL T3/8 IN .377ID
28480
2190–0016
13
2950–0043
2
NUT HEX DBLCHAM 3/8–32–THD
.094IN THK
00000
Order by desc.
14
3050–0180
1
TEFLON WASHER
28480
3050–0180
15
0370–3033
1
KNOB BASE 250 JG
28480
0370–3033
5-16
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Figure 5-7
85101C Front Panel Internal with CRT Display
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-17
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Table 5-7
Ref
Desig
85101C Rear Panel with CRT Display
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
5041–8821
2
STANDOFF – REAR PANEL
28480
5041–8821
2
0515–0372
3
MACH SCREW M3.0 8MM PN TX
28480
0515–0372
3
0515–1232
2
MACH SCREW M3.5 8MM PN PD
28480
0515–1232
4
0515–0892
2
MACH SCREW M3.5 12MM PN PD
28480
0515–0892
5
5021–8537
1
LOCKING FOOT, RIGHT
28480
5021–8537
6
5021–8539
1
LOCKING FOOT, LEFT
28480
5041–8539
7
85101–60241
1
REAR PANEL BOARD ASSEMBLY
28480
85101–60241
8
2190–0586
4
WASHER LK, HLCL 4.0MM
28480
2190–0586
9
0380–0643
4
STANDOFF HEX .255IN.LG 6–32
28480
0380–0643
10
2190–0584
8
WASHER, LK M3.0 NOM
28480
2190–0584
11
1251–7812
8
CONNECTOR, JACKSCREW
28480
1251–7812
12
85101–00045
1
REAR PANEL
28480
85101–00045
13
7121–4611
1
LABEL, MADE IN USA
28480
7121–4611
14
3050–1192
4
WASHER FL M3.5 NOM
28480
3050–1192
15
3160–0281
1
FINGER GUARD
28480
3160–0281
16
0515–0379
4
MACH SCREW M3.5 16MM PN TX
28480
0515–0379
17
08415–60036
1
FAN –TUBE AXIAL
28480
08415–60036
5-18
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Figure 5-8
85101C Rear Panel with CRT Display
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-19
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Figure 5-9
Ref
Desig
85101C Left and Right Sides with CRT Display
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
0515-2086
19
MACH SCREW M4.0 7MM TX
28480
0515-2086
2
0515-1400
1
MACH SCREW M3.5 8MM TX
28480
0515-1400
3
0515-1402
2
MACH SCREW M3.5 8 PCPNTX
28480
0515–1402
5-20
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Table 5-8
Ref
Desig
85101C Cabinet Parts with CRT Display
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
5062–3735
2
TOP AND BOTTOM COVER
28480
5062–3735
2
5021–5837
4
CORNER STRUT*
28480
5021–5837
3
5041–8802
1
TRIM STRIP
28480
5041–8802
4
5062–3817
1
COVER, SIDE –PERFORATED
28480
5062–3817
5
5021–8405
1
FRONT FRAME
28480
5021–8405
6
5062-3800
1
HANDLE ASSEMBLY
28480
5062–3800
7
0515–0896
8
MACH SCREW M4.O 10MM FL
PD
28480
0515–0896
8
5021–8497
2
TRIM, FRONT HANDLE
28480
5021–8497
9
5041–8821
1
STRAP HANDLE CAP, FRONT
28480
5041–8821
10
0515–1132
2
MACH SCREW M5.0 10MM FL
PD
28480
0515–1132
11
5041–8820
1
STRAP HANDLE CAP, REAR
28480
5041–8820
12
5062–3704
1
STRAP HANDLE
28480
5062–3704
13
5062–3842
1
COVER, SIDE – HANDLE
28480
5062–3842
14
5061–5806
1
REAR FRAME
28480
5061–5806
15
0515–2086
16
MACH SCREW M4.0 7MM FLP
TX
28480
0515–2086
*NOTE: corner struts are part of
motherboard/card cage assy. (part
number 85101-60267)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-21
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Figure 5-10
5-22
85101C Cabinet Parts with CRT Display
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT
Figure 5-11
Ref
Desig
8510C Cable Assemblies with CRT Display
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
W27
8120-1348
2
CABLE ASSY 18 AWG 3-CNDCT BLK-JKT
28480
8120-1348
W28
8120-3445
1
GPIB CABLE 1 METER
28480
8120-3445
W29
08510-60101
1
CBL AY IF DISPLAY
28480
08510-60101
W30
8120-2592
2
CBL AY BNC 1 METER
28480
8120-2582
W64
D1191A
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY FOR CRT DISPLAY
28480
D1191A
W65
24542G
2
CABLE, SERIAL RS-232
28480
24525G
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-23
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Table 5-9
Ref
Desig
Agilent Part
Number
85101C Top Internal with LCD
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
A2
0950–2075
1
DISC DRIVE
28480 0950–2075
A3
85101–60244
1
POST–REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 85101–60244
A3
85101–69244
POST–REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY (R–E)
28480 85101–69244
A3F1
2110–0333
1
FUSE 1.5A 125V NTD
28480 2110–0333
A3F2
2110–0425
1
FUSE 2A 125V NTD .25 X .27
28480 2110–0425
A3F3
2110–0425
1
FUSE 2A 125V NTD .25 X 2.7
28480 2110–0425
A4
NOT ASSIGNED
A5
85101–60298
1
CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY
28480 85101–60298
A6
85101–60238
1
EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 85101–60238
A6
85101–69238
EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY (R–E)
28480 85101–69238
A7
85101–60272
1
INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 85101–60272
A8
85101–60263
1
SECURITY KEY BOARD ASSEMBLY (NEW) (NO IC
SUPPLIED)
28480 85101–60263
A8IC1
85101–69273
SECURITY KEY IC, 8510C STANDARD
[8510C REVISION 6.XX-8.XX FIRMWARE]
(REBUILT– EXCHANGE ONLY)
28480 85101–69273
A8IC2
85101–69268
SECURITY KEY IC, 8510C TIME DOMAIN
OPTION 010 (REBUILT–EXCHANGE ONLY)
28480 85101–69268
A9
85101–60295
1
REAR PANEL WITH BOARD ASSEMBLY
28480 85101–60295
A10
0950-3488
1
PREREGULATOR ASSEMBLY (NEW)
28480 0950-3488
A10F1 2110–0655
1
FUSE 3.15A 250V
28480 2110–0655
A11
1
NOT ASSIGNED
A14
85101–60293
1
GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY
A15
85101-60297
1
LCD ASSEMBLY
28480 85101-60297
A16
0950-3379
1
INVERTER
28480 0950-3379
W2
85101–60254
1
RIBBON CABLE – DISK DRIVE
28480 85101–60254
W3
85101–60259
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, DISK DRIVE POWER
28480 85101–60259
W4
85101-60299
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, 14C 28 AWG
28480 85101-60299
W5
08757-60071
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER
28480 08757-60071
W6
0857-60076
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY, 34C 28 AWG
28480 0857-60076
W7
8121-0576
1
CABLE, DATA FOR LCD 31C
28480 8121-0576
W8
8121-8842
1
CABLE, INVERTER 6C
28480 8121-8842
1
0515–2086
4
MACH SCREW M4.0 7MM TX
28480 0515–2086
28480 85101–60293
2
0515–0377
4
MACH SCREW M3.5 10MM TX
28480 0515–0377
3
85101–40014
6
PC BOARD SPACER
28480 85101–40014
4
85101–20055
1
RFI GASKET, TOP
28480 85101–20055
5
0515–0372
21
MACH SCREW M3.0 8MM FLP TXP
28480 0515–0372
6
85101–00051
1
CARD CAGE COVER
28480 85101–00051
7
0515–1382
5
MACH SCREW M3.5 6 PCFLTX
28480 0515–1382
5-24
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Figure 5-12
85101C Top Internal with LCD
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-25
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Figure 5-13
Ref
Desig
85101C Bottom Internal with LCD
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
0515-2086
4
MACH SCREW M4.0 7MM TX
28480
0515-2086
2
0515-0377
4
MACH SCREW M3.5 10MM TX
28480
0515-0377
3
85101-60300
1
MOTHERBD/CARD CAGE ASSY
(INCLUDES FRAME CORNER STRUTS)
28480
85101-60300
5
0515-1382
5
MACH SCREW M3.5 6 PCFLTX
28480
0515-1382
6
0515-0372
21
MACH SCREW M3.0 8MM PN TX
28480
0515-0372
5-26
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Figure 5-14
Ref
Desig
85101C Front Panel External with LCD
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
A15
85101-60297
1
A15 LCD ASSEMBLY
28480
85101-60297
2
08757-40005
1
LINE SWITCH BUTTON
28480
08757-40005
3
1460-1573
1
SPRING-EXTENSION.138-IN-OD
28480
1460-1573
4
85101-00081
1
LINE SWITCH ACTUATOR
28480
85101-00081
5
08753-00036
1
SWITCH INSULATOR
28480
08753-00036
A1
85101-60296
1
A1 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
28480
85101-60296
6
85101-80135
1
OVERLAY-RIGHT SIDE
28480
85101-80135
7
85101-80136
1
NAME PLATE
28480
85101-80136
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-27
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Table 5-10
Ref
Desig
85101C Front Panel Internal with LCD
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
85101–20299
1
FRONT BEZEL
28480
85101–20299
2
85101–00062
1
SUB PANEL
28480
85101–00062
3
0515–1946
6
MACH SCREW M3.0 6MM TX
28480
0515–1946
4
85101–80084
1
FRONT DRESS PANEL
28480
85101–80084
5
7121–4611
1
LABEL–MADE IN USA
28480
7121–4611
6
0510–1148
3
PUSH ON RETAINER
28480
0510–1148
7
85101-60288
1
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
28480
85101–60288
8
85101–20053
1
AIR DAM
28480
85101–20053
9
3050–0105
8
WASHER FLAT .125 ID
28480
3050–0105
10
0515–0430
8
MACH SCREW M3.0 6MM TX
28480
0515–0430
11
85101–60234
1
ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR (RPG)
28480
85101–60234
12
2190–0016
2
WASHER LK INTL T3/8 IN .377ID
28480
2190–0016
13
2950–0043
2
NUT HEX DBLCHAM 3/8–32–THD
.094IN THK
00000
Order by desc.
14
3050–0180
1
TEFLON WASHER
28480
3050–0180
15
0370–3033
1
KNOB BASE 250 JG
28480
0370–3033
5-28
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Figure 5-15
85101C Front Panel Internal with LCD
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-29
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Table 5-11
Ref
Desig
85101C Rear Panel External with LCD
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Agilent Part
Number
1
5041–8821
2
STANDOFF – REAR PANEL
28480
5041–8821
2
0515–0372
3
MACH SCREW M3.0 8MM PN TX
28480
0515–0372
3
0515–1232
2
MACH SCREW M3.5 8MM PN PD
28480
0515–1232
4
0515–0892
2
MACH SCREW M3.5 12MM PN PD
28480
0515–0892
5
5021–8537
1
LOCKING FOOT, RIGHT
28480
5021–8537
6
5021–8539
1
LOCKING FOOT, LEFT
28480
5041–8539
7
85101-60290
1
REAR PANEL BOARD ASSEMBLY
28480
85101–60290
8
2190–0586
4
WASHER LK, HLCL 4.0MM
28480
2190–0586
9
0380–0643
4
STANDOFF HEX .255IN.LG 6–32
28480
0380–0643
10
2190–0584
8
WASHER, LK M3.0 NOM
28480
2190–0584
11
1251–7812
8
CONNECTOR, JACKSCREW
28480
1251–7812
12
85101–00082
1
REAR PANEL
28480
85101–00045
13
7121–4611
1
LABEL, MADE IN USA
28480
7121–4611
14
3050–1192
4
WASHER FL M3.5 NOM
28480
3050–1192
15
3160–0281
1
FINGER GUARD
28480
3160–0281
16
0515–0379
4
MACH SCREW M3.5 16MM PN TX
28480
0515–0379
17
08415–60036
1
FAN –TUBE AXIAL
28480
08415–60036
5-30
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Figure 5-16
85101C Rear Panel with LCD
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-31
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Figure 5-17
Ref
Desig
85101C Left and Right Sides with LCD Display
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
0515-2086
19
MACH SCREW M4.0 7MM TX
28480
0515-2086
2
0515-1382
1
MACH SCREW M3.5 8MM TX
28480
0515-1382
3
0515-1402
2
SCREW MACH M3.5 8 PCPNTX
28480
0515-1402
5-32
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Table 5-12
Ref
Desig
85101C Cabinet Parts with LCD
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
5062–3735
2
TOP AND BOTTOM COVER
28480
5062–3735
2
5021–5837
4
CORNER STRUT*
28480
5021–5837
3
5041–8802
1
TRIM STRIP
28480
5041–8802
4
5062–3817
1
COVER, SIDE –PERFORATED
28480
5062–3817
5
5021–8405
1
FRONT FRAME
28480
5021–8405
6
5062-3800
1
HANDLE ASSEMBLY
28480
5062–3800
7
0515–0896
8
MACH SCREW M4.O 10MM FL PD
28480
0515–0896
8
5021–8497
2
TRIM, FRONT HANDLE
28480
5021–8497
9
5041–8821
1
STRAP HANDLE CAP, FRONT
28480
5041–8821
10
0515–1132
2
MACH SCREW M5.0 10MM FL PD
28480
0515–1132
11
5041–8820
1
STRAP HANDLE CAP, REAR
28480
5041–8820
12
5062–3704
1
STRAP HANDLE
28480
5062–3704
13
5062–3842
1
COVER, SIDE – HANDLE
28480
5062–3842
14
5061-5806
1
REAR FRAME
28480
5061-5806
15
0515–2086
16
MACH SCREW M4.0 7MM FLP TX
28480
0515–2086
*NOTE: corner struts are part of
motherboard/card cage assy. (part
number 85101-60300)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-33
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Figure 5-18
5-34
85101C Cabinet Parts with LCD
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD
Figure 5-19
Ref
Desig
8510C Cable Assemblies with LCD
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
W27
8120-1348
2
CABLE ASSY 18 AWG 3-CNDCT BLK-JKT
28480
8120-1348
W28
8120-3445
1
GPIB CABLE 1 METER
28480
8120-3445
W29
08510-60101
1
CBL AY IF DISPLAY
28480
08510-60101
W30
8120-2592
2
CBL AY BNC 1 METER
28480
8120-2582
W65
24542G
2
CABLE, SERIAL RS-232
28480
24525G
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-35
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Table 5-13
Ref
Desig
Agilent Part
Number
85102 Board Location
Qty
Description
A2
NOT SHOWN (PULSE OPT ONLY)
A3
NOT SHOWN (PULSE OPT ONLY)
A4
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
28480
85102–60203
NOT SHOWN (PULSE OPT ONLY)
A5
85102–60203
A5
85102–69203
A6
85102–60006
A6
85102–69006
A7
85102–60203
A7
85102–69203
A8
85102–60008
A8
85102–69008
A9
85102–60261
A10
85102–60010
A10
85102–69010
A11
85102–60261
A12
85102–60010
1
BOARD ASSY, TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET. (NEW)
BOARD ASSY, TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET. (R–E)
1
1
1
85102–69203
BOARD ASSEMBLY, CLOCK (NEW)
28480
85102–60006
BOARD ASSEMBLY, CLOCK (R–E)
28480
85102–69006
BOARD ASSY, TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET. (NEW)
28480
85102–60203
BOARD ASSY, TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET. (R–E)
28480
85102–69203
BOARD ASSEMBLY 19.9 MHZ L.O. (NEW)
28480
85102–60008
BOARD ASSEMBLY 19.9 MHZ L.O. (R-E)
28480
85102–69008
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, B2 IF MIXER (NEW)
28480
85102–60261
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, TEST IF AMPLIFIER (NEW)
28480
85102–60010
BOARD ASSEMBLY, TEST IF AMPLIFIER (R–E)
28480
85102–69010
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, B1 IF MIXER (NEW)
28480
85102–60261
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, REF IF AMPLIFIER (NEW)
28480
85102–60010
28480
85102–69010
28480
85102–60261
28480
85102–60261
(SAME AS A10; USE PREFIX A12)
A12
85102–69010
BOARD ASSEMBLY, REF IF AMPLIFIER (R–E)
(SAME AS A10; USE PREFIX A12)
A13
85102–60261
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, A2 IF MIXER (NEW)
(SAME AS A9; USE PREFIX A13)
A14
85102–60261
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, A1 IF MIXER (NEW)
(SAME AS A9; USE PREFIX A14)
A15
85102–60015
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY REGULATOR (NEW)
28480
85102–60015
A16
85102–60235
1
REMOTE APPLICATIONS BOARD (NEW)
28480
85102–60235
A17
85102–60212
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, SAMPLE AND HOLD (NEW)
28480
85102–60212
A17
85102–69212
BOARD ASSEMBLY, SAMPLE AND HOLD (R–E)
28480
85102–69212
A18
85102–60208
A18
85102–69208
A19
85102–60019
A19
85102–69019
1
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, A/D CONVERTER (NEW)
28480
85102–60208
BOARD ASSEMBLY, A/D CONVERTER (R–E)
28480
85102–69208
BOARD ASSEMBLY, ADC CONTROL (NEW)
28480
85102–60019
BOARD ASSEMBLY, ADC CONTROL (R–E)
28480
85102–69019
85102–60234
A20
85102–60234
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY SWEEP ADC (NEW)
28480
A21
85102–60021
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, IF COUNTER (NEW)
28480
85102–60021
A21
85102–69021
BOARD ASSEMBLY, IF COUNTER (R–E)
28480
85102–69021
BOARD ASSEMBLY, PRETUNE CONTROL (NEW)
28480
85102–60272
BOARD ASSEMBLY, PRETUNE CONTROL (R–E)
28480
85102–69272
A22
85102–60272
A22
85102–69272
1
A23
85102–60240
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, MAIN PHASE LOCK (NEW)
28480
85102–60240
A24
85102–60024
1
BOARD ASSY, PROCESSOR INTERFACE (NEW)
28480
85102–60024
A24
85102–69024
BOARD ASSY, PROCESSOR INTERFACE (R–E)
28480
85102–69024
A26
85102–60273
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, RECTIFIER (NEW)
28480
85102–60273
A26
85102–69273
BOARD ASSEMBLY, RECTIFIER (R–E)
28480
85102–60273
5-36
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-20
85102 Board Location
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-37
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Table 5-14
Ref
Desig
B1
E7
E8
E9
E10
J2
Q1
Q2, Q4
Q3
W55
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
5-38
85102 Top Internal
Agilent Part
Number
08756-20073
0340–0596
0340–0596
0340–0596
0340–0596
1250–1391
1854–0679
1853–0351
1854–0611
85102–60191
0570-0111
1390–0104
1390–0281
85102–20058
85102–20059
1205–0399
2200–0113
2190–0017
2510–0138
3050–0005
3050–0139
85102–20070
08505–20133
85102–00023
85102–00022
85102–00021
85102–00020
85102–00019
85102–00018
85102–00017
85102–00053
85102–00060
85102–00029
85102–00028
2360–0115
2200-1271
85102–00037
0515–2316
2360–0334
85102–20061
85102–00040
85102–00005
85102–00006
85102–00008
85102–00009
85102–00010
85102–00011
85102–00012
85102–00013
85102–00014
85102–20163
85102–00015
Qty
1
4
1
1
2
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
4
8
4
4
4
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
36
16
1
8
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Mfr
Code
FAN ASSEMBLY
INSULATOR–XSTR THRM–CNDCT
INSULATOR–XSTR THRM–CNDCT
INSULATOR–XSTR THRM–CNDCT
INSULATOR–XSTR THRM–CNDCT
ADAPTOR TEE MFM SMB
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5885 SI TO–3 PD=200W
TRANSISTOR PNP 2N6053 SI DARL TO–3
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N6055 SI DARL TO–3
CABLE ASSEMBLY INTER CON
SM 632 .375RDSL
FASTENER–SNAP–IN GROM PANEL THKNS
FASTENER–SNAP–IN PLGR PANEL THKNS
SAFETY COVER
SAFETY COVER
HEAT SINK SGL TO–3–CS
SCREW–MACH 4–40.625–IN–LGPAN–HD–POZI
WASHER–LK HLCL NO.8 .168–IN–ID
SCREW MACH 8–32 3–IN–LG PAN–HD–POZI
WASHER–SHLDR NO.6.14–IN–ID.375–IN–OD
WASHER–FL MTLC NO.8 .172–IN–ID
MOUNT TRANSFORMER
ENCLOSURE CKT
COVER–RF MAIN PHASE LOCK
COVER–RF PRETUNE CONTROL
COVER–RF IF COUNTER
COVER–RF SWP A/D CONVERTER
COVER–RF A/D CONVERTER
COVER–A/D CONVERTER
COVER–RF SAMPLE/HOLD
COVER–RF REMOTE APPLICATIONS
GASKET–RF COVER
BRACKET
BRACKET–WIREWAY
SCREW–MACH 6–32.312–IN–LGPAN–HD–POZI
SCREW–SM 440.375ETPNTX
CLIP
SCREW–SMM3.5 6 PCPNTX
SCREW– SM 632 .312FLPD
GASKET–RF COVER
COVER–BLANK A2–3–4
COVER–RF SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR
COVER A6 CLOCK
COVER–RF 19.9 MHZ LO
COVER–RF B2 IF MIXER
COVER–TEST IF AMP
COVER–RF B1 IF MIXER
COVER–REF IF AMP
COVER–RF A2 IF MIXER
COVER–RFA1 IF MIXER
ENCLOSURE CKT
COVER–REGULATOR
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
00000
28480
00000
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
00000
28480
28480
00000
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part
Number
08756-20073
0340–0596
0340–0596
0340–0596
0340–0596
1250–1391
1854–0679
1853–0351
1854–0611
85102–60191
0570-0111
1390–0104
1390–0281
85102–20058
85102–20059
1205–0399
Order by desc.
2190–0017
Order by desc.
3050–0005
3050–0139
85102–20070
08505–20133
85102–00023
85102–00022
85102–00021
85102–00020
85102–00019
85102–00018
85102–00017
85102–00053
85102–00060
85102–00029
85102–00028
Order by desc.
2200-1271
85102–00037
Order by desc.
2360–0334
85102–20061
85102–00040
85102–00005
85102–00006
85102–00008
85102–00009
85102–00010
85102–00011
85102–00012
85102–00013
85102–00014
85102–20163
85102–00015
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-21
85102 Top Internal
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-39
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Table 5-15
Ref
Desig
85102 Cable Locations
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
W1
85102–60131
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J3–A11J3
28480
85102–60131
W2
85102–60132
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J2–A9J3
28480
85102–60132
W3
85102–60133
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J5–A14J3
28480
85102–60133
W4
85102–60134
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J4–A13J3
28480
85102–60134
W5
NOT ASSIGNED
W6
85102–60136
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J6–A5J4
28480
85102–60136
W7
85102–60137
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J5–A7J4
28480
85102–60137
W8
85102–60138
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A11J2–A10J4
28480
85102–60138
W9
85102–60139
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A9J1–A10J3
28480
85102–60139
W10
85102–60140
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A13J1–A10J2
28480
85102–60140
W11
85102–60141
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J2–A10J1
28480
85102–60141
W12
85102–60142
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A11J1–A12J4
28480
85102–60142
W13
85102–60143
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A14J1–A12J3
28480
85102–60143
W14
85102–60144
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A13J2–A12J2
28480
85102–60144
W15
85102–60145
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J1–A12J1
28480
85102–60145
W16
85102–60146
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J11–A23J2
28480
85102–60146
W17
85102–60147
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A21J3–A23J3
28480
85102–60147
W18
85102–60148
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A14J6–A21J1
28480
85102–60148
W19
85102–60149
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J7–J7
28480
85102–60149
W20
85102–60150
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A10J5–A5J3
28480
85102–60150
W21
85102–60151
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A5J1–A17J2
28480
85102–60151
W22
85102–60152
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A5J2–A17J1
28480
85102–60152
W23
85102–60153
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A12J5–A7J3
28480
85102–60153
W24
85102–60154
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A7J1–A17J4
28480
85102–60154
W25
85102–60155
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A7J2–A17J3
28480
85102–60155
W26
85102–60156
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A17J5–A18J1
28480
85102–60156
W27
85102–60157
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A19J2–J3
28480
85102–60157
W28
85102–60158
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A20J1–J5
28480
85102–60158
W29
85102–60159
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A21J4–J6
28480
85102–60159
W30
85102–60160
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A2–A11J4
28480
85102–60160
W31
85102–60161
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A3–A9J4
28480
85102–60161
W32
85102–60162
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A4–A13J4
28480
85102–60162
W33
85102–60163
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A5–A22J1
28480
85102–60163
W34
85102–60164
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A6–A23J1
28480
85102–60164
W35
85102–60165
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A7–A22J3
28480
85102–60165
W36
85102–60166
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A1–A14J4
28480
85102–60166
W37
85102–60167
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A13J6–A21J2
28480
85102–60167
W38
85102–60168
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J3–J4
28480
85102–60168
W39
85102–60169
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J4–A19J1
28480
85102–60169
W40
85102–60223
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A16J2–REAR PANEL J9
28480
85102–60223
W41
85102–60224
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A20J2–REAR PANEL J10
28480
85102–60224
W42
85102–60222
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A16J1–A23J1
28480
85102–60222
28480
85102–60174
W43
W44
5-40
NOT ASSIGNED
85102–60174
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J10–A8J1
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-22
85102 Cable Locations
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-41
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-23
Ref
Desig
Agilent Part
Number
85102 Bottom Internal
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
2200-0165
3
SCREW-MACH 4-40 .25IN-LG 82 DEG
00000
Order by desc.
2
2360-0117
2
SCREW-MACH 6-32.375-IN-LG PAN -HD-POZI
00000
Order by desc.
3
85102-00036
1
BRACKET-L REAR
28480
85102-00036
4
2360-0202
2
SCREW-MACH 6-32.625-IN-LG 100 DEG
00000
Order by desc.
5
0380-0018
2
SPACER-RND .25 IN-LG .194-IN-ID
28480
0380-0018
6
85102-00035
1
BRACKET-L FRONT
28480
85102-00035
7
2200-1272
26
SCREW-SM 440 .5 ETPNTX
28480
2200-1272
8
5021-8403
1
FRAME FRONT
28480
5021-8403
9
2200-1271
8
SCREW-SM 440.375ETPNTX
28480
2200-1271
10
0460-0778
1
TAPE INDL .75-IN-W .25-IN-T POLYU-FM
00000
Order by desc.
11
85102-00033
1
BRACKET-R FRONT
28480
85102-00033
12
85102-00034
1
BRACKET-R REAR
28480
85102-00034
13
2200-1272
8
SCREW-SM 440 .5 ETPNTX
00000
Order by desc.
14
2190-0011
8
WASHER-LK INTL T NO. 10 .195-IN-ID
28480
2190-0011
15
2680-0129
8
SCREW-MACH 10-32 .312-IN-LG
PAN-HD-POZI
00000
Order by desc.
16
85102-20053
1
COVER-SAFETY
28480
85102-20053
5-42
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-24
Ref
Desig
85102 Front
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
1
1600-1423
4
VERTICAL LOCK (FRONT)
28480
1600-0367
2
85102-80116
1
DRESS PANEL
28480
85102-80116
3
5062-3735
1
COVER TOP 18”
28480
5062-3735
4
5062-3799
2
HANDLE ASSEMBLY FRONT
28480
5062-3799
5
85102-00043
1
BOTTOM COVER
28480
85102-00043
6
5041-8801
4
FOOT-BOTTOM
28480
5041-8801
7
5062-3757
2
COVER ASSEMBLY SIDE
28480
5062-3757
8
85102-20054
1
FRONT BEZEL MACH
28480
85102-20054
W63
85102-60193
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY LINE SWITCH
28480
85102-60193
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-43
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Table 5-16
Ref
Desig
B1
E3
E4
E5
E6
E11–
18
F1
FL1
J1
J2
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
J10
W19
W27
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36
W38
W40
W41
W55
W56
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
5-44
Agilent Part
Number
08756-20073
0360–0031
0360–1632
0362–0227
0362–0227
1200–0147
2100–0002
0960–0443
1251–2197
1250–1391
1250–0870
1250–1091
1250–0870
1250–0870
1250–0083
1250–1091
1250–0870
85102–60149
85102–60157
85102–60159
85102–60160
85102–60161
85102–60162
85102–60163
85102–60164
85102–60165
85102–60166
85102–60168
85102–60223
85102–60224
85102–60191
85102–60192
2420–0001
2360–0193
0400–0010
2950–0043
7121–2380
7120–4835
3050–1094
00310–48801
1251–2942
5021–8540
0515–1402
85102–00056
0590–1251
2190–0102
3160–0300
0510–0110
2190–0006
2190–0007
2360–0205
3050–0227
85102–20057
5040–7221
0515–2317
2360–0115
5021–8538
08360–60026
85102 Rear
Qty
1
1
2
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
4
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
2
1
5
5
1
3
2
4
2
4
1
2
3
36
1
1
Description
FAN (85102B)
TERMINAL–CRIMP R–TNG #6 22–16–AWG RED
TERMINAL –SLDR LUG LK–MTG FOR–#3/8–SCR
CONNECTOR–SGL CONT SKT 1.14–MM–BSC–SZ
CONNECTOR–SGL CONT SKT 1.14–MM–BSC–SZ
INSULATOR–FLG–BSHG–NYLON
Mfr
Code
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
Mfr Part
Number
08756-20073
0360–0031
0360–1632
0362–0227
0362–0227
1200–0147
2A 250V NTD 1.25X.25 UL
LINE MODULE–FILTERED
CONNECTOR–R&P 24F
ADAPTOR TEE MFM SMB
CONNECTOR–RF BNC FEM SGL–HOLE–RR 50–OHM
CONNECTOR–RF BNC FEM SGL–HOLE–RR 50–OHM
CONNECTOR–RF BNC FEM SGL–HOLE–RR 50–OHM
CONNECTOR–RF BNC FEM SGL–HOLE–RR 50–OHM
CONNECTOR–RF BNC FEM SGL–HOLE–FR 50–OHM
CONNECTOR–RF BNC FEM SGL–HOLE–FR 50–OHM
CONNECTOR–RF BNC FEM SGL–HOLE–FR 50–OHM
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J7–J7
CABLE ASSEMBLY A19J2–J3
CABLE ASSEMBLY A21J4–J6
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A2–A11J4
CABLE ASSEMBLY JIA3–A9J4
CABLE ASSEMBLY JIA4–A13J4
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A5–A22J1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A6–A23J1
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A7–A22J3
CABLE ASSEMBLY J1A1–A1J4
CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J3–J4
CABLE ASSEMBLY A16J2–REAR PANEL J9
CABLE ASSEMBLY A20J2–REAR PANEL J10
CABLE ASSEMBLY DISPLAY INTERFACE
CABLE ASSEMBLY TEST SET INTERFACE
NUT–HEX–W/LKWR 6–32–THD .109–IN–THK
SCREW–MACH 6–32.25–IN–LG PAN–HD–POZI
GROMMET–RND– .25–IN–ID– .375–IN–GRV–OD
NUT–HEX–DBL–CHAM 3/8–32–THD .094–IN–THK
LABEL–SERIAL NUMBER
LABEL–INFORMATION .75–IN–WD2–IN–LG PPR
WASHER–FL MTLC 1/2 IN .505–IN–ID
SHOULDERED WASHER
LOCK–SUBMIN D CONN
LOCK FOOT L RT
SCREW–SMM3.5 8 PCPNTX
REAR PANEL
NUT–SPCLY 15/32–32–THD .1–IN–THK .562–WD
WASHER–LK INTL T 15/32 IN .472–IN–ID
FINGER GUARD
NUT–CAP 6–32–THD .281–IN–THK .312–A/F
WASHER–LK HLCL NO.6 141–IN–ID
WASHER–LK INTL T NO 6.141–IN–ID
SCREW–MACH 6–32.75–IN–LG PAN–HD–POZI
WASHER–FL MTLC NO.6 149–IN–ID
HEAT SINK
FOOT–REAR
SCREW–SMM3.5 12 PCPNTX
SCREW–MACH 6–32.312–IN–LG PAN–HD–POZI
LOCK FOOT L LFT
BD ASSY- FP FLT BNC
75915
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
00000
28480
28480
00000
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
28480
00000
28480
00000
28480
28480
00000
28480
28480
00000
28480
28480
28480
00000
00000
28480
28480
2100–0002
0960–0443
1251–2197
1250–1391
1250–0870
1250–1091
1250–0870
1250–0870
1250–0083
1250–1091
1250–0870
85102–60149
85102–60157
85102–60159
85102–60160
85102–60161
85102–60162
85102–60163
85102–60164
85102–60165
85102–60166
85102–60168
85102–60223
85102–60224
85102–60191
85102–60192
Order by desc.
2360–0193
0400–0010
Order by desc.
7121–2380
7120–4835
3050–1094
00310–48801
1251–2942
5021–8540
Order by desc.
85102–00056
Order by desc.
2190-0102
3160–0300
Order by desc.
2190–0006
2190–0007
Order by desc.
3050–0227
85102–20057
5040–7221
Order by desc.
Order by desc.
5021–8538
08360–60026
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-25
Ref
Desig
85102 Rear
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
0590-0663
2
NUT-HEX 4-40
28480
0590-0663
3050-0235
2
WASHER FLAT .117 IN-ID
28480
3050-0235
3050-0011
2
WASHER FLAT .130 IN-HD
28480
3050-0011
2200-0107
2
SCREW-MACH 440 .375 IN LG
PAN-HD-POZI
28480
2200-0107
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-45
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-26
Ref
Desig
E1
85102 Left and Right Internal
Agilent Part
Number
0360-0009
Qty
1
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
TERMINAL-SLDR LUG PL-MTG FOR-#6-SCR
28480
0360-0009
T1
9100-4388
1
TRANSFORMER
28480
9100-4388
W63
85102-60193
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY LINE SWITCH
28480
85102-60193
1
5021-5804
1
FRAME REAR
28480
5021-5804
2
0515-1367
20
SCREW-MACH 8-32.25-IN-LG 100 DEG
00000
Order by Desc.
3
5001-8232
1
GUSSET SIDE
28480
5001-8232
4
5021-5837
4
STRUT CORNER 18”
28480
5021-5837
5
2360-0334
6
SCREW-SM 632 .312FLPD
28480
2360-0334
6
2510-0049
4
SCREW-MACH 8-32 .5-IN-LG PAN-HD-POZI
00000
Order by Desc.
7
2360-0115
36
SCREW-MACH 6-32 .312-IN-LG PAN-HD-POZI
00000
Order by Desc.
8
2420-0002
3
NUT-HEX 6-32
00000
Order by Desc.
9
1400-0017
1
CLAMP-CABLE .312-DIA .375-WD NYL
28480
1400-0017
10
3050-0227
4
WASHER-FL MTLC NO. 6 .149-IN-ID
28480
3050-0227
11
2360-0121
3
SCREW-SM 632 .500PNPD
00000
Order by Desc.
12
1400-0757
1
CLAMP-CABLE .25-DIA 1-WD PVC
28480
1400-0757
13
5020-8896
2
FRONT HANDLE TRIM
28480
5020-8896
5-46
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-27
Ref
Desig
85102 Front Panel Board Assembly
Agilent Part
Number
A1
85102-60001
A1
85102-69001
A1A1
85102-60029
A1A1
85102-69029
1
0380-0020
2
2190-0019
3
2260-0001
4
85102-60214
Qty
1
Description
BOARD ASSEMBLY, FRONT PANEL (NEW)
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
28480
85102-60001
BOARD ASSEMBLY, FRONT PANEL (R-E)
28480
85102-69001
BOARD ASSY, FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
(NEW)
28480
85102-60029
BOARD ASSY, FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
(R-E)
28480
85102-69029
2
SPACER-RND .25-IN-LG .128-IN-ID
00000
Order by Desc.
2
WASHER-LK HLCL NO. 4. 115-IN-ID
28480
2190-0019
2
NUT-HEX-DBL-CHAM 4-40-THD
.094-IN-THK
28480
2260-0001
1
SUB PANEL
28480
85102-60214
1
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-47
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Table 5-17
Ref
Desig
85102 Motherboard (1 of 2)
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
C1
0180–3017
1
CAPACITOR–FXD .045F+75–105VDC AL
28480
0180–3017
C2
0180–0453
1
CAPACITOR–FXD 8700UF+75–100VDC AL
28480
0180–0453
C3
0180–2671
2
CAPACITOR–FXD .012F+75–100VDC AL
00853
5001232U030AC2A
C4
0180–2671
CAPACITOR–FXD .012F+75–100VDC AL
00853
5001232U030AC2A
C5
0180–1731
CAPACITOR–FXD 4.7UF±100VDC TA
56289
150D475X9050B2
C6
0180–0116
CAPACITOR–FXD 6.8UF±100VDC TA
56289
150D685X9035B2
C7
0180–1731
CAPACITOR–FXD 4.7UF±100VDC TA
56289
150D475X9050B2
C8
0180–0116
CAPACITOR–FXD 6.8UF±100VDC TA
56289
150D685X9035B2
C9
0160–4084
CAPACITOR–FXD .1UF±200VDC CER
28480
0160–4084
J1
1251–5800
1
CONNECTOR 26–PIN M POST TYPE
28480
1251–5800
J2
1251–3901
1
CONNECTOR 15–PIN M POST TYPE
28480
1251–3901
MP2
1251–5595
5
POLARIZING KEY –POST CONN
28480
1251–5595
MP4
0360–0124
3
CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN .04–IN–BSC–SZ–RND
28480
0360–0124
MP5
0360–0124
2
CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN .04–IN–BSC–SZ–RND
28480
0360–0124
MP8
2200–0105
2
SCREW–SM 440 .312PNPD
00000
Order by Desc.
MP9
1205–0421
1
HT SK TO66
28480
1205–0421
MP10
2420–0001
2
NUT HEX 6–32
28480
2420–0001
MP11
0570–0111
2
SCREW MACHINE 6–32
28480
0570–0111
Q5
1854–0072
1
TRANSISTOR NPN 2N3054 SI TO–66 PD=25W
28480
1854–0072
R1
0764–0016
2
RESISTOR 1K 5W MO TC=0±200
28480
0764–0016
R2
0764–0016
RESISTOR 1K 5W MO TC=0±200
28480
0764–0016
R3
0764–0015
R4
0764–0015
R5
0811–1672
R6
0811–1672
R7
R8
R9
0811–2048
R13
0811–1667
R15
R16
RT1
0837–0126
U1
1820–2075
RESISTOR 560 5W MO TC=0±200
28480
0764–0015
RESISTOR 3.3 PW MO TC=0±400
28480
0764–0015
RESISTOR 560 5W MO TC=0±200
75042
BWH2–3R3–J
RESISTOR 3.3 5W PW TC=0±400
75042
BWH2–3R3–J
0811–1672
RESISTOR 3.3 5W PW TC=0±400
75042
BWH2–3R3–J
0811–1672
RESISTOR 3.3 5W PW TC=0±400
75042
BWH2–3R3–J
1
RESISTOR .25 15W PW TC=0±90
91637
RH25–T2–1/4–F
1
RESISTOR 1.2 5W PW TC=0±400
75042
BWH2–1R2–J
0811–1672
RESISTOR 3.3 5W PW TC=0±400
75042
BWH2–3R3–J
0811–1672
RESISTOR 3.3 5W PW TC=0±400
75042
BWH2–3R3–J
THERMISTOR DISC 1K–OHM TC=–4.4DEG
28480
0837–0126
IC MISC TTL LS
01295
SN74LS245N
U2
1826–0061
W1–2
8151–0013
2
6
1
IC TEMP XDCR TO–52 PKG
24355
AD590KH
2
WIRE 22 1X22
28480
8151–0013
X1
1200–0639
1
SOCKET–IC 20–CONT DIP DIP–SLDR
28480
1200–0639
XA2–XA24
1251–7882
23
CONNECTOR–PC EDGE 2–ROWS
28480
1251–7882
5-48
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-28
85102 Motherboard (1 of 2)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-49
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Table 5-18
Ref
Desig
Motherboard (2 of 2)
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Description
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
A25
85102–60229
1
BOARD ASSEMBLY, MOTHER
The following parts are not supplied when
A25 is ordered:
A25C1, A25C2, A25C3, A25C4, A25Q1,
A25Q2, A25Q3, A25Q4
28480
85102–60229
MP3
0360–0124
4
CONNECTOR–SGL CONT PIN
.04–IN–BSC–SZ RND
28480
0360–0124
MP6
0360–0124
CONNECTOR–SGL CONT PIN
.04–IN–BSC–SZ RND
28480
0360–0124
5-50
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-29
85102 Motherboard (2 of 2)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-51
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Table 5-19
Ref
Desig
85102 Cabinet Parts
Agilent Part
Number
Qty
Mfr
Code
Mfr Part
Number
COVER TOP 18”
28480
5062–3735
1
5062–3735
2
5062–3757
2
COVER ASSEMBLY SIDE
28480
5062–3757
3
0515-2086
8
SCREW–SMM4.0 7 PCFLTX
28480
0515-2086
4
5021–8403
1
FRAME FRONT
28480
5021–8403
5
5041–8801
4
FOOT–BOTTOM
28480
5041–8801
6
85102–00061
1
BOTTOM COVER
28480
85102–00061
7
5062–3799
2
HANDLE ASSEMBLY FRONT
28480
5062–3799
8
0515–0396
6
SCREW–MACH 8–32.375–IN–LG 100 DEG
28480
0515–0396
9
5021–8496
2
TRIM FRONT HANDLE
28480
5021–8496
10
5041–8821
2
FOOT–REAR
28480
5041–8821
11
5001–8232
1
GUSSET SIDE
28480
5001–8232
12
5021–5837
4
STRUT CORNER 18”
28480
5021–5837
13
5021–5804
1
FRAME REAR
28480
5021–5804
5-52
1
Description
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
Figure 5-30
85102 Cabinet Parts
8510C On-Site Service Manual
5-53
Replaceable Parts
85102B Replaceable Parts
5-54
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6
Replacement Procedures
6-1
Replacement Procedures
Overview
Overview
85101C Replacement Procedures
The original 85101C Display/Processor incorporated a cathode ray tube (CRT). The current
design incorporates a liquid crystal display (LCD). Some replacement procedures may
differ depending on the display installed. In such instances, each display (CRT or LCD) is
documented separately.
8510C Equipped with a CRT Display
8510C Equipped with an LCD
Front panel (A1)*
Rotary pulse generator (RPG)
Disk drive (A2)
CRT display (A11)*
Rear panel (A9)
Preregulator (A10)
Motherboard/card cage assembly*
Front panel (A1) *
Rotary pulse generator (RPG)
Disk drive (A2)
LCD assembly (A15)*
Rear panel (A9)
Preregulator (A10)
Motherboard / card cage assembly*
* Assembly differs in 8510C models with CRT and LCD displays.
85102B Replacement Procedures
Front panel
Rectifier board (A26)
Power supply capacitors (C1, C2, C3, and C4)
Rear panel
Adjustments and Performance Tests
When an assembly is replaced, adjustments may be necessary to assure the analyzer
meets its specifications. Refer to Figure 7-3 to identify the adjustment(s) required after
replacing an assembly. In addition to any necessary adjustments, performance verification
may be needed depending on the assembly replaced.
6-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
Overview
WARNING
The ac line voltage inside the instrument can, if contacted,
produce fatal electrical shock. DISCONNECT BOTH AC POWER
CORDS FOR ALL DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES! With the ac
power cables connected to the instrument, the ac line voltage is
present on the terminals of the line power modules on the rear
panels, and the LINE power switch, whether the switch is ON or
OFF. Be aware that capacitors inside the instrument may
remain charged for 5 seconds even though the instrument has
been disconnected from its ac power source.
Table 6-1
Disassembly Tools Required
Tool
Agilent Part Number
Large Pozidrive
8710-0900
Small Pozidrive
8710-0899
Torx driver T-10
8710-1623
Torx driver T-15
8710-1622
Nut driver 1/4 in.
8720-0002
Nut driver 7/16 in.
8720-0006
Allen wrench No. 6 (1/16 in.)
5020-0289
Small flat blade screwdriver
8730-0008
Needlenose pliers
8710-0595
Conductive Loctite
0470-0573
Insulated clip leads
N/A
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-3
Replacement Procedures
Overview
This page intentionally left blank.
6-4
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
This product contains static-sensitive components. When handling these
components or assemblies, work on an anti-static surface and use a static
grounding wrist strap.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-5
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
A1 Front Panel Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Very small flat blade screwdriver
T-10 Torx screwdriver
Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-1.
To Disassemble
1. Disconnect the power cords and remove the top and right side covers.
2. For an 85101C equipped with an LCD, perform the disassembly procedure in “A15 LCD
Assembly Replacement” on page 6-16 followed by step 6 and step 7 below. For an
85101C equipped with a CRT, continue with step 3 through step 7.
3. Remove the bezel's softkey cover (item 1) by sliding your fingernail under the left edge,
near the top or bottom of the cover. Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel. If you use
another tool, take care not to scratch the glass.
4. Remove the two screws and washers (item 2) exposed by the previous step. Remove the
bezel (item 3) from the frame.
5. Remove the trim strip from the top edge of the front frame by prying under it with a flat
screwdriver.
6. Remove five screws: two from the top edge of the frame, two from the bottom edge of the
frame and one from the side edge of the frame (item 4).
To Reassemble
7. Disconnect the two ribbon cables from the motherboard by pressing down and out on
the connector locks. Disconnect the disc drive power cable from the motherboard.
Remove the front panel by pulling it straight out of the frame.
8. To install a front panel, reverse the preceding steps. Torque all screws to 113 N-cm
(10in-lb).
6-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
Figure 6-1
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-7
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
Rotary Pulse Generator (RPG) Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Very small flat blade screwdriver
7/16 in. open-end wrench or nut driver
No. 6 Allen wrench (1/16 in.)
T-10 Torx screwdriver
Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-1.
To Disassemble
1. Perform the front panel (A1) disassembly procedure.
2. Using a 1/16 in. Allen wrench, loosen the screws in the RPG knob (item 5). Pull the
knob off the RPG shaft.
3. Remove the teflon sleeve, nut and washer from the RPG shaft.
4. Disconnect the cable from the A1 J2 RPG connection (item 8) and remove the RPG from
the front panel assembly.
To Reassemble
5. Reverse steps 2 through 4. Perform step 8 of front panel (A1) replacement procedure.
6-8
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
A2 Disk Drive Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Very small flat blade screwdriver
T-10 Torx screwdriver
Needlenose pliers
Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-1.
To Disassemble
1. Perform the A1 front panel disassembly procedure.
2. Remove the two screws holding the disc drive to the front panel (item 6).
3. Remove the disc drive from the front panel assembly.
To Reassemble
4. Reverse steps 2 and 3. Torque the two screws in step 2 to 79 N-cm (7 in-lb). Perform
step 8 of A1 front panel replacement.
NOTE
If a new disk drive is being installed and it has jumpers, verify the
jumper positions (item 7) before installing. If necessary, use needlenose
pliers to move the jumpers (item 9) to their correct positions.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-9
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
A11 CRT Display Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Small Pozidrive screwdriver
Small flat blade screwdriver
T-10 Torx screwdriver
T-15 Torx screwdriver
Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-1.
To Disassemble
1. Disconnect the power cords and remove the top cover.
2. Remove the bezel’s softkey cover (item 1) by sliding your fingernail under the left edge
near the top or bottom of the cover. Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel. If you use
another tool, take care not to scratch the glass.
3. Remove the two screws and washers (item 2) exposed by the previous step. The bezel is
now free from the frame. Remove the bezel (item 3) and the gasket behind it.
Refer to Figure 6-2 for the rest of this procedure.
4. Remove the four screws (item 1) from the top of the display.
5. Remove the display cable grounding clip (item 2) from the display unit.
6. Remove 21 screws (item 7) from the card cage cover.
7. Remove the card cage cover (item 8), the RFl gasket (item 6) and the PC board spacers
(item 5).
8. Disconnect the display power cable assembly (item 3) from the display processor board.
9. Gently slide the display forward and out of the steel display enclosure.
10. Disconnect the display power cable assembly (item 3) from the display. To make the
connector inside the display more accessible, remove the top cover of the display
(2 screws).
6-10
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
To Reassemble
NOTE
Before installing a new display, remove the four screws from the rear
panel of the new display assembly. Slide off the one-piece bottom and
rear cover of the new display and discard.
11. Remove the display power cable assembly shipped with the new display unit
12. Install the display power cable assembly (item 3) used in the 85101C to the new
display unit.
13. To install a new display unit, reverse the preceding steps. When replacing the four
screws in step 4, first hand tighten them, then torque to 237 N-cm (21 in-lb). Torque all
other screws to 113 N-cm (10 in-lb).
Figure 6-2
CRT Replacement
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-11
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
A9 Rear Panel Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
T-10 Torx screwdriver
T-15 Torx screwdriver
NOTE
Old (CRT) chassis uses T-10 screwdriver. New (LCD) chassis uses a
combination of T-10 and T-15 screwdrivers.
Procedure
To Disassemble
The items shown in parenthesis refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-3.
1. Disconnect the power cords and remove the top and bottom covers.
2. Remove seven screws: two from the top edge of the frame and two from the bottom edge
of the frame (item 1); and three from the middle of the rear panel of the instrument
(item 2).
3. Slide the rear panel partway out to access the ribbon cable connections to the
motherboard.
4. Remove the ribbon cables from the motherboard and slide the rear panel out.
To Reassemble
5. Reverse the preceding steps. Torque frame screws (item 1) to 113 N-cm (10 in-lb).
Torque rear panel screws (item 2) to 79 N-cm (7 in-lb).
Figure 6-3
6-12
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
A10 Preregulator Replacement
Tools Required
T-10 Torx screwdriver
T-15 Torx screwdriver
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-2.
To Disassemble
1. Perform the rear panel (A9) disassembly procedure.
2. Disconnect the preregulator cable from the A3 post-regulator board. If necessary,
remove the 21 screws (item 7) from the card cage cover. Remove the card cage cover
(item 8), the RFI gasket (item 6), and the PC board spacers (item 5).
3. Remove the four screws in the rear frame; two on the top and two on the bottom
(item 4).
4. Pull the preregulator assembly away from the frame. Disconnect the cable harness
assembly at the J8 preregulator connection on the motherboard.
To Reassemble
5. To install a new preregulator, reverse steps 2 through 4. Torque all screws to 113 N-cm
(10 in-lb). Perform step 5 of rear panel replacement procedure.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-13
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
Motherboard/Card Cage Assembly Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Small Pozidrive screwdriver
Very small flat blade screwdriver
T-10 Torx screwdriver
T-15 Torx screwdriver
Procedure
To Disassemble
1. Disconnect the power cords and remove all handles and covers.
2. Perform the front panel (A1) disassembly procedure (which removes the LCD
assembly). If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT, perform the CRT display (A11)
disassembly procedure.
3. Perform the rear panel (A9) disassembly procedure.
4. Perform the preregulator (A10) disassembly procedure.
5. Remove all PC boards from the instrument.
6. Remove all screws from the frame of the instrument. The front and rear frame are now
free from the motherboard / card cage assembly.
To Reassemble
7. Reverse the preceding steps, torquing screws to 113 N-cm (10 in-lb).
6-14
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
This page intentionally left blank.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-15
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
A15 LCD Assembly Replacement
The LCD assembly consists of the display glass, the LCD and backlight, and the inverter
board. Refer to “LCD Assembly Details” for replacement of these parts.
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Small Pozidrive screwdriver
Very small flat blade screwdriver
T-10 Torx screwdriver
T-15 Torx screwdriver
Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-5.
To Disassemble
1. Disconnect the power cords and remove the top cover.
2. Disconnect the LCD data cable (W7) from connector J6 on the front of the A14 display
(GSP) board by pulling straight up on the cable plug.
3. On the A14 display (GSP) board, slide the two ears on connector J7 toward the front of
the instrument to release the flat flex cable (W8) from the connector. Then remove the
cable from the connector.
4. Remove the trim strip from the top edge of the front frame by prying under it with a flat
screwdriver.
5. Remove the two top screws and the two bottom screws (item 1) from the LCD assembly
side of the instrument frame.
6. While holding the LCD assembly, rotate it slightly out of the frame.
7. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the softkey keyboard on the back of the LCD assembly.
To Reassemble
8. Reverse the preceding steps. Torque all screws to 113 N-cm (10 in-lb).
6-16
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
Figure 6-4
A15 LCD Assembly Replacement
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-17
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
LCD Assembly Details
The LCD assembly consists of the display glass, the LCD and backlight, and the inverter
board. See Chapter 5 for associated part numbers.
NOTE
To avoid dust or dirt particles from getting in between the display glass
and the LCD, do not completely remove the LCD from the bezel.
Figure 6-5
LCD Assembly Details
6-18
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
Procedure
To Disassemble
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the LCD assembly. Refer to “A15 LCD Assembly Replacement.”
3. Remove the two nuts behind the softkeys that secure the sheet metal LCD retainer.
4. Tilt the sheet metal LCD retainer up before sliding tabs A and B free.
NOTE
To avoid dust or dirt particles from getting in between the display glass
and the LCD, do not completely separate the display from the bezel.
Helpful Hints
• When replacing the backlight lamp, remove the two screws holding the lamp in place on
the LCD. Tilt the LCD in the bezel just enough to allow the lamp to be replaced.
• If the inverter is replaced be sure the plastic cover is held securely in place by one of the
mounting screws.
• If the LCD is to be replaced, the complete LCD assembly should be replaced.
To Reassemble
5. Reverse the order of the disassembly procedure.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-19
Replacement Procedures
85101C Replacement Procedures
This page intentionally left blank.
6-20
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85102B Replacement Procedures
85102B Replacement Procedures
This product contains static-sensitive components. When handling these
components or assemblies, work on an anti-static surface and use a static
grounding wrist strap.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-21
Replacement Procedures
85102B Replacement Procedures
Front Panel Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Small Pozidrive screwdriver
T-15 Torx screwdriver
Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-6.
To Disassemble
1. Disconnect the power cords.
2. Remove the instrument handles. Screws are located under the plastic covers.
3. Remove the three screws from the bottom edge of the frame (item 1).
4. Remove seven screws: three from the top edge of the frame (item 2), and two each from
each side edge of the frame (item 3).
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the front panel interface board and the wires from the
transformer. The front panel is now free of the instrument.
To Reassemble
6. Reverse the above procedure to install the front panel. Torque all frame screws to 113
N-cm (10 in-lb). Torque the handle screws to 237 N-cm (21 in-lb).
Figure 6-6
6-22
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85102B Replacement Procedures
Rectifier Board Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Small Pozidrive screwdriver
Small flat blade screwdriver
1/4 in. nut driver
Insulated clip leads (2)
T-15 Torx screwdriver
WARNING
Even with the power cords disconnected, dangerous voltages
may be present on the capacitors in the instrument. Perform
the following procedure to discharge the power supply
capacitors before performing the disassembly procedure.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-23
Replacement Procedures
85102B Replacement Procedures
Capacitor Discharge Procedure
1. Disconnect the power cords and remove top and bottom covers.
Refer to Figure 6-7 for this portion of the procedure.
2. On the bottom of the instrument, remove three screws (item 2) from the plastic safety
cover. Carefully remove the cover taking care not to touch capacitor terminals (eight
large Pozidrive screws) (item 3).
3. Connect the chassis of the instrument to earth ground.
4. Discharge the capacitors one-by-one by attaching one end of an insulated clip lead to the
chassis and the other end of the clip lead to the capacitor terminal (large Pozidrive
screws) (item 3). Do this to every capacitor terminal.
Figure 6-7
6-24
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85102B Replacement Procedures
To Disassemble
Refer to Figure 6-8 for this portion of the procedure.
1. From the top side of the rectifier board, remove the two clear plastic safety covers. Pull
the top one off using the black handle. Remove the four plastic screws to remove the
lower cover.
2. Disconnect the wire harness from the rectifier board.
3. Using a 1/4 in. nut driver, remove the eight hex nuts from the rectifier board (item 1).
Refer to Figure 6-7 for the rest of this procedure.
4. Turn the instrument over. Remove the eight rectifier board screws (item 1) from the
motherboard. The rectifier board can now be removed from the instrument.
To Reassemble
5. Reverse steps 1 through 4. Hand-tighten the plastic screws in step 1. Torque all other
screws to 79 N-cm (7 in-lb).
Figure 6-8
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-25
Replacement Procedures
85102B Replacement Procedures
Power Supply Capacitor Replacement (C1, C2, C3 and C4)
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Insulated clip leads (2)
T-15 Torx screwdriver
WARNING
Even with the power cords disconnected, dangerous voltages
may be present on the capacitors in the instrument. Perform
the the following procedure to DISCHARGE THE POWER
SUPPLY CAPACITORS BEFORE PERFORMING THE
DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE.
Capacitor Discharge Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-7.
1. Disconnect the power cords and remove top and bottom covers.
2. On the bottom of the instrument, remove the three screws (item 2) from the plastic
safety cover. Carefully remove the cover taking care not to touch capacitor terminals
(eight large Pozidrive screws) (item 3).
3. Connect the chassis of the instrument to earth ground.
4. Discharge the capacitors one-by-one by attaching one end of an insulated clip lead to the
chassis and the other end of the clip lead to the capacitor terminal (large Pozidrive
screws) (item 3). Do this to every capacitor terminal.
To Disassemble
5. Remove the two screws (item 3) of the desired capacitor and remove the capacitor.
To Reassemble
6. To install a new capacitor, apply one drop of conductive Loctite to each capacitor screw
hole and install the capacitor. Torque the capacitor screws to 237 N-cm (21 in-lb).
Torque the plastic shield screws to 79 N-cm (7 in-lb).
NOTE
6-26
It is important to observe polarity when installing a capacitor. There is
a plug in the bottom of the capacitor that can be seen through a hole in
the motherboard if the capacitor is installed correctly.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Replacement Procedures
85102B Replacement Procedures
Rear Panel Replacement
Tools Required
Large Pozidrive screwdriver
Small Pozidrive screwdriver
T-15 Torx screwdriver
Procedure
The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6-9.
To Disassemble
1. Disconnect the power cords and remove all covers.
2. Remove two screws from the bottom edge of the frame (item 3), four screws from the top
edge of the frame (item 2) and two screws from the rear panel (item 4).
3. Disconnect the 14 (or 13) BNC to SMB coaxial cables leading from the rear panel to the
corresponding PC board covers inside the 85102. (Reference designators W19, W27,
W28, W30, W32, W32, W33, W34, W35, W36, W38, W40, and W41.) For additional
information on the location of specific cables, see Figure 5-22, “85102 Cable Locations.”
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the A24 processor interface board. (See item 2,
Figure 6-8.)
5. Disconnect the wire harness assembly from A25J2 on the motherboard.
6. Remove two screws (item 1) from the left side frame and disconnect the ground wires.
7. Disconnect all wires from the transformer.
8. Remove the rear panel.
To Reassemble
9. Reverse the preceding steps. Torque screws to 113 N-cm (10 in-lb).
Figure 6-9
8510C On-Site Service Manual
6-27
Replacement Procedures
Related Adjustments Procedures
Related Adjustments Procedures
When an assembly is replaced, adjustments may be necessary to assure the analyzer
meets its specifications. Use Table 7-3 to identify the adjustment(s) required after
replacing an assembly. In addition to any necessary adjustments, performance verification
may be needed depending on the assembly replaced.
6-28
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7
Adjustments
7-1
Adjustments
Overview
Overview
This chapter provides adjustment procedures for the 8510 network analyzer. These
procedures should be used (1) after replacement of a part, or (2) when performance tests
show that the specification cannot be met. Table 7-1 lists the adjustment procedures by the
order they appear in this chapter. Table 7-2 lists all adjustable components by reference
designator, name, and the function adjusted. Table 7-3 lists adjustment procedures that
interact between assemblies and lists the adjustment procedures that must be done when
an assembly is replaced or repaired.
NOTE
Allow the analyzer system to warm up for one hour before making any
adjustments.
The 85102 IF detector adjustments are semi-automated. Each adjustment procedure
requires a controller connected to the 8510 bus (labeled “GPIB” on the display/processor
rear panel). The 85102 and Test Set Service adjustments disk is also required.
The system source must be connected to the system bus to do the 85102 adjustments. A
test set is not required. Yet, if a test set is not connected, the following cautions are
displayed on the analyzer: “CAUTION: SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR” and “CAUTION: VTO
FAILURE.” Both error messages may be safely ignored.
The 85102 IF/detector adjustments are independent of one another. You only need to do the
adjustment procedure associated with the module that has been replaced.
7-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Safety Considerations
Safety Considerations
This instrument is designed according to international safety standards. However, this
manual contains information, cautions, and warnings that must be followed to insure safe
operation. Service and adjustments should be done only by qualified service personnel.
WARNING
Adjustments in this chapter are done with power supplied to
the instrument and protective covers removed. There are
voltages at many points in the instrument that can, if
contacted, cause personal injury. Adjustments should be done
only by trained service personnel.
WARNING
Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit
board in the 85101C or 85102, remove the power cord from the
rear panel.
WARNING
Capacitors inside the instrument may still contain a charge,
even if the instrument is disconnected from its source of supply.
Use a non-metallic adjustment tool whenever possible.
Equipment Required
Table 7-4 lists the equipment required for the adjustment procedures. All recommended
equipment refers to Agilent model or part numbers unless otherwise indicated. If the test
equipment recommended is not available, other equipment may be used if the performance
meets the critical specifications listed in the table. The test setup used for an adjustment
procedure is shown on the display.
Adjustment Tools
For safety reasons, Agilent recommends that a non-metallic tuning tool is used for all
adjustment procedures. Never try to force any adjustment control in the instrument. This
is especially critical when tuning variable slug-tuned inductors and variable capacitors.
NOTE
Many adjustment procedures require the use of various miscellaneous
tools and accessories. Adjustment procedures reference the tools and
accessories.
Related Adjustments
Table 7-3 lists any adjustments that interact with, or relate to, other adjustments. It is
important that adjustments listed in Table 7-3 are done in the order shown to insure that
the instrument meets its specifications.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-3
Adjustments
Safety Considerations
Resealing of Components
The steps to adjust a sealed component follow:
1. Remove the seal to adjust the component.
2. Reseal the component using a silicone rubber compound that does not contain acetic
acid.
Loading the Controller Basic Language System
Before loading the adjustments software, you must load a controller language system as
follows:
Loading Basic 2.0
1. With the controller power off, insert the 98611A Basic 2.0 system disk into either the
right or left disk drive. Switch the power on to the controller.
2. When BASIC is finished loading, remove the disk and insert the 98612A extended
BASIC 2.1 disk into the same disk drive you used to load the Basic system.
3. Type LOAD BIN "AP2-1", then press RETURN or EXECUTE or EXEC.
Loading Basic 3.0 or Higher
1. With the controller off, insert the 98613A Basic 3.0 (or higher) system disk into either
the right or left disk drive. Switch the power on to the controller.
2. When Basic is finished loading, remove the disk. Insert the Basic 3.0 (or higher) drivers
disk or the language extensions and drivers disk into the same disk drive you used to
load the BASIC system.
3. The following extension files must be loaded into the controller memory.
Drivers
Extensions
DISC
MAT, KBD
GPIB
IO, GRAPH
If you have any of the following system configurations, the following driver and/or
extension files also must be loaded:
7-4
Configuration
Driver File
Extension File
SRM
DCOMM
SRM
9885 disk drive
9885
CS80 disk drive
CS80
9122 disk drive
CS80
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Safety Considerations
To load the files, type LOAD BIN "filename" for each driver filename (and each extension
filename, if you have the double-sided language extensions and drivers disk), then press
RETURN or EXECUTE or EXEC.
4. When all the driver files are loaded, remove the disk.
If you have the double-sided language extensions and drivers disk, the procedure is
complete.
If you do not have the double-sided language extensions and drivers disk, insert the
Basic 3.0 (or higher) language extensions disk into the same disk drive.
5. Type LOAD BIN "filename" for each extension filename, then press RETURN or
EXECUTE or EXEC.
NOTE
The original 85101C display/processor incorporated a cathode ray tube
(CRT). The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display (LCD).
The first three adjustments apply only to an the 85101C equipped with
a CRT. There are no equivalent adjustment procedures for an 85101C
equipped with an LCD.
Table 7-1
Adjustment Procedures
Title
Procedure Number
Assembly Adjusted
Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments
(85101C equipped with a CRT)
1
A11
Display Degaussing (Demagnetizing)
( 85101C equipped with a CRT)
2
A11
Display Intensity Adjustments
(85101C equipped with a CRT)
3
A11
Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment (85102)
4
A20
IF Mixer Adjustment (85102)
5
A9, A11, A13, A14
IF Amplifier Adjustment (85102)
6
A10
Synchronous Detector Adjustment (85102)
7
A5, A7
Clock Adjustment (85102)
8
A6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-5
Adjustments
Safety Considerations
Table 7-2
Reference
Designator
Adjustable Components in Alpha-Numeric Order
Adjustment Name
Adjustment
Procedure
Number
Adjustment Function Number
85101 Display Processor
A11
DISPLAY VERTICAL
POSITION
1
Aligns softkey labels with softkeys
(85101C equipped with a CRT)
A11
DISPLAY FOCUS
1
Adjusts for optimum focus of display
(85101C equipped with a CRT)
A11
DISPLAY DEGAUSSING
2
Demagnetizes Display
(85101C equipped with a CRT)
A11
DISPLAY
BACKGROUND
INTENSITY
3
Sets "black level" of front panel intensity
control of display background
(85101C equipped with a CRT)
A11
DISPLAY OPERATING
DEFAULT INTENSITY
3
Sets maximum limit of front panel intensity
control (85101C equipped with a CRT)
85102 IF Detector
A5L4
X OUTPUT FILTERING
7
Minimizes higher order products from
appearing at the X-component output
A5L5
X OUTPUT FILTERING
7
Minimizes higher order products from
appearing at the X-component output
A5L6
Y OUTPUT FILTERING
7
Minimizes higher order products from
appearing at the Y-component output
A5L7
Y OUTPUT FILTERING
7
Minimizes higher order products from
appearing at the Y-component output
A6R51
CLOCK
8
Adjusts for a clock frequency of 20 MHz
A7L4
X OUTPUT FILTERING
7
Minimizes higher order products from
appearing at the X-component output
A7L5
X OUTPUT FILTERING
7
Minimizes higher order products from
appearing at the X-component output
A7L6
Y OUTPUT FILTERING
7
Minimizes higher order products from
appearing at the Y-component output
A7L7
Y OUTPUT FILTERING
7
Minimizes higher order products from
appearing at the Y-component output
A9C6
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A9C7
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A9C8
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A10L1
100KHZ TUNED FILTER
6
Tunes the filter to 100 kHz
A11C6
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A11C7
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
7-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Safety Considerations
Table 7-2
Adjustable Components in Alpha-Numeric Order
Reference
Designator
Adjustment Name
Adjustment
Procedure
Number
Adjustment Function Number
A11C8
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A12L1
100KHZ TUNED FILTER
6
Tunes the filter to 100 kHz
Al 3C6
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A13C7
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A13C8
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A14C6
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A14C7
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A14C8
20MHZ XTAL FILTER
5
Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple
A20R26
SWEEP ADC GAIN
4
Compensates for component tolerances in
the staircase generation circuit.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-7
Adjustments
Safety Considerations
Table 7-3
Related Adjustment Procedures
Assembly Replaced or Repaired
Adjustment Procedure Number, If Replaced
85101 Display/Processor
A1 Front Panel
none
A2 Disk Drive
none
A3 Post-Regulator Board
none
A4 Graphic System Processor (CRT)
1,3 (85101C equipped with a CRT display)
A5 CPU Board
1,3 (85101C equipped with a CRT display)
A6 EEPROM Board
1,3 (85101C equipped with a CRT display)
A7 Input/Output Board
none
A8 Security Key Board
none
A9 Rear Panel
none
A10 Preregulator
none
A11 Display
1, 3 (85101C equipped with a CRT display)
A14 Graphic System Processor (LCD)
none (85101C equipped with a LCD display)
A15 LCD Assembly
none (85101C equipped with a LCD display)
A16 Backlight Inverter Board
none (85101C equipped with a LCD display)
85102 IF/Detector
A1 Front Panel
none
A1A1 Front Panel Interface
none
A2-A4 (Pulse Option only)
A5 Test Synchronous Detector
7
A6 Clock
8
A7 Reference Synchronous Detector
7
A8 19.9 MHz LO
none
A9 B2 IF Mixer
5
A10 Test IF Amplifier
6
A11 B1 IF Mixer
5
A12 Reference IF Amplifier
6
A13 A2 IF Mixer
5
A14 Al IF Mixer
5
A15 Regulator
none
A16 Remote Applications
none
A17 Sample and Hold
none
A18 ADC
none
A19 ADC Control
none
A20 Sweep ADC
4
A21 IF Counter
none
A22 Pretune
none
A23 Main Phase Lock
none
A24 Interface
none
A25 Motherboard
none
A26 Rectifier
none
7-8
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Safety Considerations
Table 7-4
Test Equipment for 8510 Adjustments
Instrument
Recommended Modela
Critical Specifications
Controller
HP 9000 series 200 or 300
No substitute
Photometer
Tektronix J16 Option 2
No substitute
Photometer Probe
Tektronix J6503 Option 2
No substitute
Light Occluder
Tektronix 016-0305-00
No substitute
Degausser
Radio Shack Model 44-233
200 W input
Spectrum Analyzer
E4407B
100 kHz to 26.5 GHz
GPIB controlled
Frequency Counter
53151A Opt 001
45 MHz to 26.5 GHz
Function Generator
33250A
Fast Sweep, less than 10 msec
RF Source
8360, 8340 series
45 MHz to 20 GHz
a. Agilent model number unless otherwise indicated.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-9
Adjustments
Procedure 1. CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments
Procedure 1. CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments
These display adjustments apply only to 8510C systems equipped with a CRT display. No
display adjustments, other than those in this manual, can be done in the field (this
includes both customers and service centers). Any other adjustments to the display will
void the warranty.
Equipment
screwdriver (non-conductive) flat head
Description and Procedure
There is one vertical position adjustment and one focus adjustment. In general, these
adjustments should not be required.
Warm-up time: 30 minutes.
Vertical Adjustment
NOTE
The vertical position can be adversely affected by magnetic
interference. Before adjusting the vertical position, be sure the analyzer
is in a non-magnetic environment and the CRT is degaussed.
1. To access vertical position and focus adjustment controls, remove the side panel nearest
the display.
2. Insert a narrow, non-conductive, flat head screwdriver (at least 2 inches long) into the
vertical position hole.
3. Adjust the control for the best alignment of the softkey lable with the softkeys. See
“Service Program” in Chapter 4 for procedure to display the Softkey Label Alignment
Pattern.
Focus Adjustment
NOTE
The CRT focus can be adversely affected by the CRT intensity set too
high or by magnetic interference.
4. Use the same screwdriver used in step 3 to adjust the focus until the display has the
best readability. Look for equal width of both the horizontal and vertical segments of the
"H" character. Also check the focus in all four corners of the CRT.
7-10
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 1. CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments
Figure 7-1
Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Controls (CRT Only)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-11
Adjustments
Procedure 2. CRT Display Degaussing (Demagnetizing)
Procedure 2. CRT Display Degaussing (Demagnetizing)
Equipment
Degausser
Description and Procedure
As with all color CRT monitors, the display is very susceptible to external magnetic fields.
These fields can originate from many sources including metal frame tables and from the
earth. The usual symptom is a discoloration or slight dimming of the display (usually near
the top left corner of the CRT). In extreme cases, a total color shift may be observed; for
example, a trace that was red may shift to green. This shift does not suggest a problem
with the display; it is characteristic of color displays. If the display becomes magnetized, or
if color purity is a problem, cycle the power several times. Leave the instrument off for at
least 15 seconds before switching on the power. This will trigger the automatic degaussing
circuit in the display.
If this is insufficient to get color purity, a commercially available degausser (demagnetizer)
must be used (either a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser can be used). Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions keeping in mind the following; it is imperative when
demagnetizing the display that the degausser is not placed closer than 4 inches (10 cm)
from the face of the CRT. Generally, degaussing is done with a slow rotary motion of the
degausser, moving it in a circle of increasing radius while simultaneously moving away
form the CRT. Figure 7-2 shows the motion for degaussing the display.
CAUTION
Applying an excessively strong magnetic field to the CRT face can
permanently destroy the CRT.
Like most displays, the CRT can be sensitive to large magnetic fields generated from
unshielded motors. In countries that use 50 Hz, some 10 Hz jitter may be observed. If this
problem is observed, remove the device causing the magnetic field.
7-12
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 2. CRT Display Degaussing (Demagnetizing)
Figure 7-2
Motion for Degaussing the Display
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-13
Adjustments
Procedure 3. CRT Display Intensity Adjustments
Procedure 3. CRT Display Intensity Adjustments
Equipment
photometer
Tektronix J16 Option 2
photometer probe
Tektronix J6503 Option 2
light occluder
Tektronix 016-0305-00
Description and Procedure
There are two display intensity adjustments: background (black), and operating default. In
general, these adjustments should not be required. Yet, when either the A5 CPU, A4GSP,
A6 EEPROM, or A11 display assembly is replaced, do a visual inspection of the display. If
it appears to need adjustment, proceed with these adjustments.
NOTE
This procedure should be done with a photometer and only by qualified
service personnel.
Warm-up time: 30 minutes.
Background Intensity (Black) Adjustment
1. Remove the top cover of the analyzer.
2. In a dimly lit room (or with the analyzer CRT shaded from bright lights), press:
PRESET, SYSTEM
[MORE], (softkey 8)
[SERVICE FUNCTIONS], (softkey 8)
[TEST MENU], (softkey 1)
2, 2, =MARKER
1, =MARKER
3, =MARKER
5, =MARKER
8, 5, 1, 7, =MARKER
x1,
3. Alternating vertical bars of three different intensities are shown on the CRT. Each bar
has a number written below it (either 0, 1, or 2).
Adjust the analyzer front panel knob until the vertical bar labeled "1" is just barely
visible against the black border. Vertical bar "0" must not be visible (indistinguishable
7-14
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 3. CRT Display Intensity Adjustments
from the black border).
4. When the adjustment is complete, press =MARKER.
Operating Default Intensity Adjustment
This adjustment sets the default level of the display intensity. The analyzer normally
presets to the same intensity level that was last used. This level is stored in volatile
memory. If you switch the power on and off, the memory is lost. Then the analyzer uses the
default display intensity to ensure that the display is visible and eliminate concern that
the display may not be functioning.
The level is set using a photometer that measures the output light.
1. To start the adjustment, press =MARKER.
2. Set the photometer probe to NORMAL. Press POWER on the photometer to switch the
power on and allow 30 minutes warm-up. Zero the photometer according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. The analyzer CRT should have an all white screen.
Figure 7-3
Maximum Intensity Adjustment Setup
3. Center the photometer on the analyzer CRT as shown in Figure 7-3. Adjust the
analyzer front panel knob to the maximum (clockwise) position. If the photometer
registers greater than 100 NITs, turn the front panel knob until a reading of no more
than 100 NITs registers on the photometer.
If the photometer does not register a reading of 100 NITs, the display is faulty. Refer to
Chapter 4 , “Main Troubleshooting Procedure.”
NOTE
The intensity level is read without a display bezel installed. The glass
filter transmits 60% of the display light, therefore 100 NITs would be
60 NITs with the bezel installed.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-15
Adjustments
Procedure 4. Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment
Procedure 4. Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment
NOTE
This procedure does not work with an 8360 series source. You must use
an 8340/41/A/B.
Equipment
12" SMB assembly
M-F-M SMB tee
85102 service adjustments disk
Controller
5061-1022
1250-1391
08510-10024
HP 9000 series 200 or 300
Description and Procedure
When the 8510 system is making a swept frequency measurement, it must sample the
data at points equally spaced between the start and stop frequencies. The sweep
analog-to-digital converter (ADC) controls when to trigger the sample-and-hold amplifiers
so that the data will be taken at the correct frequencies. The A20 sweep ADC board
generates a staircase waveform that tracks the sweep voltage from the source. This
procedure adjusts the sweep ADC gain to compensate for component tolerance in the
staircase generation circuit.
1. After loading BASIC into the controller memory, insert the 85102 Service adjustments
software disk into the controller disk drive. (Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a
procedure on how to load BASIC.)
2. Type LOAD “ADJ_85102" EXECUTE.
3. When the program is loaded, press RUN.
4. Press the softkey that selects the sweep ADC adjustment.
5. Switch off the analyzer power. Configure the equipment as the controller display shows.
6. Switch on the analyzer power, but switch on the display/processor last to avoid system
"lockup."
7. When a graticule appears on the analyzer display, the instrument has finished
initializing. Press [CONTINUE] on the controller.
8. The following prompt is displayed:
ADJUST GAIN (R26) FOR 300 ±0.3mUnits
9. Refer to Figure 7-4 for the location of A20R26. Adjust A20R26 so that the mUnit shown
on the analyzer display is 300 ±0.3. (Refer to Figure 7-5.)
7-16
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 4. Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment
Figure 7-4
Location of Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-17
Adjustments
Procedure 4. Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment
Figure 7-5
Display of Sweep ADC Adjustment
10. When the adjustment is complete, press [CONTINUE] to return to the menu.
11. If you are unable to adjust A20R26 within the given specification, and the following
prompt is displayed, refer to the troubleshooting chapter:
ADC CONTROL GAIN is beyond limit press CONTINUE
12. Switch off the analyzer power and return all the equipment to the original
configuration. Be sure to reconnect all the 85102 cables in the original configuration.
7-18
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 5. IF Mixer Adjustment
Procedure 5. IF Mixer Adjustment
Equipment
Spectrum analyzer
Function generator
4-ft BNC to SMB cable assembly (2)
Adapter, male N to female BNC
85102 service adjustments disk
Controller
E4407B
33250A
5062-7230
1250-0780
08510-10024
HP 9000 series 200 or 300
Description and Procedure
The IF mixers convert the 20 MHz first IF signals from the test set to 100 kHz second IF
signals, which go to the IF amplifiers. The 20 MHz IF signals are mixed with the 19.9 MHz
signals from the 19.9 MHz LO board (A8). The 20 MHz IF signals are also buffered and
sent to the IF counter (A21). All four IF mixers are identical. In the following procedure,
the signal generator simulates the test set. The signal is fed into the mixer board while the
output of the mixer is monitored on the spectrum analyzer. The following adjustments
optimize the matching of the crystal filter to the IF thereby minimizing the test set noise
appearing at the mixer output.
1. After loading BASIC into the controller memory, insert the 85102 service adjustments
software disk into the controller disk drive. (Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a
procedure on how to load BASIC.)
2. Type LOAD “ADJ_85102" EXECUTE.
3. When the program is loaded, press RUN.
4. Press the softkey that selects the IF mixer adjustment.
5. The following prompt is displayed:
Model number of spectrum analyzer being used. Select a softkey.
6. Press the appropriate softkey.
7. Switch off the analyzer power. Configure the equipment as the controller display shows.
Make sure that the addresses of the test equipment match the addresses appearing on
the controller.
8. Switch on the analyzer power, but switch on the display/processor last to avoid system
"lockup."
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-19
Adjustments
Procedure 5. IF Mixer Adjustment
Figure 7-6
Location of the IF Mixer Adjustments
9. When a graticule appears on the analyzer display, the instrument has finished
initializing. Press [CONTINUE] on the controller.
10. The following prompt is displayed:
ADJUST XTAL FILTER 1, 2 AND 3 FOR MINIMUM RIPPLE <1/2 dB (20 kHz BW)
11. Refer to Figure 7-6 for the location of the XTAL FILTER adjustments. To get the
minimum ripple of the RF envelope seen on the spectrum analyzer, iterate XTAL
FILTER adjustments 1, 2, and 3. Adjust for minimum ripple at 100 kHz ± 10 kHz (see
Figure 7-7).
12. If you are unable to adjust the XTAL FILTER within specification, or if the following
prompt is displayed, check the equipment setup for configuration errors, or refer to the
troubleshooting chapter.
100kHz LEVEL TOO LOW (<-20 dBm)
13. When the adjustment is complete, press [CONTINUE] to return to the menu.
14. Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration.
Be sure to reconnect all the 85102 cables in the original configuration.
7-20
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 5. IF Mixer Adjustment
Figure 7-7
IF Mixer Adjustment Waveform
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-21
Adjustments
Procedure 6. IF Amplifier Adjustment
Procedure 6. IF Amplifier Adjustment
Equipment
Service extender board
85102-60030
Adapter, SMB M-M (2)
1250-0669
12-inch SMB cable assembly (2)
5061-1022
85102 service adjustments disk
08510-10024
Controller
HP 9000 series 200 or 300
Description and Procedure
The 100 kHz IF amplifiers provide port selection, switchable IF gain, and autoranging for
the 100 kHz IF signal. The 100 kHz IF mixer output is passed through a single-section
bandpass filter. The following procedure peaks the A10 and A12 IF amplifiers by adjusting
the circuit bandwidth to a center frequency of 100 kHz.
1. After loading BASIC into the controller memory, insert the 85102 service adjustments
software disk into the controller disk drive. (Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a
procedure on how to load BASIC.)
2. Type LOAD "ADJ_85102" EXECUTE
3. When the program is loaded, press RUN.
4. The following prompt is displayed:
Adjustment on which if AMPL module? Select a softkey.
5. Press the appropriate softkey.
6. Switch off the analyzer power. Remove the board (A10 or A12) from the 85102 and
install it on an extender board. Reconnect the cables, as the controller display shows,
using adapters and extra cables provided in the service kit. It is necessary only to
reconnect the cables that are noticed in the setup on the display.
7. Switch on the analyzer power, but switch on the display/processor last to avoid system
"lockup."
8. When a graticule appears on the analyzer display, the instrument has finished
initializing. Press [CONTINUE] on the controller.
7-22
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 6. IF Amplifier Adjustment
Figure 7-8
Location of IF Amplifier Adjustments
9. The following prompt is displayed:
>>>>>COARSE
ADJUST<<<<<
ADJUST L1 TO PEAK TRACE ON 8510 CRT.
10. Refer to Figure 7-8 for the location of L1. Adjust L1 so that the horizontal line on the
analyzer display is at its maximum vertical location.
11. Press [CONTINUE].
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-23
Adjustments
Procedure 6. IF Amplifier Adjustment
12. The following prompt is displayed:
>>>>>FINE ADJUST<<<<<
RE-ADJUST L1 TO PEAK TRACE ON 8510 CRT
(re-center trace with ’=marker’ key if necessary)
13. Repeat step 10. If necessary, press =MARKER on the analyzer to re-center the trace.
14. When the adjustment is complete, press [CONTINUE] on the controller to return to the
menu.
15. If either of the following prompts is displayed, check the equipment setup for
configuration errors, or refer to the troubleshooting chapter:
AMPLIFIER OUTPUT <-30 dBm TOO LOW. REPAIR BOARD OR TEST-SETUP.
or
AMPLIFIER OUTPUT >-20 dBm TOO HIGH. REPAIR BOARD OR TEST-SETUP.
16. Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration.
Be sure to tighten the screws when reinstalling the board into the mainframe; loose
screws can cause crosstalk in the instrument. Also be sure to reconnect all the 85102
cables in the original configuration.
7-24
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 7. Synchronous Detector Adjustment
Procedure 7. Synchronous Detector Adjustment
Equipment
Function generator
33250A
Service board extender
85102-60030
4 ft BNC to SMB cable assembly
5062-7230
(2) 12” SMB cable assembly
5061-1022
(2) adapter, SMB M-M
1250-0669
85102 service adjustments disk
08510-10024
Controller
HP 9000 series 200 or 300
Description and Procedure
The A5 and A7 synchronous detector assemblies provide two voltages that are equal to the
real and imaginary components of the vector representing the input signal to the sample
and hold assembly. The following procedure adjusts the two output filters of the
synchronous detector to equalize the delay through them.
1. After loading BASIC into the controller memory, insert the 85102 service adjustments
software disk into the controller disk drive. (Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a
procedure on how to load BASIC.)
2. Type LOAD "ADJ_85102" EXECUTE.
3. When the program is loaded, press RUN.
4. Press the softkey that selects the synchronous detector adjustment.
5. The following prompt is displayed:
Adjustment on which SYNC DET module? Select a softkey.
6. Press the appropriate softkey.
7. Switch off the analyzer power. Remove the board (A5 or A7) from the 85102 and install
it on the extender board. Reconnect the cables, as the controller display shows, using
adapters and extra cables provided in the service kit. It is necessary only to reconnect
the cables that are noted in the setup on the display.
8. Switch on the analyzer power, but switch on the display/processor last to avoid system
"lockup."
9. When a graticule appears on the analyzer display, the instrument has finished
initializing. Press [CONTINUE] on the controller.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-25
Adjustments
Procedure 7. Synchronous Detector Adjustment
Figure 7-9
Location of Synchronous Detector Adjustments
10. The following prompt is displayed:
CENTER THE CORES IN L4 & L5.
USING THE 8510 DISPLAY, ADJUST L6 & L7 FOR MINIMUM RIPPLE
(minimize the high frequency ripple)
THEN ADJUST L4 & L5 TO FURTHER REDUCE RIPPLE
If the following prompt is displayed, check equipment setup for configuration errors, or
refer to the troubleshooting chapter:
SIGNAL LEVEL IS TOO LOW
IT MEASURES XXX dB BUT SHOULD BE >-15 dB
CHECK SETUP OR REPAIR BOARD
7-26
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 7. Synchronous Detector Adjustment
11. Refer to Figure 7-9 for the location of L4 and L5. To center L4 and L5 adjustable
inductors, rotate each inductor fully counterclockwise (until the core is as far out as it
will go), then three turns clockwise.
CAUTION
Be careful not to rotate the inductors too far clockwise. Damage may
occur to the inductors.
12. Refer to Figure 7-9 for the location of L6 and L7. Alternately adjust L6 and L7 to get
the minimum ripple seen on the analyzer display (see Figure 7-10).
13. Alternately adjust L4 and L5 to minimize the ripple. Typically the ripple is less than
0.01 dB.
14. When the adjustment is complete, press [CONTINUE] to return to the menu.
15. Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration.
Be sure to tighten the screws when reinstalling the board into the mainframe: loose
screws can cause crosstalk in the instrument. Also be sure to reconnect the 85102
cables in the original configuration.
Figure 7-10
Synchronous Detector Adjustment Waveform
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-27
Adjustments
Procedure 8. Clock Adjustment
Procedure 8. Clock Adjustment
Equipment
Frequency counter
53151A Opt 001
4-ft BNC to SMB cable assembly
5062-7230
85102 service adjustments disk
08510-10024
Controller
HP 9000 series 200 or 300
Description and Procedure
The clock assembly generates the reference signals for the main phase-locked loop, the
19.9 MHz LO generator, and the YADC. It also provides timing and LO signals for the
100 kHz synchronous detectors, and a sinusoidal signal that is used to calibrate the
100 kHz IF system.
The 20 MHz LO oscillator is composed of an integrated circuit in a phase-locked loop whose
VCO is crystal controlled to run at 20 MHz. By adjusting R51, the free-running frequency
of the VCO can be fine tuned to 20.0 MHz. This procedure adjusts the DC voltage input to
the VCO, on the A6 clock board, to fine tune the free-running frequency to 20 MHz.
1. After loading BASIC into the controller memory, insert the 85102 service adjustments
software disk into the controller disk drive. (Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a
procedure on how to load BASIC.)
2. Type LOAD “ADJ_ 85102” EXECUTE.
3. When the program is loaded, press RUN.
4. Press the softkey that selects the clock adjustment.
NOTE
For this procedure, the frequency counter input impedance switch
maybe set to either 50 ohms or 1M ohms.
5. Switch on the analyzer power, but switch on the display/processor last to avoid system
"lockup.”
6. When a graticule appears on the analyzer display, the instrument has finished
initializing. Press [CONTINUE].
7. The following prompt is displayed:
ADJUST R51 FOR 20 MHz ±50 HZ
8. Refer to Figure 7-11 for the location of A6R51. Adjust A6R511 for a frequency counter
reading of 20 MHz ±50 Hz.
9. When the adjustment is complete, press [CONTINUE] to return to the menu.
7-28
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Adjustments
Procedure 8. Clock Adjustment
10. If either of the following prompts is displayed, refer to the troubleshooting chapter:
20 MHz FREQUENCY COUNTS
LIMIT: 20 MHz ±50 Hz; Freq Delta <10 Hz
FIRST COUNT =
XXXXXXXX
SECOND COUNT = XXXXXXXX
FREQUENCY IS OUT OF LIMIT
or
FREQUENCY UNSTABLE, COUNT 1-COUNT 2 TOO LARGE
11. Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration.
Be sure to reconnect the 85102 cables in the original configuration.
Figure 7-11
Location of Clock Adjustment
8510C On-Site Service Manual
7-29
Adjustments
Procedure 8. Clock Adjustment
7-30
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8
Performance Verification and
Specifications
8-1
Performance Verification and Specifications
Overview
This chapter describes the following topics:
• System performance
• System performance verification
• Specifications
• Software for specifications and performance verification
• How to verify system performance
• Performing system verification
• Using the software: A tutorial
• Operational check procedures
• Frequency test procedures
• Total system uncertainty test procedure
• How to run the system specifications
• Interpreting the specification and uncertainties printout
• Measurement uncertainties
• Sources of measurement errors
Generation of system measurement uncertainties
System error models
Dynamic accuracy error model
Measurement traceability
Substitution of system components
Calibration cycle
• Reference information for performance verification and specification
• Performance test record
8-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
System Performance
System Performance
The performance of a network analyzer system is attributable to the accuracy and stability
of the entire system. The accuracy of the system is dependent on the measurement error
correction. The error correction, also known as measurement calibration, is dominated by
the quality of the calibration kit devices and the device models. The stability of the
measurement calibration is dependent on the raw performance of each system component.
Individual System Components
The following characteristics and conditions of the system components affect the performance of the combined system configuration.
• Operating characteristics (source frequency accuracy, test set stability, test port cable
stability, and connector type).
• User-selected operating conditions (analyzer measurement parameter (S11, S21, S12,
S22), averaging, source sweep mode, sweep speed, and power).
• Condition and quality of the components.
Calibration Kit
The quality of the measurement calibration is dominated by the accuracy of the calibration
kit device models and how closely the actual electrical performance of the device meets the
model. Model limitations can be overcome by using a calibration method that requires a
less precise device model. For example, a TRL (thru-reflection-line) calibration method
requires less precise modeling of the devices than an open-short-load method.
Measurement calibration errors occur when the expected, or modeled, electrical
performance of the calibration standard deviates from the actual electrical performance of
the standard. The calibration kit should be periodically recertified to ensure the actual
electrical performance matches the model. Refer to the calibration kit manual for
information on how to recertify your kit.
Measurement Process
The measurement process includes the measurement of calibration and test devices. This
process encompasses connector care, the amount of flex on test port cables, the method of
measurement calibration, the way you make connections (for both the measurement
calibration and the DUT measurement), and connection repeatability. Connection quality
is typically a small component of total system measurement error when connections are
correctly made. However, poor connection quality can induce errors that significantly affect
the accuracy of the measurement.
Measurement Errors
Measurement errors prevent measured data from being a true representation of the
unknown test device. In all applications, measurement errors can influence the application
goals.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-3
Performance Verification and Specifications
System Performance
Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into three types: systematic errors
(those which are stable and repeatable), random errors (those which are random in nature
and cannot be characterized and removed), and drift errors (those associated with
temperature, humidity, pressure, or other factors related to time). Measurement errors
that remain after measurement calibration are called residual measurement errors. See
the "Measurement Calibration" chapter in the operating manual for a detailed description
of the systematic errors corrected by measurement calibration.
The measurement errors of the system are explained in relationship to error model
flowgraphs and uncertainty equations later in this chapter.
If measurement accuracy (measurement uncertainty) specifications were written for each
possible 8510 system configuration and measurement condition, several thousand
specifications would need to be generated. Therefore, the specifications/performance
verification software calculates the total measurement uncertainty of different systems.
This allows you to print out the specifications for your system configuration. Refer to “How
to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program” in this chapter to determine
the system performance of your 8510 system. To verify this calculated system performance,
refer to “How to Verify System Performance.”
Systematic Errors
These errors result from imperfections in the calibration standards, connector standards
and interface, interconnecting cables, and instrumentation. Measurement calibration can
reduce systematic errors.
Random Errors
These non-repeatable errors are due to trace noise, noise floor, cable repeatability, and
connector repeatability. They affect both transmission and reflection measurements.
Measurement calibration does not correct random errors.
Drift Errors
These errors result from frequency drift and instrumentation drift. They affect both
transmission and reflection measurements. Instrumentation drift is primarily
temperature-related. Measurement calibration does not correct drift errors.
8-4
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
System Performance Verification
System Performance Verification
Performance verification is a process that verifies that the overall system is making
measurements within the expected total measurement uncertainties. The entire system
(hardware, calibration kit, and connections) is verified using the following procedures:
• Operational checks
• Frequency tests (8340 and 8360 only)
• Total system uncertainty test
• Recommended process checks
Operational Checks Description
The first level of system performance verification is a series of recommended, but not
required, functional checks. The assessment of the system operating environment and the
functional operation of the system components help identify faulty equipment. The
procedures check the environmental temperature and humidity, the typical power out of
the analyzer measurement channels, the typical system dynamic range, and the connector
dimensions (pin depths). Test port cable stability is also tested in a subset of the
operational checks procedure.
The “Operational Check Procedures” is located later in this chapter.
Frequency Tests Description
The second level of the system performance verification is for synthesized sources only.
(The 8350 source frequency accuracy is tested during the total system uncertainty test
procedure.) The source frequency accuracy is checked across the entire sweep range in both
the swept and the CW sweep modes.
The “Frequency Test Procedures” is located later in this chapter.
Total System Uncertainty Test Description
The procedure consists of calibrating the analyzer with a calibration kit, measuring a set
of characterized devices, and comparing the resultant measured data to the data and
uncertainty limits supplied with the verification kit. The device data provided with the
verification kit has a traceable path to NIST. The total measurement uncertainty limits for
the performance verification are the sum of the factory measurement uncertainties and
the uncertainties associated with measuring the same devices on the system being
verified. The difference between the factory-measured data and the verification- measured
data must fall within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies for the total system
uncertainty test to pass. You can compare the factory system measurement uncertainty to
your system measurement uncertainty in “Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties
for the Performance Verification Devices” located later in this chapter.
The performance verification software calculates the total measurement uncertainty for
each measurement, and determines if the system being verified meets that total
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-5
Performance Verification and Specifications
System Performance Verification
uncertainty limit. The results of the performance verification can be immediately viewed
and printed.
When an 8510 system passes this test, it does not ensure the system meets all the
performance specifications. However, it does show the system being verified measures the
same devices with the same results as a factory system that was verified in a "bottoms-up"
approach.
The “Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure” is located later in this chapter.
Recommended Process Checks Description
To assure the continued correct operation of the analyzer system, the following process
checks should be done periodically.
• Recertify your calibration kit at the interval stated in your calibration kit manual (or
more often, depending on the amount of use).
• Review the connector care information summarized on the blue connector care card.
Consult a calibration kit manual for more detailed information to ensure that you are
using correct connection techniques.
• Record the system raw error terms and compare them to periodically generated lists of
the same raw error terms. By tracking the error terms, you can monitor when the
system is beginning to drift, and use the data to help troubleshoot the system. Refer to
the “Error Terms” section of Chapter 4 in this manual for information on how to
generate a list of error terms.
• Periodically measure the same device (daily, for example) and compare the current
results to the results previously measured. When the data begins to deviate greatly,
refer to Chapter 4 in this manual.
8-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Specifications
Specifications
Specifications are the limiting values of the individual system errors that describe the
system performance. This performance is different for each type of 8510 system
configuration (depending on test set, source, connector type, calibration method, and
cables). System specifications, for your system configuration, can be generated with the
performance verification/specifications software. Except for the examples in this chapter,
there are no system specifications in the manual. (Example printouts appear under the
title “Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts.”)
“Measurement Uncertainties” later in this chapter, explains the sources and types of
measurement errors and how they relate to measurement uncertainties.
To generate system specifications, follow the “How to Load the Software” and “How to Run
the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program” procedures in this chapter.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-7
Performance Verification and Specifications
Software for Performance Verification and Specifications
Software for Performance Verification and Specifications
Both the performance verification and the specifications use the same software.
The program consists of a number of menus and forms that are selected by controller
hardkeys and softkeys. The program softkeys are always labeled on the display and
correspond to the menu selections you make. When you want to change an item or move to
another selection, you can use the program softkeys or the controller arrow keys (up/down)
or the [Next] and [Previous] keys.
NOTE
Using the BASIC STOP or PAUSE keyboard keys will not reset the
program. Even pressing the keyboard BASIC RESET key will not reset
the program’s menus to their default settings. The program keeps data
in the controller memory so that you can perform other computer tasks
when paused in the middle of the program. You can then rerun the
program without having to reload files.
The program database includes error models for hardware components of the system. The
software only generates specifications and allows performance testing for system hardware
that is included in the database. For example, specifications for systems using cables other
than those available through Agilent cannot be generated because error models for them
are not contained in the data. Refer to “Substitution of System Components” located later
in this chapter.
NOTE
Specifications for a system using an 8511 frequency converter test set
can be generated using this software (refer to “Reference Information
for Performance Verification and Specifications” in this chapter).
However, the performance verification must be performed with 8511
performance verification software (shipped with 8511 frequency
converters).
NOTE
For 8510 systems that have their own system manual, refer to that
manual for performance verification instructions.
8-8
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Software for Performance Verification and Specifications
System Performance Equipment
The table below shows the equipment required to do the system performance verification
and to run the specifications/measurement uncertainties program.
Table 8-1
Equipment Requireda
• 8510C network analyzer and accessories
• test set
• sourceb
• For PC based Performance Verification
Laptop or PC running BASIC for Windows (Rev. 6.32 or greater under Windows 95/98/NT).
GPIB card for PCs (National Instruments or Hewlett-Packard)
PCMIA card for Laptops (National Instruments)
• For workstation based Performance Verification
HP 9000 200 or 300 series controller (except 9826c and 9816d) with 4 megabytes of available
memory after loading BASIC (1 megabyte memory boards are available for all 200 and 300
computers)
Other controllers include:
HP Vectra 386 with an HP 82300C BASIC language processor card
UNIX based workstation with Rocky Mountain BASIC (RMB)
Various workstations with BASIC 5.0 or higher, drivers, and language extensions disks
(uses approximately 0.6 megabytes of memory)
• 8510 Specification Performance Verification software
(08510-10033, Revision A.05.01, DOS and LIF formats)
• Compatible printer or plotter
• Cables:
test port cables (2)
coax 3.5 mm (m to f)
• Adapters:
2.4 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) for 50 GHz system)
3.5 mm (f) to BNC (m)
• 53151A Opt 001, 10 Hz to 26.5 GHz frequency counter
• Calibration kit (customer supplied)
• Verification kit (customer supplied)
Note: It is not required to have the 8510 system connected to the computer/controller
when generating specifications, or measurement uncertainties. All that is required is
the software and computer/controller. A printer is required for hardcopy output.
a. All of the equipment listed is required for performance verification.
b. 8360 source with 1 Hz resolution needed to pass performance verification.
c. Wrap around display problem.
d. Only 2.0 Mb of memory
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-9
Performance Verification and Specifications
Software for Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Load the Software
There are many ways to load BASIC, therefore the example below is one common
sequence. Refer to the manual of your computer for an exact procedure.
1. Insert the BASIC disc into the controller disc drive 0.
2. Cycle the power of the controller to activate the BASIC start up.
NOTE
You must have 3 megabytes of memory for the program to run. To check
this, type SYSTEM$(“AVAILABLE MEMORY”) RETURN.
3. After BASIC is loaded, the drive LED goes off and a "BASIC ready" prompt appears on
the controller display. Remove the disc.
4. The following binary files must be loaded into the controller memory:*
ERR
CLOCK
MAT
I/O
HP-IB
To check which binary files are already loaded in the controller memory, type:
LIST BIN RETURN
5. To load the binary files, insert the language extensions disc in the disc drive and type:
LOAD BIN "ERR" RETURN LOAD BIN “CLOCK” RETURN LOAD BIN “MAT” RETURN LOAD
BIN “I/O” RETURN
6. To load the HP-IB binary file, remove the language extensions disc and insert the
drivers disc into the disc drive and type:
LOAD BIN "HPIB"
Remove the drivers disc.
7. Type MSI":,700,0” RETURN on the controller to specify the system mass storage
device (drive ‘0’ of the disc drive).
NOTE
8-10
* This procedure is used only with older revisions of BASIC (i.e. 3.0).
BASIC 5.0 automatically loads these files.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Software for Performance Verification and Specifications
NOTE
The mass storage device must be set to the correct location for the
program to run smoothly.
8. Insert the program disk into the computer’s disk drive.
9. Set the active drive. Type MSI and enter the mass storage specifier.
10. Type LOAD "SPECS_8510" and wait for the program to be installed.
11. Type RUN to start the program.
The initial screen displays the program revision and the data revision numbers. These
numbers are also listed on the disk label. Refer to these numbers if you contact Agilent
about your software product.
12. Follow the instructions on the controller display to set the date and time. When the
correct date and time are set, type Y at the prompt.
13. The hardware configuration menu is displayed with a highlighted field around the
active selection. Use the [Next] and [Previous] keys to change the selection in the
highlighted area. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighted box to each piece of
hardware. Match the list of system hardware to your system configuration, and select
the calibration technique.
NOTE
If the test set is an 8516, the source selection must be 834X016 or
8360X016. Older 8340 sources may require modification to work with
the 8516.
NOTE
When generating specifications for 8511 systems, select no source, no
cal kit, no cables, and no verification kit. See “Reference Information for
Performance Verification and Specifications” later in this chapter.
14. To load the data files from the disc, press [Done].
15. The program presents the main menu. From here you can select one of four other
menus:
• System configuration
• System specifications
• System uncertainty
• Verify system
• A brief explanation of the menu choices follows:
[System Config] - This menu presents the choice of returning to the hardware
configuration menu or entering the software configuration menu. The software
configuration menu allows you to set the addresses of your 8510 and your
printer/plotter, or select plotter trace pens.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-11
Performance Verification and Specifications
Software for Performance Verification and Specifications
[System Specs] - In this menu you can choose several types of tables and formats for
a hard copy of both forward and reverse error terms.
[System Uncert] - This menu allows you to print or plot dynamic accuracy or total
uncertainty for your system configuration.
[Verify System] - This menu allows you to verify system performance.
If you want to verify the performance of your system, follow the next procedure. If
you want to generate system specifications, follow the procedure in “How to Run the
System Specifications and Uncertainties Program.”
Using the Keyboard or Mouse for Program Control
Use of the keyboard or mouse is supported in the software program. The list below
provides a brief overview of the different methods for controlling the cursor and modifying
values.
Cursor Keys
Use the cursor keys (arrow keys) to move the cursor up, down,
left, and right.
[Done] or SELECT
Use either the softkey or the SELECT keyboard key to complete
data entry. Always press the key to retain edited data.
HOME
Use the HOME key to page forward. Combine the SHIFT key
with the HOME key to return to previous pages.
Mouse
Use the mouse to position the cursor on a specific character or
field. Click the mouse select button to edit the data. You may
find that using the mouse is less efficient than using the cursor
keys. The sensitivity of the mouse makes it awkward to
position.
TAB
Use the keyboard tab key to move from one data entry field to
the next, or when columns are used, from one column to the
next. Combine the SHIFT key with the TAB key for
reverse-tabbing.
In Case of Difficulty
• Check that the mass storage device is specified (refer to step 7).
• Check that the BASIC revision is 3.0 or higher. 5.0 is preferred.
• Check that the controller has at least 3 megabytes of memory. Type
“SYSTEM$(“AVAILABLE MEMORY”)” RETURN.
• Check that all the required binary files are loaded in the controller memory (refer to
step 4).
• If the program is still not running correctly, cycle the power of all the instruments.
8-12
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Verify System Performance
How to Verify System Performance
The system performance verification process is summarized below:
1. Operational checks
a. Environment and device temperature check
b. User parameters check (unratioed power)
c. Inspect, clean, and gage connectors
d. Cable check
e. Dynamic range check
2. Frequency tests
a. CW frequency accuracy test
b. Swept frequency accuracy test
3. Total system uncertainty test
a. The program sets the frequency range of the 8510 system to the corresponding
frequency of the traceable verification devices.
b. The program prompts you to perform a full 2-port measurement calibration.
c. You measure the verification devices.
d. The program compares the measured data with the traceable data and uncertainty
limits supplied with the verification devices, and generates pass/fail results.
4. Defining a custom system in the software
a. The first menu that appears in version A.03.01 software is the Hardware
Configuration menu.
b. From this menu, choose the model numbers of the hardware you are using.
c. If you plan to make measurements with a custom test setup, choose model numbers
from this menu that most closely matches the capability of the equipment you are
using.
d. To calibrate a custom system, new features in the software allow you to modify
error-term parameters.
e. You can store the error-term changes in tables, compute customized specifications
from the new error terms, then use the tables for plots and system verification.
f. If you plan to use hardware configuration values listed in the Hardware
Configuration menu already, follow the “No” path in the flowchart, Figure 8-1. To
create unique specifications for a custom system, follow the “Yes” path in Figure 8-1 .
NOTE
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY. Agilent Technologies does not
warrant the performance of systems that are customized by the user.
That is, systems already customized at the factory as special systems
are warranteed; however, if you customize the system at your facility,
the performance warranty cannot be applied.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-13
Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Verify System Performance
Figure 8-1
8-14
Flowchart for Selecting to Modify Specifications
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Verify System Performance
Choosing to Edit Specifications
1. After installing the software program, press [Hardware Config] from the System Config
menu. Select hardware models that most closely match the equipment you are using.
Exact model numbers may not match, but similar capabilities (frequency range, power
range, and so forth) need to be matched as closely as possible. Selections such as no
source and no calibration kit are available if there are no similar models of equipment.
2. After completing hardware configuration and model selection, press [Done] to save the
information.
3. From the Main menu display, select [Edit Specs].
By selecting [EDIT SYST SPECS] from the Main menu, you can modify error terms for your
hardware configuration. You can use the modified data to compute custom uncertainties to
use during performance verification. Refer to “Using the Error Term Table Editor” on page
8-19 to learn how to edit specifications.
Using Customizing Features
In addition to the ability to edit error terms and compute custom specifications you can
save, recall, and label your customized information.
Using Markers on Uncertainty Plots
Markers automatically turn on when the uncertainty plot is displayed. The marker
appears on the plot as a vertical dashed line. To display the plot and use the marker
function, refer to the steps below:
1. From the Main menu, press [Syst Uncert].
2. From the plot options, choose the desired selections.
3. Press [Done] to display the graph.
4. To move the marker, use the left- or right-arrow keys.
NOTE
You can control the position of the marker with the mouse, however, it
is not recommended. The mouse's sensitivity may make it too awkward
to use.
5. Read the marker values along the bottom row of the display. The readings include the
X-axis value, and marker readouts for each frequency range.
6. Use the [Marker (ON) OFF] key to turn markers on or off.
7. Use the [Mkr Sens] key to change the marker sensitivity. You can choose a marker
sensitivity of 1, 3, or 10. The setting determines the distance the marker moves on the
graticule each time you press the left- or right-arrow key.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-15
Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Verify System Performance
Choosing User-Generated Error Terms
To select edited error terms for generating system specifications tables, refer to the steps
below:
1. Press [System Specs] in the Main menu.
2. Choose User Parameters for Table Type:.
3. Use the softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed.
4. Press [Done] to display the specifications table.
Generating Customized System Uncertainty Plots
To select edited error terms for generating system uncertainty data, refer to the steps
below:
1. Press [System Uncert] in the Main menu.
2. For Compute Using:, select User Parameters.
3. Use the softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed.
4. Press [Done] to display uncertainty plots.
Using User-Generated Specifications in System Verification
You can choose user-generated specifications for system verification. Refer to the steps
below:
1. Press [Verify System] in the Main menu.
2. Press [Select Standard].
3. Move the cursor to Verify Using: and select User Parameters.
4. Use the softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed.
5. Press [Done] to begin system verification.
Entering S-parameters of the DUT
You can edit the S-parameter values for your specific device under test. Refer to the steps
below:
1. Press [System Uncert] in the Main menu.
2. Locate the S-parameter data fields in the middle of the display. Notice the default
values of S11 = S22 = 0, and S21 =S12.
3. To enter an S11 value, press [Previous] until the asterisk beside S11 (lin) blinks
(indicating the data field is activated).
4. Use the keyboard to enter the new S11 (linear) value.
8-16
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Verify System Performance
5. Move to the next data field and press [Next] or [Previous] as needed to edit the remaining
S-parameter data fields and to enter the device length (in cm). Notice that S11 and S22
are in linear units, while S21 and S12 are in dB.
6. Press [Done] to display the DUT’s system uncertainty.
Entering User Labels or Comments on Plots
If desired, use the features in this software to enter your own titles or comments on plots.
The label you enter appears on the 3rd or 4th line of the title at the top of the plot.
1. Press [System Uncert] in the Main menu.
2. Move to User Label 1 and press [Previous] until the asterisk in the data field blinks.
3. From the keyboard, enter the label or title you want to appear on the output.
4. If desired, repeat the above two steps to enter User Label 2.
5. Press [Done] when you are finished entering user labels to display the plot.
Entering User Labels or Comments System Verification Reports
If desired, use the features in this software to enter your own titles or comments on system
verification reports. The comment you enter appears on the test record for the selected
verification kit device.
1. Press [Verify System] in the Main menu.
2. Press [Select Standard].
3. Move to the Comment selection at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press [Previous] until the asterisk in the data field blinks.
5. From the keyboard, enter a one-line comment that you want to appear on the system
verification report.
6. If desired, repeat the above two steps to enter a second comment line.
7. Press [Done] when you are finished entering comments.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-17
Performance Verification and Specifications
Performing System Verification
Performing System Verification
After configuring the system, decide whether you want to choose user generated specs or
software defined uncertainties. Select [Verify System] in the Main menu. In this menu, you
can start the 8510C system verification using either the defined system specifications or
custom specifications calculated from edited error term values. To choose the desired
specifications for system verification, follow the steps below:
1. Press [Select Standard].
2. Go to Verify Using.
3. Select either Specifications for defined values or User Parameters to use the customized
specifications.
For additional information on performing system verification, refer to the “Total System
Uncertainty Test Description” later in this chapter.
Changing Error Term Values
Before you start editing the error terms, determine the characteristics of the equipment in
your system that are not already defined in the software. As an example, you may plan to
use a calibration kit that is manufactured by a company other than Agilent. You need to
determine the directivity of the load in this kit. You may want to use custom cables; if so,
you need to know the loss factor. You also need to know which error terms to edit and what
values to enter for the error terms changed.
Refer to the 8510 System Uncorrected and Corrected Error flowgraphs at the end of this
chapter. Review the error term labels and locations. You need to understand which error
term gets modified with respect to the unique components within your system setup. In the
Uncorrected Error Model flowgraph, the device-under-test is identified with the labels S11,
S21, S22, and S12 and is in the center of the graph. You can use the location of the device
in this illustration to help you determine which error term to change.
In there are examples to help you understand how to change error terms for some typically
used hardware modifications.
Handling Customized Error Terms
The information you need to understand about customized error terms is explained in this
section. The topics are listed below:
• Using the error term table editor
• Saving edited error term values
• Recalling a custom error term table file
8-18
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Performing System Verification
Using the Error Term Table Editor
To display an error term table for editing, select [Edit Specs] in the Main menu.
Refer to the Error Model flowgraphs at the end of this chapter. Find the error term of
interest on the figure. The figure can help you determine the relative, physical location of
the error term in your system configuration.
Refer to the steps below to edit the values:
1. Locate the error term in the displayed table that represents the error term of the
hardware change.
2. Use the mouse, arrow keys, or TAB key to position the cursor at the term that needs to
be edited.
3. Use the number keys to enter the values.
4. Continue editing error terms until your system or device is defined.
5. Press [Done] when you have finished editing error terms.
6. At the prompt Re-compute effective terms from raw terms?, respond with Yes.
The function of the Edit Specs menu keys are described below:
[Undo Term]
Use this key to restore all values of the currently highlighted error
term to the value listed just prior to your most recent change. If
you have changed an error term, then changed it again, but you
want to restore the value to your first change, press [Undo Term].
Use [Reset All] only if you want to use the software’s predefined
error terms.
[Undo All]
Use this key to restore the values of all the error terms to the
previous change. As with [Undo Term], this key changes all the
error terms of the table to previously changed values. Use
[Reset All] only if you want to use the software’s predefined error
terms.
[Reset Term]
Use this key to restore the value of the currently highlighted error
term to the software’s predefined error term values.
[Save Eterms]
Use this key to save the edited error term table under a file name
you specify.
[Recall Eterms]
Use this key to display a data field for you to enter the name of an
error term table file to recall. You need to press [Next] or [Previous]
until the asterisk flashes before entering a filename.
[Done]
Use this key when you have finished editing the error term table.
New uncertainties are computed based on the error terms.
[Prior Menu]
Use this key to return to a previous menu.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-19
Performance Verification and Specifications
Performing System Verification
Saving Edited Error Term Values
Use the new features in the software to save your specific error terms in a user-parameters
file. Use the following steps to save customized error terms.
The original data files are isolated from changes made to the error term tables for your
specific system. As a result, you can choose to use standard error terms, or your customized
values.
1. After editing error term tables, press the [Done] key to save edited terms.
2. From the Main menu, press [Edit Specs], [Save Eterms].
3. Enter a file name and directory, if needed, for the new data in the space provided.
NOTE
To enter a file name, press [Next] or [Previous] until the blinking
asterisk* appears beside the blank input field. The blinking asterisk
indicates that you can edit the current field. The program allows you to
choose a previously entered file name or type in a new one. Use the
[Next] and [Previous] keys to select another file name.
Recalling a Custom Error Term File
After saving the custom file to disk, you can recall it for use whenever the system you plan
to use matches your current hardware configuration.
To recall a customized error term table file, use the steps below:
1. From the Main menu, press [Edit Specs], [Recall Eterms].
2. Edit the file name and directory if necessary.
3. Press [Done] to retrieve the file.
At this point, the user can make any of the following choices:
• Edit more specifications.
• Return to the Main menu and choose [System Specs], [System Uncertainty], or
[Verify System].
To use edited specifications, you need to select user parameters. The user parameters are
available within the following menus:
• In the [System Specs] menu, for table type, choose User Parameters.
• In the menu under Compute Using, select User Parameters.
• In the [Verify System] menu, press [Select Standard], then select Verify Using: User
Parameters.
8-20
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Using the Software: A Tutorial
The tutorial chapter is intended to help you get comfortable using features of the software.
The features allow you to create your own equipment specifications for a calibration test
setup. Additional marker features simplify determining the results of these customized
setups. Answers to the questions are provided in tables at the end.
• Selecting the hardware for an 8510SX system
• Examining error term tables, exercise 1
• Computing uncertainty curves, exercise 2
• Editing specifications, exercise 3
• Answers to tutorial questions
Selecting the Hardware for an 8510SX System
After loading the software (as directed in the section following the flowchart, Figure 8-1),
the first selection menu that appears is the Hardware Configuration menu. For this
tutorial, select the following equipment:
✓ 8510C network analyzer
✓ 8515A test set
✓ 83631A synthesized source
✓ 85052C 3.5 mm TRL cal kit (choose TRL calibration)
✓ 85131F 3.5 mm test port cable set
✓ 85053B 3.5 mm verification kit
Examining Error Term Tables, Exercise 1
Select [System Specs] from the Main menu. Review the following descriptions to learn
more about a few of the menu selections.
Output Table
You can look at the residual errors with correction on, the test port
errors with correction off, the test set channel (B1, B2, A1, A2) errors
with correction off, or All Tables.
Table Type
Choose Specification, Data Sheet, or User Parameter values.
Data sheet values are published in Agilent's technical literature.
The values do not include effects due to cable stability or system drift
errors.
Specification values are used during system verification.
User parameter values are tables which have been modified by the
user with the [Edit Specs] function.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-21
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
To examine the error terms tables, select All Tables. You see displayed both the effective
(corrected) and raw (uncorrected) error terms. Refer to Table 8-2 at the end of this section
for answers to the questions below:
1. Which effective error term would dominate when you measure the following?
a. A very good 50W termination?
b. A short circuit?
c. An amplifier with 10 dB of gain?
d. The isolation of a switch?
2. What is the raw directivity at 26.5 GHz?
How does it compare to the data sheet?
3. What is the difference between system and receiver dynamic range?
Computing Uncertainty Curves, Exercise 2
Select [System Uncert] from the Main menu. Review the following descriptions to learn
more about a few of the menu selections.
Parameter
Select the appropriate s-parameter.
Format
Choose magnitude or phase.
Uncertainty Limit Selection applies only to transmission measurements where:
Compute
•
The "Upper Limit" is 20×log (1 + error).
•
The "Lower Limit" is 20×log (1 − error).
•
The lower limit always produces the larger uncertainty value.
Choose from the worst-case uncertainty, RSS uncertainty, dynamic
range, or test-port power levels.
• RSS uncertainties are calculated with the RSS of all systematic errors,
but the 3-sigma values of random errors are still used for 99.7%
certainty.
• Dynamic accuracy shows the worst-case uncertainty due to IF residuals
and detector inaccuracies, without the effects of noise, frequency
response, directivity, port match, cross-talk, and connector
repeatability.
Compute Using
The uncertainty may be computed using Specification, Data Sheet,
or User Parameter (user modified) values.
The specific s-parameters and electrical length of the DUT can also be entered. This is
important for determining the phase uncertainty of 8350B sweeper-based systems.
8-22
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Look at the worst-case uncertainty curves (data sheet) for S11 and S21 magnitude and
phase. Notice that you can generate read-out values on the display with the vertical
"marker." Instructions about using the marker are in the section following “Using Markers
on Uncertainty Plots.” Refer to Table 8-3 for answers to the questions.
1. On the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve (at 26.5 GHz), do the following:
• Estimate effective directivity.
• Compare the estimate with the data sheet value.
2. On the S21 magnitude uncertainty curve (at 26.5 GHz), do the following:
• Estimate system dynamic range.
• Compare the estimate with the data sheet value.
3. Compare the S11 and S21 phase uncertainty curves.
Editing Specifications, Exercise 3
The exercises in this section present typical examples of customizing a test setup. Each
exercise presents a task, followed with a related question. The answers to the questions
are in tables located at the end of the chapter. You are referred to the specific table number
for the exercise you are doing.
Each exercise presents a different aspect of changing error terms for customizing
specifications. The exercises do not need to be completed in any particular order.
✓ Exercise 3a shows you how to modify error terms for a custom system.
✓ Exercise 3b shows you how to modify error terms for a custom test set.
✓ Exercise 3c shows you how to edit error terms for custom cables in a test setup.
✓ Exercise 3d shows you how to edit error terms to calculate uncertainties for measuring
a non-ideal test device.
Select [Edit Specs] from the Main menu. This selection allows you to edit the system
specifications tables. You can change power levels, averaging factors, or error terms. After
you finish editing, the software prompts you to recompute the effective terms that are
calculated by the program (crosstalk, noise on trace, noise floor, power ref, power max, and
power min).
Review the modify/edit key descriptions of the menu selections in “Handling Customized
Error Terms” in this section.
Using a Custom Calibration Kit, Exercise 3a
You have purchased a 3.5 mm broadband load calibration kit from another manufacturer.
You want to use this kit on an 8510SX system to make reflection measurements at
26.5 GHz. The known return loss of a broadband load at 26.5 GHz is 35 dB. There is a
+2º phase error on both the open and short terminations.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-23
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
These factors require that you change the following error terms to the values listed:
✓ Effective directivity of −35 dB
✓ Port match of −35 dB
✓ Reflection tracking of 0.024
TIP
In the hardware configuration menu, select the 85052D calibration kit
and edit the effective terms. Remember to select User Parameters when
generating the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve.
❏ Task: Generate an S11 magnitude uncertainty curve for this measurement.
❏ Question: How can you verify that the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve is correct?
Answers are provided in Table 8-4.
Using a Special Test Set, Exercise 3b
You want to compute the S21 uncertainty at 26.5 GHz for a customized high-power
measurement setup using the same 8511A. A block diagram of the setup is shown in
Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2
8-24
Equipment Setup Block Diagram
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
For the hardware configuration, choose the following:
✓ 8511A test set
✓ No source
✓ No calibration kit
✓ No cables
✓ No verification kit
Use the broad band-load calibration method. Assume the following:
Effective directivity of −30 dB
Reflection tracking of 0.011
Source match of −25 dB
Load match of −30 dB
❏ Task: Plot the S21 magnitude uncertainty uppercase uncertainty.
❏ Question: What is the difference between this result and the lowercase uncertainty?
Refer to Table 8-6 for the answer.
TIP
Modify the effective terms and the raw-loss terms. Don’t forget to select
[User Parameters] when you start generating the S21 magnitude
uncertainty curves.
Using Non-Standard Test Cables, Exercise 3c
You are using a pair of non-standard 3.5 mm flexible cables. You want to approximate the
measurement uncertainty for an 8510SX system over the system’s entire frequency range.
While you cannot guarantee the results, you can change certain error terms to provide
satisfactory results.
❏ Question: Assuming you have specified “No Cables” in the Hardware Configuration
menu, which error terms do you need to degrade to account for this cable? Refer to
Table 8-7 for answers.
TIP
Consider how the cables impact your measurements.
The cable's known worst-case loss is 1.85 dB at 16 GHz and 0.25 dB at 45 MHz. You can
determine the RF cable loss by assuming that, similar to Agilent cables, the total loss on
these cables has a constant dc-loss component and an RF-loss component that varies with
the square root of the frequency (in GHz).
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-25
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
The error term is "Loss/sqrt (F-GHz) port 1, 2 cable." Use the following formula to calculate
the error term (assuming F 1 >F2):
Loss1 – Loss2
-----------------------------------------------------F 1 ( GHz ) – F 2 ( GHz )
❏ Question: What is the value of this error term for the cables described above?
❏ Question: Which transmission and reflection tests do you perform to determine the
stability of the non-standard cables? Refer to the 8510C On-Site Service Manual as
needed.
While you are working on the system, you perform a 2-port calibration. Then, you connect
the cables together and store the transmission measurement in memory. Next, you bend
the connected cables by the same amount that the cables are bent during a measurement.
Looking at S21/M (data/memory), you find the cable’s transmission magnitude
repeatability to as indicated below:
±0.02 dB, for frequency range ending at 2 GHz
±0.03 dB, for frequency range ending at 8 GHz
±0.04 dB, for frequency range ending at 20 GHz
±0.06 dB, for frequency range ending at 26 GHz
The S21/M phase measurements showed ±0.1º around 0º at 1 GHz.
You find the cable's reflection magnitude stability, Crm, to be the following values:
−45 dB at 2 GHz
−41 dB at 8 GHz
−35 dB at 20 GHz
−31 dB at 26 GHz
❏ Question: What are the new values for the following error terms? Refer to Table 8-8 to
verify answers.
Port 1: Ld1c, Lf1c, Crm1, Ctm1, Cpf1
Port 2: Ld2c, Lf2c, Crm2, Ctm2, Cpf2
❏ Task: Knowing the information above, press [Edit Specs]. Enter the new values for the
above error terms. Use the [Next] and [Tab] keys to edit values.
a. Enter the error terms Lf1c, Lf2c, Cpf1, and Cpf2 as constants over the software's
frequency breakpoints. At any frequency, you can calculate the actual total RF loss with
the following equation (where x = 1 or 2, depending on the port used):
Ldxc + Lfxc × ( frequency in GHz )
8-26
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
b. Use the following equation to determine the phase stability:
Ctmx + Cpfx × ( frequency in GHz )
After allowing the software to recompute the uncertainties, look at the uncertainty
curves. How do they compare with a system that uses Agilent 85131F cables?
TIP
Remember to select User Parameters when generating the uncertainty
curves for the non-standard cables.
Using a Non-Ideal Test Device, Exercise 3d
You want to determine the measurement uncertainties for a 20 dB fixed attenuator. You
want to use this attenuator to make a measurement over the frequency range of 45 MHz to
26.5 GHz. The attenuator has a worst case SWR of 1.25. The device length is about 3 cm.
Refer to Table 8-9 for the answers.
To determine the attenuator uncertainties, use the following 3.5 mm 8510 system:
✓ 8510C network analyzer
✓ 8515A test set
✓ 83631A synthesized source
✓ 85052B calibration kit (choose a sliding load calibration)
✓ 85131B/D cables
✓ 85053B verification kit
❏ Task: Generate the worst-case uncertainty specifications for an S21 magnitude
measurement, using the lower limits.
❏ Question: What are the measurement uncertainties in each frequency range for the
attenuator measurement?
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-27
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Answers to Tutorial Questions
Exercise questions from the tutorials are repeated in the first column of the tables.
Answers are stated in the column to the right of the question.
Table 8-2
Examining Error Term Tables, Exercise 1 Answers
Questions
Answers
1. Which effective error term would dominate
when you measure the following:
The dominant error terms are:
2. For a good 500W termination?
The directivity term.
3. For a short circuit?
The source match term.
4. For an amplifier with 10 dB of gain?
The load match term.
5. For switch isolation?
The crosstalk term.
6. What is the raw directivity at 26.5 GHz?
The value should be about −27 dB.
How does this value compare with the data
sheet value?
7. What is the difference between “system”
and “receiver” dynamic range?
The raw directivity at 26.5 GHz on the data
sheet is −27 dB.
Notice that in the first table (Residual Errors Correction On), there are two values for
effective dynamic range. One refers to the
system dynamic range, while the other refers to
the receiver dynamic range. These terms are
defined below:
a. System dynamic range =P_ref_−P_min_
b. Receiver dynamic range = P_max_−P_min_
Pref is the nominal or reference power at the test
port.
Pmin is the minimum power that can be
measured above the noise floor.
Pmax is the maximum power that can be applied
to port 2 before 0.1 dB compression.
8-28
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Table 8-3
Computing Uncertainty Curves, Exercise 2 Answers
Questions
Answers
1. On the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve
(at 26.5 GHz), what is the estimated
effective directivity?
The value is 0.004 linear, which is equivalent to
−48 dB. To estimate the effective directivity, look
for the uncertainty when S11 = 0 (a perfect
load).
How does the estimated value compare with
the data sheet value?
−48 dB is close to the data sheet value of 50 dB.
2. On the S21 magnitude uncertainty curve
(at 26.5 GHz), what is the estimated
system dynamic range?
The estimated value is around 68 dB or 70 dB,
depending upon how you read the graph. To
estimate the dynamic range, look on the S21
uncertainty curve. The curve shows S21 in dB
from reference power. Find where the
uncertainty becomes too large.
Too large can be considered to be >6 dB
uncertainty (estimated dynamic range about
68 dB), where the noise power equals the signal
power, or >10 dB uncertainty, which is off the
graph, corresponding to 70 dB dynamic range.
Does the value correspond with the data
sheet?
The data sheet value of 74 dB corresponds with
the estimated value.
3. Compare the S11 and S21 phase
uncertainty curves with the data sheet.
Why are they different?
The data sheet values for these curves do not
include the effects of cable stability and system
drift errors.
Table 8-4
Using a Custom Calibration Kit, Exercise 3a Answers
Questions
Answers
1. How can you verify that the S11 magnitude
uncertainty curve is correct?
At S11 = 0, the value for the 26.5 GHz curve
should be about −35 dB, or 0.0178 linear, since
that is the of return loss of the load.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-29
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Table 8-5
Error Terms to Modify for Generating Uncertainty Curves
Error Term
Value
Power of source
10 dB
Effective directivity
−30 dB
Effective reflection tracking
0.011 dB
Effective source match
−25 dB
Effective load match
−30 dB
Effective power ref (out) port 1
40 dBm
Loss/dc source to port 1
30 dB
Loss/dc port 1 to B1
−50 dB
Loss/dc port 2 to B2
−80 dB
Loss/dc source to A1
−50 dB
Table 8-6
Using a Special Test Set, Exercise 3b Answers
Error Term
Value
1. What is the difference between the S21
upper-case magnitude uncertainty and the
lower-case uncertainty?
As expected, the lower-case uncertainty is larger
than the upper-case uncertainty. The plots for
both the upper- and lower-case uncertainty are
shown in Figure 8-3 and Figure 8-4.
8-30
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Figure 8-3
S21 Magnitude Upper-Case Uncertainty, User Parameters & for
Special Test Set
Figure 8-4
S21 Magnitude Lower-Case Uncertainty, User Parameters & for
Special Test Set
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-31
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Table 8-7
Using Non-Standard Test Cables, Exercise 3c Answers
Questions
Answers
Assuming you have specified No Cables in the
Hardware Configuration menu, which error
terms do you need to degrade to account for
these cables?
Cable loss, dc and RF. Reflection and
transmission repeatability.
What is the calculated worst-case loss of the
custom cables?
0.4 dB should be the calculated loss error term
result.
Which reflection and transmission test should
you perform to determine the stability of the
non-standard cables?
For transmission stability: Connect the cables
together and measure S21. Look at S21/M, then
bend the cables.
For reflection stability: Connect the short to port
1 cable and measure S11. Look at S11/M, then
bend the cables. Repeat the reflection
measurement on port 2 cable and measure S22.
Table 8-8
Error Term Values Needed for This Custom Cable
Question
Port 1
ETerm
Port 2
ETerm
2.0 GHz
8.0 GHz
20 GHz
26.5 GHz
What are the new
calculated values for
port 1 and port 2
error terms?
Ld1c
Ld2c
−0.25 dB
−0.25 dB
−0.25 dB
−0.25 dB
Lf1c
Lf2c
−0.40 dB
−0.40 dB
−0.40 dB
−0.40 dB
Crm1
Crm2
−45.0 dB
−41.0 dB
−35.0 dB
−31.0 dB
Ctm1
Ctm2
0.02 dB
0.03 dB
0.04 dB
0.06 dB
Cpf1
Cpf2
0.10 dB
0.10 dB
0.10 dB
0.10 dB
Review the graph of the new error terms in the figures that follow. The uncertainties are
higher for the system using non-standard cables than for the system using HP/Agilent
85131F cables. See Figure 8-5 and Figure 8-6.
8-32
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Figure 8-5
S21 Magnitude Uncertainty Using Custom Cables
Figure 8-6
S21 Magnitude Uncertainty Using 85131F Cables
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-33
Performance Verification and Specifications
Using the Software: A Tutorial
Table 8-9
Using Non-Ideal Test Device, Exercise 3d Answers
Questions
Answers
What are the measurement
uncertainties for each frequency
range in the attenuator
measurement?
a. After setting up the hardware configuration for the
non-ideal test device, go to the Main menu and press
the [System Uncert] key.
b. Select a plot for S21 magnitude, Lower Limit,
Worst-Case Uncertainty, and Computed Using =
Specifications.
c. Notice that by default, the program assumes an "ideal"
test device which has S21 = S12, with no reflection from
either the input or output ports.
d. Next, move to the space for entering S11 and press
[Previous] until the asterisk blinks. Type in S11 = 0.11,
the linear value (from SWR = 1.25).
e. Go to S21, press [Previous] until the asterisk blinks.
Type in −20 dB for S21.
f. Go to S12, press [Previous] until the asterisk blinks.
Type in S12 = −20 dB.
g. Go to S22, press [Previous] until the asterisk blinks.
Type in S22 = 0.11, the linear value.
h. Enter the device length as 3 cm.
i. Press [Done] to display the uncertainty plot. Use the
marker to read the uncertainty values when S21 is
−20 dB.
Using the marker, what are the
uncertainty values when S21 is
−20 dB for the different frequency
ranges?
at 0.045 GHz to 2 GHz 0.065 dB uncertainty
at 2.0 GHz to 8.0 GHz 0.077 dB uncertainty
at 8.0 GHz to 20 GHz 0.111 dB uncertainty
at 20 GHz to 26.5 GHz 0.129 dB uncertainty
8-34
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Operational Check Procedures
Operational Check Procedures
The following operational checks are highly recommended, but not required. The
assessment of the system operating environment and the functional operation of the
system components help identify faulty equipment.
CAUTION
Use an antistatic work surface and wrist strap to lessen the chance of
electrostatic discharge.
Environment and Device Temperature Check
1. Measure the temperature and humidity of the environment and write the values on the
test record, located at the end of this chapter.
The performance is specified at an ambient temperature of +23 °C ±3°. Therefore, the
environmental temperature must remain in the range of +20 °C to +26 °C. Once the
measurement calibration has been done, the ambient temperature must be held to
±1 °C.
2. Open the calibration and verification kits and place all the devices on top of the foam so
they will reach room temperature.
NOTE
Temperature of the device is important because device dimensions
(electrical characteristics) change with temperature.
3. Switch on the power to the system instruments. Switch on the controller last and the
85101 next to last. To achieve the maximum system stability, allow the system
instruments to warm up for at least 1 hour before measurement calibration.
User Parameters Check (Unratioed Power)
Refer to the “Unratioed Power Failures” section in Chapter 4 for a procedure to check that
the system RF power level is correct.
NOTE
Check the user parameters with the source at different power levels
and in the ramp and step modes.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-35
Performance Verification and Specifications
Operational Check Procedures
Inspect, Clean, and Gage Connectors
CAUTION
SMA connectors can easily damage the verification devices. Always use
adapters when verifying a system with SMA connectors.
1. Visually inspect all the connectors for any burrs, gold flakes, or places where the gold is
worn.
2. Clean all the connectors with alcohol and foam-tipped swabs. Dry the connectors with
dry foam-tipped swabs.
3. Gage all devices, cables, and test port connectors. The procedures for correct use of
gages are in the calibration kit manuals.
Cable Check
The following series of cable tests (return loss, insertion loss, magnitude stability, phase
stability, and connector repeatability) can be done to check the stability of a test port cable.
This check is recommended to avoid spending a considerable amount of time on the
verification only to have a failure caused by the cables.
Return Loss of Cables
1. Press STIMULUS MENU, [STEP].
2. Perform an S11 1-port measurement calibration at test port 1. Use a lowband load and
a sliding load for the loads portion of the calibration. (If your calibration kit is an
economy grade, use the broadband load only.) If necessary, refer to the operating
manual for a detailed measurement calibration procedure.
NOTE
If the fixed load in your calibration kit is labeled BROADBAND, you
can use this load in the lowband portion of the measurement
calibration.
3. Connect the test port cable to PORT 1 and tighten to the specified torque for the
connector type.
4. Connect a broadband termination to the end of the cable.
5. To measure S11 of the cable and load combination, press Parameter S11.
6. To measure the return loss over the entire specified band, press MARKER, turn the front
panel knob, and look for the worst case S11 measurement.
NOTE
The termination used at the cable end must be significantly higher in
performance than the cable under test.
See Figure 8-7 for an example of a return loss measurement. Refer to the cable manual to
see if the cable meets the return loss specification.
8-36
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Operational Check Procedures
Figure 8-7
Return Loss Measurement of Cables
Insertion Loss of Cables
1. Replace the load with a short.
2. To measure the insertion loss of the cable over the entire specified band, press MARKER,
turn the front panel knob, and look for the worst case measurement.
Power holes >0.5 dB indicate a bad cable. See Figure 8-8 for example insertion loss
measurements of a good and a bad cable. Refer to the cable manual to see if the cable
you are measuring meets its insertion loss specification.
In this S11 measurement, the displayed trace results from energy being propagated
down the cable and reflected back from the short. Therefore, the correct insertion loss is
approximately the measured value divided by 2 (one-way path loss of the cable).
NOTE
Figure 8-8
It is normal for the data trace to have a roll-off toward the high end of
the frequency range.
Insertion Loss Measurements of Cables
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-37
Performance Verification and Specifications
Operational Check Procedures
Magnitude and Phase Stability of Cables
1. To measure magnitude and phase stability, press the following keys on the analyzer:
DISPLAY, [DUAL CHANNEL], [SPLIT]
CHANNEL 1, LOG MAG
RESPONSE MENU, [AVERAGING ON], 6, 4, x1
CHANNEL 2, PARAMETER S11, FORMAT PHASE
RESPONSE MENU, [AVERAGING ON], 6, 4, X1
2. Connect a short at the end of the cable.
3. Hold the cable in a straight line, and press the following keys to normalize the displayed
traces:
CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY, [DATA → MEMORY 1], [MATH (/)]
CHANNEL 2, DISPLAY, [DATA → MEMORY 2], [MATH (/)]
4. Make a gradual 90° bend in the middle of the cable.
NOTE
The specification in the cable manual is determined from a
transmission measurement (not a reflection measurement) and using a
particular radius of a bend.
5. To change the scale of the displayed traces, press:
CHANNEL 1, RESPONSE, SCALE, STEP, [↓] (repeat arrow key)
CHANNEL 2, RESPONSE, SCALE, STEP, [↓] (repeat arrow key)
6. To mark the end of the cable's specified range, place a marker on the highest specified
frequency of the cable. Press: MARKER, (enter the specified frequency), G/n.
7. Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes above and below the reference line
and is within the specified frequency range. See Figure 8-9 for example plots of this
measurement.
Press: MARKER, [MARKER 2] , (turn the front panel knob)
In this S11 measurement, the displayed trace results from energy being propagated
down the cable and reflected back from the short. Therefore, the measured deflection
value must be divided in half to reach the correct value. Refer to the cable manual to see
if the cable meets the magnitude and phase stability specifications.
8-38
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Operational Check Procedures
Figure 8-9
Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability
Cable Connector Repeatability
1. To measure the cable connector repeatability, connect a broadband termination at the
end of the cable.
NOTE
The connector repeatability specification that the
specifications/performance verification software computes is not related
to this check. It is determined from the same connector type as the
calibration kit devices.
2. Press the following keys on the analyzer:
CHANNEL 1, DISPLAY, [SINGLE CHANNEL], [DATA],
RESPONSE MENU, [AVERAGING ON], 1, 2, 8, x1
3. To normalize the data trace, press:
DISPLAY, [MORE], [MATH OPERATIONS], [MATH (-)]
DISPLAY, [DATA → MEMORY 1], [MATH (-)]
RESPONSE, REF VALUE, −, 5, 0, x1
4. Disconnect and then reconnect the cable to the test port. Tighten the connection to the
specified torque for the connector type.
5. To add the data trace of the reconnected cable to memory, press:
DISPLAY, [DATA → MEMORY 1]
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times to look for modes. Modes appear when a harmonic
of the source fundamental frequency is able to propagate through the cable or connector.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-39
Performance Verification and Specifications
Operational Check Procedures
Any mode that appears each time the cable is connected and reconnected will affect
measurement integrity. Refer to the example plot in Figure 8-10.
NOTE
Figure 8-10
The connector repeatability measurement should be done at the test
port as well as at the end of the test port cable.
Connector Repeatability Examples
Dynamic Range Check
This check requires a full 2-port measurement calibration with isolation and 1024
averages. Since the total measurement uncertainty test also requires the same
measurement calibration, this check should be done in the first portion of that test.
NOTE
Each system configuration has a different dynamic range specification.
Use the effective dynamic range specifications (Ref-min Edrr2, Edrr1)
that are found on the residual error (w/correction on) table generated
from the specifications/performance verification software.
1. Terminate each test port with a broadband load (included in the calibration kit).On the
analyzer, press:
FORMAT LOG MAG
PARAMETER S21
RESPONSE MENU, [AVERAGING ON]
(for sweepers) 1, 2, 8, x1
(for synthesizers) 1, 0, 2, 4, x1
Allow at least one complete sweep (until the asterisk at the left side of the display
disappears).
2. Compare the measured dynamic range to the specification on the generated table.
8-40
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Operational Check Procedures
NOTE
Test sets with Option 003 (reversed coupler) have a different
specification for forward and reverse measurements. Measure the
dynamic range in both S12 and S21 parameters.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-41
Performance Verification and Specifications
Frequency Test Procedures
Frequency Test Procedures
The frequency tests are only for 8340/8360 sources. The 8350 source frequency accuracy is
tested during the total system uncertainty test.
Source frequency accuracy is tested across the entire sweep range in both the swept and
CW sweep modes.
NOTE
Allow at least one hour for the system instruments to warm up.
CW Frequency Accuracy Test
The front panel emulation software, contained on the 8510 operating system disc, is
required to do this test for an 83621/31/51. The analyzer keypad overlay is part of the front
panel emulator kit.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in the figure below.
NOTE
Figure 8-11
If the source and test set operate below 500 MHz, connect the test set
output to the 10 Hz to 500 MHz BNC connector on the frequency
counter. The input switch on the frequency counter must also be in the
10 Hz to 500 MHz position.
CW Frequency Accuracy Setup
2. To preset the instruments, press: INSTRUMENT STATE, RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET].
3. To set the frequency from the analyzer front panel, press:
STIMULUS CENTER, MENU, [SINGLE POINT] and enter the start frequency of the source or
test set, whichever is higher.
Measure the frequency with the counter, and record this value on the test record located
at the end of this chapter.
8-42
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Frequency Test Procedures
4. From the analyzer front panel, enter the stop frequency of the source or test set,
whichever is lower. (For an 83640 or 83651, omit this step and follow the appropriate
next step.)
NOTE
Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26.5 GHz
input on the frequency counter. The input switch must also be set to the
500 MHz to 26.5 GHz position.
Measure the frequency with the counter, and record the value on the test record located at
the end of this chapter.
For the 83640
5. From the analyzer front panel, enter 2, 6, ., 5, G/n.
NOTE
Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26.5 GHz
input on the frequency counter. The input switch must also be set to the
500 MHz to 26.5 GHz position.
Measure the frequency with the counter, and record the value on the test record located
at the end of this chapter.
6. In the 83640, an internal frequency doubler is used to generate frequencies of S20 GHz
through 40 GHz. Since the highest frequency that the frequency counter can measure is
26.5 GHz, the doubler is disabled for the measurement at 40 GHz, providing an RF
output of 20 GHz. This verifies a 40 GHz output except for the operation of the doubler.
Since the doubler is engaged to produce the 26.5 GHz RF output, the operation of the
doubler is verified in the 26.5 through 40 GHz.
On the synthesizer, press:
SERVICE, [MORE], [TOOLS MENU]
[MORE], [DISABLE DOUBLER], (asterisk on)
CW, 4, 0, G/n
Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located
at the end of this chapter.
For the 83651
5. From the analyzer front panel, enter 2, 6, ., 5, G/n
NOTE
Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26.5 GHz
input on the frequency counter. The input switch must also be set to the
500 MHz to 26.5 GHz position.
Measure the frequency with the counter, and record the value on the test record located
at the end of this chapter.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-43
Performance Verification and Specifications
Frequency Test Procedures
6. Insert the 8510 operating disc into the analyzer disc drive to run the front panel
emulation software.
In the 83651, an internal frequency doubler is used to generate frequencies of
≥26.5 GHz through 50 GHz. Since the highest frequency that the frequency counter can
measure is 26.5 GHz, the doubler is disabled for the measurement at 50 GHz, providing
an RF output of 25 GHz. This verifies a 50 GHz output except for the operation of the
doubler. Since the doubler is engaged to produce the 26.5 GHz RF output, the operation
of the doubler is verified in the 26.5 GHz measurement.
7. On the analyzer, press:
AUXILIARY MENUS, SYSTEM
[MORE] [SERVICE FUNCTIONS]
[TEST MENU]
1, 9, (LOAD PROGRAM DISC), =MARKER
[↓], [LOAD FILE]
2, (FRONT PANEL EMULATOR), =MARKER
8. Put the keypad overlay on the analyzer front panel. (The overlay is part of the front
panel emulator kit.)
9. To set the stop frequency of the 83651, press the following keys on the analyzer:
FREQUENCY, CW, 5, 0, G/n
[SERVICE], [D4], (more), [k2], (Tools Menu)
[k4], (more), [k4], (Disable Doubler), (asterisk on)
Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located
at the end of this chapter.
10. Follow the instructions on the analyzer display to exit the front panel emulator
software.
In Case of Difficulty
If the measured values do not meet the specifications listed on the test record, refer to the
source manual for adjustment and troubleshooting instructions.
Swept Frequency Accuracy Test
This check is helpful for systems that are primarily operated in ramp mode, and is
optional. This procedure is not part of performance verification. Performance verification
requires step-mode only.
The front panel emulation software, contained on the 8510 operating system disc, is
required to do this test for an 83621/31/51. The analyzer keypad overlay is part of the front
panel emulator kit.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-12.
8-44
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Frequency Test Procedures
NOTE
Figure 8-12
The 8514/8515 test sets must have the ports unbalanced. Connect long
cables between the front panel ports and short cables between the back
panel ports (or vice versa).
Swept Frequency Accuracy Setup
2. To preset the system instruments, press:
INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET]
For 83621/31/51 Synthesizers:
3. Run the front panel emulation software. On the analyzer, press:
AUXILIARY MENUS, SYSTEM
[MORE], [SERVICE FUNCTIONS]
[TEST MENU]
1, 9, (LOAD PROGRAM DISC), =MARKER
[↓], [LOAD FILE]
2, (FRONT PANEL EMULATOR), =MARKER
Put the keypad overlay on the analyzer front panel. (The overlay part of the front panel
emulator kit.)
4. To initiate a synthesizer full user cal, that includes auto track and sweep span cal,
press:
[USER CAL], [k0], (Full Usr Cal), [k0], (proceed)
The user cal takes a few minutes to complete.
NOTE
Auto track is not an adjustment; it must be done to ensure the source
specifications are met. Agilent recommends you do an auto track every
time you do a measurement calibration.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-45
Performance Verification and Specifications
Frequency Test Procedures
5. Follow the instructions on the analyzer display to exit the front panel emulator
software.
Continue with step 6.
For All Other 8360 Series Synthesizers
3. To initiate an auto track, press the following keys on the synthesizer:
PRESET, USER CAL, [FREQ CAL MENU], ONCE
4. To initiate a sweep span cal, press the following keys on the synthesizer:
PRESET, USER CAL, FREQ CAL MENU, [Sweep Span Once], ONCE
Continue with step 6.
For 8340/41 Series Synthesizers
3. To initiate an auto track, press the following keys on the synthesizer:
PRESET, SHIFT, PEAK
4. Continue with step 6.
For All Synthesizers
6. Press the following keys on the analyzer:
PARAMETER S21, FORMAT, PHASE, STIMULUS MENU, [STEP]
Allow at least one complete sweep (until the asterisk is gone).
7. To normalize the measurement, press:
MENUS DISPLAY, [DATA→MEMORY 2], [MATH (/)]
8. To offset the center frequency by 5 MHz, press STIMULUS CENTER and increase the
displayed value by 5 MHz. For example, for a 45 MHz to 50 GHz sweep, the center
frequency should be changed from 25.0225 to 25.0275 GHz.
9. Press RESPONSE SCALE and use the front panel knob to adjust the scale factor so that
the flat trace is shifted to the bottom or top graticule. (Where the trace variations are
approximately halfway above and below the last graticule.)
10. Press STIMULUS CENTER and change the displayed frequency by 10 MHz. This places
the trace on the opposite side of the display. The amount of the frequency shift now
represents a vertical scaling of 1 MHz per division.
11. Press STIMULUS CENTER and return the frequency to the original setting. The phase
measurement should return to 0º.
8-46
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Frequency Test Procedures
12. Press STIMULUS MENU, [RAMP], [SWEEP TIME], ., 5, x1. The display shows the difference
between step and ramp sweep modes. An example of a full band measurement at
1 MHz per division is shown in the figure below.
13. Measure the trace variation with the 1 MHz per division scale. Record the results on
the test record located at the end of this chapter.
Figure 8-13
Typical Ramp Sweep Frequency Accuracy
For 8340/41 Series Synthesizers:
14. On the synthesizer, press CAL, [MORE], [TRIM SWEEP] and adjust the front panel knob
to position the highest frequency bandswitch transition point on the reference line.
Refer to the figure below.
Record the maximum trace variation on the test record located at the end of this chapter.
Figure 8-14
Typical Trace Variation for 8340/41 Swept Frequency Accuracy
In Case of Difficulty
If the measured values do not meet the specifications listed on the test record, refer to the
source manual for adjustment and troubleshooting instructions.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-47
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
The figure below shows a menu map of the performance verification program. Step-by-step
instructions follow.
Figure 8-15
Performance Verification Program
1. Perform the “How to Load the Software” procedure earlier in this chapter.
2. To run the performance verification, press:
[Verify System], [Serial Numbers]
3. Complete the list of system component and kit serial numbers. Also fill in the NIST test
numbers from the verification kit. Press [DONE] when the list is complete.
8-48
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
4. To begin a measurement calibration, insert the calibration kit data disc into the
analyzer disc drive, and press [System Cal].
If the list does not match your system, press [Prior Menu], [Prior Menu], [System Config] to
return to the hardware configuration menu to correct the list. If the list does match your
system, press [Resume].
5. Follow the cable connection instructions on the display and then press [Resume].
NOTE
Tighten all connections to the correct torque.
6. If your system operates at 45 MHz and your verification kit contains the device
characterization data for 45 MHz, insert the verification kit data disc into the analyzer
disc drive and press [Resume]. After the 45 MHz data is loaded, press [Yes].
If your system does not operate at 45 MHz or if your verification kit does not contain
device characterization data for 45 MHz, press [Bypass].
If you do not know if your verification kit disc has data for 45 MHz, the software will
automatically detect whether or not the disc contains the data.
7. Insert the calibration kit data disc into the analyzer disc drive. Press [Resume].
8. Measure the environmental temperature and record the results on the test record at the
end of this chapter.
9. After allowing a 1 hour warm up, perform a full 2-port measurement calibration by
connecting the calibration devices and pressing the corresponding keys on the analyzer.
Do not hold the calibration devices when the analyzer is measuring them. (Use a TRL
calibration whenever possible. Otherwise, for the loads portion of the calibration, use
the sliding and lowband loads or the broadband load for economy calibration kits.) Refer
to the operating manual for a detailed measurement calibration procedure.
NOTE
If you are using a TRL measurement calibration technique, be
extremely careful not to move the test port cables. Cable movement,
between measurement calibration and verification, may introduce
enough error to cause a verification failure. If the highest accuracy
measurement calibration is desired, Agilent recommends that you place
the cables in a fixture to prevent cable movement.
Save the measurement calibration in one of the analyzer registers. When the
measurement calibration is completed and saved, press [Resume].
If you have selected a performance verification for 45 MHz, perform a full 2-port
measurement calibration at 45 MHz. (Use only the lowband load for the loads portion of
the calibration). Save the measurement calibration in a different analyzer register. When
the measurement calibration is completed and saved, press [Resume].
10. Press [Select Standard] and fill in the serial number for the verification standard listed.
11. Leave the number of averages at 1024 unless you changed it for the measurement
calibration. The number of averages MUST be the same for the
measurement calibration AND the verification device measurements.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-49
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
12. Select the appropriate register(s) where you saved the measurement calibration(s).
13. Select the 45 MHz measurement if the system operates in that frequency range and the
characterization data is available. Press [Done].
14. Insert the verification kit disc into the analyzer disc drive and press [Resume].
15. Measure the environmental temperature and record the results on the test record at
the end of this chapter.
NOTE
For specified performance, the environmental temperature at the time
of verification must be within 1 ºC (1.8 ºF) of the measurement
calibration temperature.
16. Press [Measure Data].
17. If the measurement calibration sets and corresponding analyzer registers that appear
on the display are not correct, return to the system calibration menu by pressing
[Prior Menu], [Prior Menu].
If the measurement calibration sets are valid, connect the verification device between
the test port cables and press [Resume].
18. After the measurement is complete, view the results of each parameter measurement.
Press:
S11, S12, S21, S22.
19. Press [Print All] to create a hardcopy of the verification results.
20. If the system passes all the parameter measurements of the device, press
[Select Standard] to select another verification device measurement.
If the system does not pass all the parameter measurements, refer to “If the System
Fails Performance Verification” later in this chapter.
21. Use the cursor keys and the [Next] and [Previous] softkeys to select another verification
standard and to change the device serial number. Press [Done], [Resume].
22. Repeat steps 16 through 21 until all the devices in the verification kit are measured.
The system performance verification is complete. Refer to Examples 8–3 and 8–4 to
interpret the printout of your measurement results.
8-50
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties for the
Performance Verification Devices
You can determine your system measurement uncertainty and compare it to the factory
uncertainty for each frequency measurement of each verification device. The comparison
calculation can be done by following the steps below.
1. Extract a factory measurement uncertainty value from the verification device data
(contained in the verification kit or make a printout using the software).
2. Subtract the value in step 1 from the total measurement uncertainty value on the
performance verification printout.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-51
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
The example below shows where the equation values are located on the device data
sheet and the verification printout. The example also shows how the equations can be
arranged to make a table. A blank table is provided for you to write the comparison
equations for your system.
Example 8-1
Comparing Measurement Uncertainties
Freq GHz
Total Uncertainty

Factory
Uncertainty
=
System Measurement Uncertainty
0.045
0.01348

0.00484
=
0.00864
1.000
0.01242

0.00378
=
0.00864
2.000
0.01241

0.00378
=
0.00863
8-52
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
Example 8-2
Freq GHz
Table for Comparing Measurement Uncertainties
Total Uncertainty
8510C On-Site Service Manual

Factory Uncertainty
=
System Measurement
Uncertainty
8-53
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
Interpreting the Performance Verification Results
Two example printouts are used to explain the various columns.
Example 8-3
8-54
Performance Verification (S21 Measurement)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
Example 8-4
Performance Verification (S22 Measurement)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-55
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
If the System Fails Performance Verification
• Disconnect and reconnect the device that failed the verification. Then remeasure the
device.
If the performance verification still fails:
• Continue to measure the rest of the verification devices and printout the results of all
four measurement parameters.
• Print the error terms and examine them for anomalies near the failure frequencies.
(Refer to “Error Terms” in Chapter 4 .)
• Make another measurement calibration and follow the flow chart on the next page.
• Verify that the data disk from the verification kit is for an 8510 and not for an 8720.
8-56
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-57
Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program
How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties
Program
The figure below shows a menu map of the system specifications and uncertainties
program. Step-by-step instructions follow.
Figure 8-16
8-58
Menu Map of System Specifications and Uncertainties Program
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program
1. Perform the “How to Load the Software” procedure located earlier in this chapter.
2. To specify which type of system specifications you want to generate, press:
[System Specs]
The active (highlighted) window is used to choose the following:
• The table you want
• The type of table: data sheet or specifications
• The table format: linear or dB
• The output device: display or printer
• The Eterm direction: forward, reverse, or forward/reverse
The data sheet table is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability
errors and system drift errors are excluded. The tables can be generated in two different
modes:
CORRECTION ON (after measurement calibration). These system specifications are
values based upon residual errors after a measurement calibration (as specified in the
configuration menu by the type of calibration and calibration kit used). These errors are
the "effective" system errors.
CORRECTION OFF (uncalibrated). These system specifications are values based on the
same system configuration but without a measurement calibration. These errors are the
"raw" system errors.
3. Press the [Next] or [Previous] softkeys to change the selection in the window.
For example, if you select [All Tables], [Specifications], [dB], and [CRT] and press the
[Done] softkey, the controller display will quickly display or scroll through the system
specifications (as explained in “Reference Information for Performance Verification and
Specifications” later in this chapter). You can temporarily pause the printing that goes
to the display by pressing any key on the keyboard. To continue printing again, press
any key.
4. Make the selections you want and press the [Print] softkey to print them out.
5. Press [Prior Menu] to return to the main menu.
6. To print or plot dynamic accuracy or total uncertainty for the system configuration
specified, press [System Uncert]. These specifications are available as plots or tables,
based on data sheet or system specification values with upper or lower limits (explained
in “Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications” later in this
chapter).
Dynamic accuracy errors are a function of signal power level and are calculated and
included as a component of the total uncertainty calculation. They can be described as
follows: the down-converted RF signal passes through the 85102 IF detector, and is
either attenuated or amplified in order to be further down-converted and processed for
display. Because of this, the signal has some magnitude and phase inaccuracies that
vary with signal levels. By plotting the dynamic accuracy specifications of your system,
you can see how dynamic accuracy changes with power level.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-59
Performance Verification and Specifications
How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program
Dynamic accuracy or total system uncertainty values (with correction ON) are
calculated using equations derived from a flowgraph model of the measurement system.
Therefore, total uncertainty can be described as a computation of all the residual errors
that affect your measurement.
NOTE
Total measurement uncertainty is also highly dependent on the device
being measured. For the purpose of the uncertainty plots, the following
ideal device assumptions are made.
For S11 and S22 uncertainties, the device is a one-port device, therefore the value of
S21 and S12 are −∞ dB. The value of S11 or S22 is varied.
For S21 and S12 uncertainties, the device is a reciprocal two-port device with perfect
input/output match, therefore S11 and S22 are Φ (linear) and S21 = S12. The value of
S21 or S12 is varied. For phase uncertainty calculations, an arbitrary length (of 10 cm)
is assumed. If your device is longer than 10 cm, your phase uncertainty will be greater
than the value shown. Likewise, if your device length is shorter than 10 cm, your phase
uncertainty will be less than the value shown.
For system performance verification, the S-parameters of the verification standards
measured at the factory are used in the actual uncertainty calculations.
NOTE
At any time, you can return to the hardware configuration menu and
change any of the items. For example, if you change calibration kits you
can print out the specifications for the same system with the different
calibration kit and compare the results.
7. Make the menu selections you want and press the [Done] softkey when finished. The
same keys used in the system specs menu are used to select and toggle the selections in
this menu.
The program computes the values and the controller beeps each time the values for a
particular frequency band are completed.
The table or plot appears on the controller display with a softkey selection for sending
the display to the printer or plotter.
NOTE
If you want to run the performance verification on your system, keep
the program running and refer to “How to Verify System Performance”
on page 8-13. If you want to exit the program, press the [Quit Program]
key in the main menu.
The examples that follow are explanations of typical tables and plots generated by this
program.
8-60
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example printouts are used to explain the various information included. Refer to the
system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the
system error flow graph.
Example 8-5
Residual Errors
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-61
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-6
8-62
Raw Test Port Errors
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-7
Raw B1 Channel Errors
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-63
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-8
8-64
Raw B2 Channel Errors
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-9
Raw A1 Channel Errors
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-65
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-10
8-66
Raw A2 Channel Errors
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-11
S11 Uncertainty Specifications Plots
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-67
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-12
8-68
S11 Uncertainty Specifications Table
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-13
S11 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Plots
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-69
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-14
8-70
S11 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Table
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-15
S21 Uncertainty Specifications Plots
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-71
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-16
8-72
S21 Uncertainty Specifications Table
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-17
S21 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Plots
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-73
Performance Verification and Specifications
Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts
Example 8-18
8-74
S21 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Table
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Measurement Uncertainties
Overview
In any measurement, certain measurement errors associated with the system add
uncertainty to the measured results. This uncertainty defines how accurately a device
under test (DUT) can be measured.
Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into two types: raw and residual.
The raw error terms are the errors associated with the uncorrected system that are called
systematic (repeatable), random (non-repeatable), and drift errors. The residual error
terms are the errors that remain after a measurement calibration.
The error correction procedure, also called measurement calibration, measures a set of
calibration devices with known characteristics. It uses the measurement results to
effectively remove systematic errors, using the vector math capabilities of the analyzer.
The residual systematic errors remain after error correction, primarily due to the
limitations of how accurately the electrical characteristics of the calibration devices can be
defined and determined.
The random (non-repeatable) and drift errors, cannot be corrected because they cannot be
quantified and measured during the measurement calibration and device measurement.
However, the effects of random errors can be reduced through averaging. Random errors,
that occur during a measurement calibration, are part of the error correction and become
systematic errors when the calibration is turned on.
For this reason, it is best to use a large number of averages during measurement
calibration to reduce to the effect of the random errors. The averaging may then be reduced
for device measurement. The residual systematic errors along with the random and drift
errors continue to affect measurements after error correction, adding an uncertainty to the
measurement results. Therefore, measurement uncertainty is defined as the combination
of the residual systematic (repeatable), random (non-repeatable), and drift errors in the
measurement system after error correction.
Measurement uncertainties of any analyzer system are highly dependent on the
characteristics of the device under test. The expected measurement uncertainty of your
analyzer system, when measuring the verification kit devices, can be determined by using
the performance verification software. The expected measurement uncertainty of ideal
terminations and thus may be determined by using the uncertainties portion of the
software.
The following measurement uncertainty equations and system error models (flowgraphs)
show the relationship of the systematic, random, and drift errors. These are useful for
predicting overall measurement performance.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-75
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Sources of Measurement Errors
Sources of Systematic Errors
The residual (after measurement calibration) systematic errors result from imperfections
in the calibration standards, the connector interface, the interconnecting cables, and the
instrumentation. All measurements are affected by dynamic accuracy and frequency error
effects. For reflection measurements, the associated residual errors are effective
directivity, effective source match, and effective reflection tracking. For transmission
measurements, the additional residual errors are effective crosstalk, effective load match,
and effective transmission tracking.
The listing below shows the abbreviations used for systematic errors that are in the error
models and uncertainty equations.
• Efd, Erd = effective directivity
• Efs, Ers = effective source match
• Efr, Err = effective reflection tracking
• Efc, Erc = effective crosstalk
• Efl, Erl = effective load match
• Eft, Ert = effective transmission tracking
• Crm, Ctm = cable stability (deg./GHz)
• Ab1, Ab2 = dynamic accuracy
• F = frequency
The sources for dynamic accuracy error effects are from errors during self-calibration, gain
compression in the microwave frequency converter (sampler) at high signal levels, errors
generated in the synchronous detectors, localized non-linearities in the IF filter system,
and from LO leakage into the IF signal paths.
Sources of Random Errors
The random error sources are noise, connector repeatability and dynamic accuracy. There
are two types of noise in any measurement system: low level noise (noise floor) and high
level noise (phase noise of the source).
Low level noise is the broadband noise floor of the receiver which can be reduced through
averaging or by changing the IF bandwidth.
High level noise or jitter of the trace data is due to the noise floor and the phase noise of
the LO source inside the test set.
Connector repeatability is the random variation encountered when connecting a pair of RF
connectors. Variations in both reflection and transmission can be observed.
8-76
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
The listing below shows the abbreviations used for random errors in the error models and
uncertainty equations.
• Rnt = raw noise on trace (rms)
• Rnf = raw noise on floor (rms)
• Crrl = port 1 connector reflection repeatability error
• Crtl = port 1 connector transmission repeatability error
• Crr2 = port 2 connector reflection repeatability error
• Crt2 = port 2 connector transmission repeatability error
Sources of Drift Errors
Drift has two categories: frequency drift of the signal source and instrumentation drift.
Instrumentation drift affects the magnitude and phase of both reflection and transmission
measurements.
The primary causes for instrumentation drift are the thermal expansion characteristics of
the interconnecting cables within the test set and the conversion stability of the microwave
frequency converter.
The list below shows the drift errors in the error models and uncertainty equations.
• Dmxbx, Dmsax = drift magnitude
• Dpxbx, Dpsax = drift phase
• Dpfxbx, Dpfsax = drift phase/f
Sources of Additional Measurement Errors
Two additional categories of measurement errors are connection techniques and contact
surfaces.
The connection techniques category includes torque limits, flush setting of sliding load
center conductors, and handling procedures for beadless airlines.
The contact surfaces category includes cleaning procedures, scratches, worn plating, and
rough seating.
These types of errors are not accounted for in the uncertainty analysis.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-77
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Measurement Uncertainty Equations
Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error
terms. The precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase
relationship to the actual test device response. When the phase of an error response is not
known, phase is assumed to be worst case (–180 to + 180 degrees). Random errors such as
noise and connector repeatability are generally combined in a root-sum-of-the-squares
(RSS) manner.
Due to the complexity of the calculations, the performance verification/specifications
software calculates the system measurement uncertainty. The following equations are
representative of the equations the performance verification/specifications software uses to
generate the system measurement uncertainty plots and tables.
Reflection Uncertainty Equations
Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty (Erm)
An analysis of the error model in Figure 8-18 yields an equation for the reflection
magnitude uncertainty. The equation contains all of the first order terms and the
significant second order terms. The terms under the radical are random in character and
are combined on an RSS basis. The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a
worst case basis. In all cases, the error terms and the S-parameters are treated as linear
absolute magnitudes.
Reflection magnitude uncertainty (forward direction)
2
2
Erm = Systematic + ( Random ) + ( Drift )
2
Systematic = Efd + Efr S11 + Efs S11 + S21 S12 Efl + Ab1 S11
Random =
Cr =
2
2
2
( Cr ) + ( Rr ) + ( Nr )
2
2
2
2
( Crm1 ) + ( 2Ctm1S11 ) + ( Crm1s11 ) + ( Crm2S21S12 )
Rr =
2 2
2
( Crr1 + 2Crt1S11 + Crr1S11 ) + ( Crr2S21S12 )
Nr =
2
2
( EfntS11 ) + Efnf
Drift & Stability = Dm1b1 S11
where:
Crm2 = cable 2 reflection magnitude stability
Efnt = effective noise on trace
Dms1 = drift magnitude × °C source to port 1
Efnf = effective noise floor
Efs = effective source match error
Crt1 = connector repeatability (transmission)
Efr = effective reflection tracking error
Crr1 = connector repeatability (reflection)
Efl = effective load match error
Ctm1 = cable 1 transmission magnitude stability
Efd = effective directivity error
Crm1 = cable 1 reflection magnitude stability
Crr2 = connector repeatability (reflection)
8-78
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
• The detailed equation for each of the previous terms is derived from the signal flow
model in Figure 8-18. Due to the complexity of combining these terms manually, the
specifications/performance verification software calculates the terms for you. However,
the software makes some ideal device assumptions:
• For S11 and S22 uncertainties the device is a one-port device, therefore the value of S21
and S12 are −∞ dB. The value of S11 or S22 is varied.
• For S21 and S12 uncertainties, the device is a reciprocal two-port device with perfect
input/output match, therefore S11 and S22 are f (linear) and S21 = S12. The value of
S21 or S12 is varied.
Reflection Phase Uncertainty (Erp)
Reflection phase uncertainty is determined from a comparison of the magnitude
uncertainty with the test signal magnitude. The worst case phase angle is computed. This
result is combined with the error terms related to thermal drift of the total system, port 1
cable stability, and phase dynamic accuracy.
Erp = Arcsin ( Erm ⁄ S11 ) + 2Cpf1f + Dps1 + Dpfs1f
where:
Cpf1 = cable phase/frequency port 1
Dps = drift phase/degree source to port 1
Dpfs = drift phase/degree/frequency source to port 1
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-79
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Transmission Uncertainty Equations
Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty (Etm)
An analysis of the error model in Figure 8-18 yields an equation for the transmission
magnitude uncertainty. The equation contains all of the first order terms and some of the
significant second order terms. The terms under the radical are random in character and
are combined on an RSS basis. The terms in the systematic error group are combined on a
worst case basis. In all cases, the error terms are treated as linear absolute magnitudes.
Transmission magnitude uncertainty (forward direction)
2
2
Ert + Systematic + ( Random ) + ( Drift & Stability )
Systematic = ( Ef t + EfsS11 + EflS22 + EfsEflS21S12 + Ab2 )S21
Random =
2
2
2
( Ct ) + ( Rt ) + ( Nt )
2
2
2
2
Ct = S21 ( Ctm1 ) + ( Ctm2 ) + ( Crm1s11 ) + ( Crm2S22 )
2
2
2
2
Rt = S21 ( Crt1 ) + ( Crt2 ) + ( Crr1S11 ) + ( Crr2S22 )
Nt =
2
2
( EfntS21 ) + Efnf
Drift & Stability = Dm2b2S21
where:
Crt2 = Connector repeatability (transmission) port 2
Crr2 = Connector repeatability (reflection) port 2
Efnt = effective noise on trace
Efnf = effective noise floor
Crr1 = connector repeatability (reflection)
Crt1 = connector repeatability (transmission)
Ctm1 = cable 1 transmission magnitude stability
Crm1 = cable 1 reflection magnitude stability
Ctm2 = cable 2 transmission magnitude stability
Crm2 = cable 2 reflection magnitude stability
Dms1 = drift magnitude °C source to port
Efs = effective source match error
Eft = effective transmission tracking error
Efl = effective load match error
Efc = effective crosstalk error
8-80
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
The detailed equation for each of the above terms is derived from the signal flow model in
Figure 8-18. Due to the complexity of combining these terms manually, the performance
verification/ specifications software calculates the terms for you. However, the software
makes some ideal device assumptions:
• For S11 and S22 uncertainties the device is a one-port device, therefore the value of S21
and S12 are −∞ dB. The value of S11 or S22 is varied.
• For S21 and S12 uncertainties, the device is a reciprocal two-port device with perfect
input/output match, therefore S11 and S22 are φ (linear) and S21 = S12. The value of
S21 or S12 is varied.
Transmission Phase Uncertainty (Etp)
Transmission phase uncertainty is calculated from a comparison of the magnitude
uncertainty with the test signal magnitude. The worst case phase angle is computed. This
result is combined with the error terms related to phase dynamic accuracy, cable phase
stability, and thermal drift of the total system.
Etp = Arcsin ( Ert ⁄ S21 ) + 2Cpf1f + Dps1 + Dpfs1f
where:
Cpf1 = Cable phase/frequency port 1
Cpf2 = Cable phase/frequency port 2
Dps1 = drift phase/degree source to port 1
Dpfs1 = drift phase/degree/frequency source to port 1
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-81
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Generation of System Measurement Uncertainties
Figure 8-17
8-82
System Measurement Uncertainties Generation Process
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
The system raw errors are combined with the uncertainties of the calibration kit standards
in a manner determined by the measurement calibration process. This results in a set of
specifications for the residual error terms (effective directivity, tracking, source match,
load match, crosstalk and dynamic range). The residual error terms are included in the
corrected system flowgraph. The flow graph is then solved with measurement uncertainty
equations, resulting in the measurement uncertainty and dynamic accuracy tables and
plots. See Figure 8-17 for the graphic representation of this process.
NOTE
Examples of generated system uncertainties and dynamic accuracy are
located earlier in this chapter.
System Error Models
The system error model flowgraphs, illustrated in the following pages, show the
relationship of the various error sources in the forward and reverse directions. These
flowgraphs can be used to analyze overall measurement performance. Use the lists of error
terms in the following tables as a guide to the abbreviations in the error model flowgraphs.
The additional information column helps clarify how the error terms are derived.
The system flowgraphs show the following:
• Error model of the uncorrected analyzer system (without measurement calibration)
• Error model of the corrected analyzer system (the residual errors remaining after
measurement calibration)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-83
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
NOTE
In all of the terms below, f= the forward direction and r= the reverse
direction.
Table 8-10
Residual Error Term Symbols
Error Term
Eterm Symbol
Additional Information
Power of Source ‡
Ps
Condition
Averaging factor
Avg
Condition
Loss of Attenuator 1 ‡
La1
Condition
Loss of Attenuator 2 ‡
La2
Condition
Cable Flex Factor *
Cff
Condition
Drift in Room Temperature*
Drt
Condition
Effective Directivity *, †
Efd, Erd
Fac. Comp.
Effective Refl Tracking *, †
Efr, Err
Fac. Comp.
Effective Source match *, †
Efs, Ers
Fac. Comp.
Effective Crosstalk *
Efc, Erc
Fac. Comp.
Effective Trans Tracking *, †
Eft, Ert
Fac. Comp.
Effective Load Match *, †
Efl, Erl
Fac. Comp.
Effective Noise on Trace *
Efnt, Ernt
Fac. Comp.
Effective Noise Floor *
Efnf, Ernf
Fac. Comp.
Effective Power Ref (out) port1,2
Epr1, Epr2
Typical
Effective Power maX (in) port1,2
Epx2, Epx1
Typical
Effective Power miN (in) port1,2
Epn2, Epn1
Typical
Effective Dny Rng (Ref-min) port1,2
Edrr1, Edrr2
Fac. Comp.
Effective Dny Rng (maX-min) port1,2
Edrx1, Edrx2
Fac. Comp.
*Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty.
†Related to specifications of calibration kit devices and measurement calibration techniques.
‡Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy.
8-84
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Table 8-11
Test Port Error Term Symbols
Error Term
Eterm Symbol
Additional Information
Drift Source Frequency
Dsf
Typical
Raw Directivity
Rfd, Rrd
Factory
Raw Reflection Tracking
Rfr, Rff
Typical
Raw Source Match
Rfs, Rrs
Factory
Raw Crosstalk
Rfc, Rrc
Factory
Raw Transmission Tracking
Rft, Rrt
Typical
Raw Load Match
Rfl, Rrl
Factory
Low Freq Cutoff Source of port to 1,2†
Fcs1, Fcs2
Fac. Comp.
Low Freq Slope Source of port to 1,2†
Fss1, Fss2
Fac. Comp.
Loss/dc Source to port to 1,2†
Fcs1, Fcs2
Typical
Loss/sqr(F-GHz) Source to port to 1,2†
Fss1, Fss2
Typical
Drift Mag/deg-c Src to port to 1,2†
Dms1, Dms2
Fac. Char.
Drift Ph/deg-c Src to port to 1,2†
Dps1, Dps2
Fac. Char.
Drift Ph/deg-c/F-GHz Src to port to 1,2†
Dpfs1, Dpsf2
Fac. Char.
Connector Repeat Refl port 1,2*
Crr1, Crr2
Fac. Char.
Connector Repeat Trans port 1,2*
Crt1, Crt2
Fac. Char.
Loss/dc port 1,2 Cable†
Ld1c, Ld2c
Cust. Site
Loss/sqr(F-GHz) port 1,2 Cable†
Lf1c, Lf2c
Cust. Site
Cable Refl Mag stab port 1,2*
Crm1, Crm2
Fac. Char.
Cable Trans Mag stab port 1,2*
Ctm1, Ctm2
Fac. Char.
Cable Ph/F-GHz stab port 1,2*
Cpf1, Cpf2
Fac. Char.
*Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty.
†Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-85
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Table 8-12
Channel Error Term Symbols
Error Term
Eterm Symbol
Additional Information
low Freq Cutoff port 1,2 to b1, b2‡
Fc1b1, Fc2b2
Fac. Comp.
Source to a1, a2
low Freq Slope port 1,2 to b1, b2‡
Source to a1, a2
Drift Mag/deg-c port 1,2 to b1, b2†*
Source to a1, a2
Drift Ph/deg-c port1, 2to b1, b2*
Source to a1, a2
Drift Ph/deg-c/F-GHz Src to port to 1,2*
Source to a1, a2
Loss/dc port 1,2 to convertor b1, b2‡
Source to a1, a2
Loss/sqr(F-GHz) port 1,2 to conv. b1,b2‡
Source to a1, a2
Loss/dc convertor to IF‡
Fcsa1, Fcsa2
Fs1b1, Fc2b2
Fac. Comp.
Fssa1, Fssa2
Dm1b1, Dm2b2
Fac. Char.
Dmsa1, Dmsa2
Dp1b1, Dp2b2
Fac. Char.
Dpsa1, Dpsa2
Dpf1b1, Dpf2b2
Fac. Char.
Dpfsa1, Dpfsa2
Ld1b1, Ld2b2
Typical
Ldsa1, Ldsa2
Lf1b1, Lf2b2
Typical
Lfsa1, Lfsa2
Ldvib1, Ldvib2
Typical
Ldvia1, Ldvia2
Loss (F-GHz) convertor to IF‡
Lfvib1, Lfvib2
Damage Level‡
D1b1, D1b2
Typical
Lfvia1, Lfvia2
Fac. Char.
D1a1, D1a2
Power at conver. for 0.1 compress.‡
Pccb1, Pccb2
Factory
Pcca1, Pcca2
Raw rms IF noise floor
Rntb1, Rntb2
Residuals at IF‡
Rnfb1i, Rnfb2i
Factory
Rnta1, Rnta2
Factory
Rnfa1i, Rnfa2i
Linearity of Xtal‡
Lxb1, Lxb2
Factory
Lxa1, Lxa2
IF Gain Err1 −34 to − 46 dBm‡
Ge1b1, Ge1b2
Factory
Ge1a1, Ge1a2
IF Gain Err2 −46 to − 58 dBm
Ge2b1, Ge2b2
Factory
Ge2a1, Ge2a2
IF Gain Err3 −58 to − 78 dBm
Ge3b1, Ge3b2
Factory
Ge3a1, Ge3a2
IF Gain Err4 −78 to −∞ dBm
Ge4b1, Ge4b2
Factory
Ge4a1, Ge4a2
Mag Error vs Phase Shift B1, B2, A1, A2
Mpb1, Mpb2
Factory
Mpa1, Mpa2
*Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty.
‡Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy.
8-86
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Additional Information Definitions
Cust. Site
Verified in the factory and verifiable at the customer’s site using the performance
verification software.
Factory
Verified in the factory on all units before shipment. Not tested at the
customer’s site.
Fac. Comp.
Factory computed—verified in the factory by mathematical derivation
using the measured performance of the system components and
calibration standards. Not tested at the customer's site.
Fac. Char.
Factory characterized parameter set by measuring a number of units.
Verified in the factory by measurements on a random sampling. Not
tested at the customer's site
Typical
Non-warranted performance characteristics intended to provide
information useful in applying the 8510 system. Typical characteristics
are representative of most systems, though not necessarily tested in each
system. Not tested at the customer's site.
Condition
A condition of the measurement or calculation.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-87
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
This page intentionally left blank.
8-88
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8510 System Uncorrected Error Model Flowgraph
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
8-90
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8510 System Corrected Error Model Flowgraph
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
8-92
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Dynamic Accuracy Error Model
The dynamic accuracy value used in the system uncertainty equations is obtained from the
following error model. Example plots of generated dynamic accuracy curves are located
earlier in this chapter.
Figure 8-18
Dynamic Accuracy Error Model Flowgraph
Measurement Traceability
To establish a measurement traceability path to a national standard for a network
analyzer system, the overall system performance is verified through the measurement of
device characteristics that have a traceability path. This is accomplished by electrically
measuring devices in an Agilent verification kit. Refer to “How to Verify System
Performance” for the system performance verification procedure.
The measurement of the verification kit device characteristics has a traceable path
because the factory system that characterizes the devices is calibrated and verified by
measuring standards that have a traceable path to the National Institute of Standards
Technology (NIST). This chain of measurements defines how the verification process
brings NIST traceability to the 8510 system measurements. Therefore, when your
analyzer system is verified through the performance of the “Total System Uncertainty Test
Procedure,” a measurement traceability path is established.
Figure 8-19 shows the traceability path for the calibration and verification standards.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-93
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
Figure 8-19
National Institute of Standards Technology Traceability Path
for 8510 System Calibration and Verification Standards
Substitution of System Components
All Agilent components that are specified for an 8510 system provide a top-quality system
product that ensures good measurements. The performance verification can be performed
with 8510 system components other than those manufactured by Agilent. However, when
the components used are not part of a specified 8510 system, the measurement integrity
can be compromised.
Source Substitution
Sources other than those listed in the source compatibility table in the “System
Installation” chapter are not compatible with the 8510 system communication. Therefore,
there can be no source substitutions for a system performance verification.
Cable Substitution
The test port cables specified for an 8510 system have been characterized for connector
repeatability, magnitude and phase stability with flexing, return loss, insertion loss, and
aging rate. Since the performance of test port cables is a very significant contributor to the
system performance, substituting specified cables with cables that have not been carefully
characterized will increase the uncertainty of your measurement verification. If a
8-94
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Measurement Uncertainties
substitute cable is used that is of lesser quality than characterized in the verification
program, the performance verification is no longer valid. Refer to the plots in the cable
checks (earlier in this chapter) that show the difference in performance between good and
bad cables. It is highly recommended to periodically check test port cables to determine if
they are good.
If the system verification is performed with non-Agilent cables and fails but is then
repeated with Agilent cables and passes, the non-Agilent cables are at fault. (It must be
documented in the comments area of the performance verification printout that
non-Agilent cables were used in the system.) The effects of the non-specified cables cannot
be taken into account in the performance verification procedure without fully
characterizing the cables and modifying the verification program to include this data.
Contact an Agilent system engineer for more information.
Calibration Kit Substitution
The accuracy of the 8510 when used with any calibration kit is dependent on how well the
kit standards are defined.
The measurement specifications for the 8510 system include measurement calibration
with an Agilent calibration kit. Measurement calibrations made with user defined or
modified calibration kits are not subject to the 8510 performance specifications, although a
procedure similar to the standard verification procedure may be used. Contact an Agilent
system engineer for more information.
Calibration Cycle
The recommended system calibration cycle is once every year. However, that does not
extend past the test ports of the test set if non-Agilent cables are used (test port cables, test
fixtures, adapters, etc.). The calibration cycle for the system is unknown with non-Agilent
cables, and must be determined by the owner since the stability, repeatability, and aging
rate characteristics of the test port cables are unknown. The user of the system should
determine the calibration interval based on the amount of use and the degree of cable
movement.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-95
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and
Specifications
The information listed in this section helps to correctly generate specifications, prepare the
program for performance verification, and interpret any results.
8510 System Specification Criteria (Assumptions)
The specifications for any system are valid only when certain conditions are met. Agilent
assumes that the following criteria is met for all specifications.
1. Sources: Synthesizers are in step mode, not ramp mode. Sweepers are in ramp mode.
2. Temperature of System: Uncorrected = 0 to 55 degrees C. Corrected = 23 degrees ± 3
degrees at calibration. Also, ± 1 degree from calibration must be maintained for valid
verification and for measurements within specified uncertainty limits.
3. Reflection/Transmission Test Sets: Use a 10 dB attenuator for 8513 and a 20 dB
attenuator for 8512 on the transmission thru path. These attenuators are available by
ordering 8492A option 20 (20 dB, 7 mm) or 8493C option 10 (10 dB, 3.5 mm). Devices
are connected directly to test port 1 for reflection measurements. For transmission
measurements, the device is connected to test port 1, the attenuator is connected to the
end of the device, and the cable is connected between the attenuator and port 2.
4. System Configurations: Specifications apply to systems configured with hardware items
available in the 8510 specifications database.
5. Test Set Ports, RF Input Connectors, Reference Channel Power: Characteristics for the
test set ports, RF input connectors, and maximum and minimum reference channel
power are defined in the test set manuals.
45 MHz Calibration and Verification
If the verification kit data disc has 45 MHz data, always use the fixed load for the loads
portion of the 45 MHz calibration, and always select the lowband load from the menu.
−800 dB or 180 Degree Values
The program will not display a magnitude value less than –800 dB or a phase value
greater than ± 180 degrees (covers the full Smith chart). Therefore, whenever these values
appear, it is likely that even greater values were calculated. For example, if a magnitude
error is a negative number that is less than –800 dB (for example: –4,000 dB or minus
infinity) it will appear as –800 dB.
8-96
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
Aborting Plots and Printouts with the [ABORT] Key
You can press this softkey whenever you want to stop plotting or printing a program
selection. Use this key instead of turning off the peripheral or pressing the controller STOP
or PAUSE key. Some printers and plotters will continue after [ABORT] is pressed because
data is held in an internal buffer.
NOTE
If incorrect characters or traces appear on the printout, turn OFF the
printer enhancement selection in the software configuration menu.
Adapters (Test Port)
When you use adapters on a test set, the program will calculate and include the adapter
errors. The program compares the test set port connector type to the calibration kit and
determines if an adapter is required for that configuration.
Attention Messages ... and "SCPP" Settings
When the program exercises the 8510 to determine if it and its peripherals are correctly
addressed and responding, it will display a message if there is a problem. This message
will tell you to check the GPIB address. Check the software configuration menu addresses
so that they correspond to the address switches set on the peripherals.
SCPP is an BASIC abbreviation for select code primary address. It is possible to have an
8510 address anywhere from 716 through 3130, depending upon your system address
configuration.
BASIC 5.0 and HP-UX Systems (setting the time on your system)
If you are using BASIC 5.0 that is running from a hard disc shared with an HP-UX system,
you may find that the time displayed by the program is incorrect because BASIC requires
explicit information to set the correct time. Do not use the program to change the system
clock. Instead, use the TIMEZONE IS command to set the correct time and re-run the
program. Refer to the BASIC Language Reference manual.
Calculated Error Terms
Some of the error terms that appear in the specifications are calculated by the program.
They are not fixed values on the database. In both forward and reverse directions, they are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Effective Forward/Reverse Crosstalk
Effective Forward/Reverse Noise on the Trace
Effective Forward/Reverse Noise Floor
Effective Power Ref (out) port 1, 2
Effective Power max (in) port 2, 1
Effective Power min (in) port 2, 1
Effective Dynamic Range (Ref-min) port 2, port 1
Effective Dynamic Range (max-min) port 2, port 1
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-97
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
Connections and Connector Maintenance
Always keep your connectors and cables in good working order by following the
instructions in the respective manuals. As a general rule, clean all connections prior to
calibration and verification with the recommended cleaning solution and lint-free swabs.
Controller Displays and High-Resolution Monitors
Tabular data displays do not stop at the top of each page on the display. If the controller
display memory is not capable of displaying the entire table, you can press any key to stop
the scrolling table and then press any key to continue the display. You can also pause the
program with the BASIC PAUSE or STOP key and then use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
scroll the display. Afterward, you can use the BASIC CONTINUE key to resume program
operation (you may have to reset the BASIC softkeys to menu softkeys by pressing USER or
SHIFT, USER , depending on your keyboard).
8350B Sweep Oscillators as System Sources
Additional magnitude and phase errors are introduced into the system by these sweepers.
Frequency accuracy of 8350B/83592A (25 ±5 degrees C)
BAND:
0
1
2
3
Full Band
Frequency range (GHz)
.01–2.4
2.4–7
7–13.5
13.5–20
.01–20
Ramp sweep (typical)
±5
±6
±25
±30
±50
Ramp sweep (typical, using
Trim Sweep)
±5
±6
±8
±10
±15
Frequency accuracy (MHz):
8510 mm-Wave Systems
Performance verification procedures for mm-wave systems, and the 85106 racked system,
are provided with mm-wave products and documented in 8510 mm-wave system manuals.
8511 Frequency Converter Test Sets
When generating specifications for systems using an 8511 frequency converter test set,
specify the following in the hardware configuration menu:
• No source
• No test port cables
• No cal kit
• No verification kit
When no source is specified, a –20 dBm power level is assumed at the samplers during
calibration.
8-98
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
When a source is chosen, the performance verification software assumes no loss between
the source and samplers, thereby causing the software to show an "overload" on the
samplers.
8511 performance verification procedures and software are provided with the 8511 - they
are not part of this program.
Controller Keyboard Keys
The program is capable of responding to many of the BASIC operating system key presses,
including INSERT CHAR, DELETE CHAR, INSERT LINE, etc.
Controller Displays with Limited Scrolling Capabilities
Some controllers do not have enough screen memory to allow you to scroll through a
display of a table. This is especially true for high resolution monitors. Agilent recommends
that you always print out the specifications.
DUT Length (N cm) and Default S-Parameter Values
A default DUT length and the values of the other three S-parameters will always appear
on uncertainty and dynamic accuracy plots. This length is based on a 10 cm airline. The
DUT length for data sheet values is 0 cm.
For the reflection plots (S11 or S22), the values of the other three S-parameters; will be = 0
(linear). For transmission plots (S21 and S12), S11 and S22 = 0 (linear), and S21 = S12.
Explanation of the Wording on Tables
Origin = date the verification kit was certified
Factory = verification kit disc data
Field = uncertainty calculated by the program
Magnitude Errors Due to Device Frequency Response
When measuring high frequency selective devices, 8350B frequency errors can cause
additional magnitude uncertainty. As shown in the following filter measurement,
frequency errors cause a shift in the measured data, resulting in a difference between the
measured data and the actual data. Also, the measurement data shows increased noise
due to the residual FM of the sweeper.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-99
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
Figure 8-20
Measurement Calibration Method
Before verification, you must do a full two-port calibration for systems with S-parameter
test sets and a one-path two-port calibration for systems with reflection/transmission test
sets.
The calibration method selected in the program is based on the type of load you use: sliding
load, offset load, broadband load, or TRL.
Phase Errors Due to Device Electrical Length
In measurements of devices with finite electrical length, the frequency accuracy of the
sweeper causes additional uncertainty in phase measurements. The phase uncertainty DQ
is given by the following equation:
DQ = (−360/c)(F)(L)
Where c is the propagation velocity in a vacuum (3x1010cm/sec), DF is the frequency
accuracy specification of the sweeper in ramp mode, and L is the length of the device under
test. The following plot shows this uncertainty for the 8350B/83592A:
8-100
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
Figure 8-21
NIST Numbers
The National Institute of Standards Technology (NIST) measures Agilent standards and
returns the results to Agilent with a test number and a date.
NIST numbers are supplied with the certificate of calibration that comes with your
verification kit. The numbers are kept on record, at Agilent. They are used to document the
traceable path of the measured kit data to NIST Below is a typical set of numbers:
738/236940-86
738/234708-85
738/230170-83
731/237627-86
233661
NOTE
These numbers are supplied and authorized for use by NIST. They refer
to device tests made by NIST The 83, 85, and 86 numbers that appear
after the dash (-) are the latest revision dates for each test. Contact
Agilent if you have any further questions regarding these numbers.
Omit Isolation Measurement for 8350B Sources
If you are using an 8350B source, omit the isolation measurement in the measurement
calibration sequence. The isolation measurement removes crosstalk, but requires a large
number of averages since this type of error occurs below the noise floor. The software sets
the 8350B to 128 averages which is not enough averages for a correct measurement of the
crosstalk. Unless the number of averages is 1024 or more, the measurement creates a
larger error than it is correcting for. If 1024 or more averages are taken, the measurement
calibration process would take approximately 30 minutes. Also, the test sets do not
introduce enough crosstalk that this error removal is critical.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-101
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
Parameter Step Resolution (Software Configuration Menu)
The software configuration menu allows you to specify how many data points will be used
to generate plot traces. This is called the parameter step resolution size. Using this feature
you can increase or decrease the trace resolution on plots. Since the grid scale is always a
fixed size, you can select tabular data to examine exact scale values.
Performance Verification Criteria
A complete performance verification requires that you measure all of the devices in your
kit. Do not change any of the 8510 parameters or stimulus settings that the program uses
for your system. The averaging factor should always be 1024 for synthesizers (for example,
8360/8340/8341) and 128 for sweepers (for example 8350B). For sweepers, the program
always sets the 8510 sweep time to 500 milliseconds. Remember that sweep time does not
apply to synthesizers because the system is in step mode.The four devices are slightly
different for each configuration. However, every kit has one of the following:
• 20 dB attenuator
• 40 or 50 dB attenuator
• Airline (length varies with kit type)
• 25 ohm mismatch airline (length varies with kit type)
NOTE
Systems with an 8350 as a source use a shorted airline instead of the 25
ohm mismatch airline. This is because of the sweeper's phase and
magnitude errors (explained in “8350B Sweep Oscillators as System
Sources” in this reference section). Use the flush short from the
calibration kit.
Plotters and Printers
The verification program requires that the printer be connected on the controller's GPIB.
The plotter can be on either the 8510 system bus (default state in the software
configuration menu) or the controller's GPIB. When it is connected to the 8510 system bus,
plots can be made from the 8510 display or from the controller display. However, the 8510
does not have to be connected to a controller to generate specifications. Therefore, without
an 8510 connected and running, you would connect the plotter to the controller's GPIB.
Plot Label Information
If you set the date and time when you first run the program, the correct date and time
when the plot is made appears in the upper right corner of the plot.
Plots will also be labeled with the system hardware models. However, some of the sources
will not have their correct A, B, or C labels. For example, 8340B sources will be labeled as
8340A. This is only on plots and does not mean that the program is faulty. The program
must eliminate the slash (/) that occurs after hardware configuration labels such as
8340A/B.
8-102
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
Plotter Pens
The software configuration menu lists pen numbers (#) and colors. If your plotter has a pen
wheel, the pen numbers correspond to the wheel numbers. Otherwise, plotters with only
two pens use the first and second pens listed. The color relates to color monitors and the
choice of pen colors is arbitrary. When the plotter is connected to the 8510 system bus, you
can use the 8510 COPY key on the front panel to access its plotting capabilities for plotting
8510 displays.
Plot Traces on the Controller Display
Some traces may appear to be missing from program plots that show four frequency bands.
Whenever three traces appear (instead of four), it is because the bands have the same
values and are overlaid. This overlay cannot be distinguished on low resolution monitors
or plotters. For example, the S11 magnitude uncertainty specifications for an 8510 using
an 8340 source and an 8514 test set have the same uncertainty values for traces labeled 8
to 18 GHz and 18 to 20 GHz. Plot traces are designed for all controller/CRT combinations,
but they appear best on high resolution color monitors.
When the program is calculating the values for plot traces, it beeps each time a trace is
calculated. Therefore, if you hear four beeps, but only see three traces, that indicates that
four traces were generated but one is overlaid on the other.
Program Modifications
It is not possible to modify this program. Contact an Agilent system engineer for more
information. If you experience a problem with the program, contact Agilent with a
description of the problem.
Ramp Mode Operation for Synthesizers
Ramp sweep is tested in “Frequency Test Procedures” as part of the system performance
verification. The performance verification software sets the synthesizer to a step mode for
a system using a synthesizer as the source. Do not set the synthesizer to ramp sweep
because the program will not correctly execute its commands in that mode. (However, the
program will switch the source back to the step mode.)
Remote or Local Operation
The program automatically sets the 8510 to local (front panel) operation whenever it
expects you to press any keys on the 8510. For example, this would happen when you are
expected to make a measurement calibration. Remote operation occurs whenever the
program is controlling the 8510 over the GPIB bus.
System Hang-Ups or Other Problems
If the system or the controller will not respond during verification, press LOCAL and
PRESET on the 8510, and re-run the program. If a printer is connected to the system, cycle
the power to all the instruments (including the printer).
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-103
Performance Verification and Specifications
Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications
Test Set Channel Signal Path Specifications: a1, b1, a2, b2
These specifications refer to the errors contributed by the test set from the test port,
through the coupler, and onto the sampler (down-converter). The tables show values that
are already included in the data sheet or system specifications. Their use is limited to
inspecting the flowgraph error terms that exist between the coupler or bridge and the
sampler.
Test Set Rear Panel Extension Links
The program will prompt you to use the long or short test set rear panel extension links,
depending on the test set and the cables you have selected.
A rule-of-thumb for these extension links is:
• Reflection/transmission test sets use short links
• S-parameter test sets use long links
Trim Sweep Procedure
The 8510 trim sweep procedure is especially designed for use with 8350B, 8340, and 8341
sources (not necessary for 8360 in ramp mode). The procedure will improve the frequency
accuracy of your system. It does this by aligning more closely the 8510 frequencies to those
of the sweeper. Refer to “8350B Sweep Oscillators as System Sources” in this reference
section.
Uncertainty and Dynamic Accuracy Limits: Upper or Lower
The uncertainty and dynamic accuracy menu (in the uncertainty portion of the software)
allows you to select lower or upper uncertainty limits. The limits only apply to
transmission measurements. If you did select the upper limit for a reflection
measurement, its value would be the same as the lower limit.
For transmission measurements, the limits are the worst case values that will add to or
subtract from the measurement. These limits are derived from the equations:
Upper Limit = 20 log [ 1 Uij ⁄ Sij ]
Lower Limit = 20 log [ 1 Uij ⁄ Sij ]
where U is the uncertainty and S is the measured S-parameter, and ij is a vector number.
Whenever Uij/Sij = 1, the worst case is be times the log of 2 (6 dB) for the upper limit, and
20 times the log of 0 (minus infinity) for the lower limit. This is due to vector numbers
adding in phase and subtracting out of phase.
For example, if you were measuring a 60 dB band-stop filter, and the upper limit was 6 dB,
you could add 6 dB to the measurement: −60 dB − 6 dB = −54 dB. And, if the lower limit
was minus infinity, the measurement of the filter could be considered −54 dB or less.
8-104
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Performance Verification and Specifications
Performance Test Record
Performance Test Record
The complete system performance verification record includes the printout from the
performance verification software, this test record, and a certificate of calibration.
Use this sheet to record the results of the frequency tests. You may wish to copy this sheet
to retain it as a master.
Table 8-13
Performance Test Record
Test Facility ______________________________
Report Number ________________________________
_____________________________________
__________________________________________
_____________________________________
Date ______________________________________
_____________________________________
Date of Last System Calibration _________________
_____________________________________
__________________________________________
Tested By ________________________________
Customer ______________________________________
Text Equipment Used
Trace Number
Cal Due Date
1. Frequency Counter _____________________
________________
___________________
Ambient temperature ____________________ºC
Relative Humidity ______________________________%
Ambient temperature at measurement
calibration ______________________________ºC
Ambient temperature at performance verification
_______________________________________________ºC
Model Number
8510C On-Site Service Manual
8-105
Performance Verification and Specifications
Performance Test Record
Table 8-14
Performance Test Record
Test Description
Minimum
Specification
Results
Maximum
Specification
Measurement
Uncertaintya
CW Frequency Accuracy
Worst Case Value:
45 MHzb
44.999955 MHz
45.000045 MHz
±10 Hz
2 GHzc
1.999998 GHz
2.000002 GHz
±10 Hz
20 GHzd
19.99998 GHz
20.00002 GHz
±4 kHz
26.5 GHze
626.4999735 GHz
26.5000265 GHz
±5 kHz
40 GHzf
39.99996 GHz
40.00004 GHz
±5 kHz
50 GHzg
24.999975 GHz
25.000025 GHz
±5 kHz
Start Freq
0.1% of sweep
(8360)
±150 kHz
Stop Freq
1% of sweep
Swept Frequency Accuracy
Worst Case Value:
(8340/41)
d
Worst Case Value:
Start Freq
0. 1 % of sweep
(8360)
Stop Freq
1% of sweep
(8340/41)
a.
±150 kHz
The measurement uncertainty is quoted for these performance tests using only the recommended models
specified in Table
8-1. The measurement uncertainty quoted represents limits of ±3 times the equivalent
standard deviation (3s) and is intended to represent a 99% confidence level.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
8-106
For all sources except 83622/24.
83622/24 only
83620/21/22/23/24 and 8341 only.
83631/40/51 and 8340 only.
83640 only
83651 only
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9
System Installation
9-1
System Installation
Overview
Overview
This chapter provides instructions for installing and interconnecting an 8510 system in
either a cabinet or a bench-top configuration. System installation consists of the following
steps:
1. Preparing the site
2. Checking the shipment and unpacking the system
3. Configuring and connecting the system
4. Checking the system operation
The basic system is defined as follows:
• 8510C (which consists of an 85101C display/processor and an 85102 IF detector)
• 851x test set
• Microwave source
(Peripherals, such as controllers, plotters, printers, disk drives, and millimeter devices,
may be added to the basic system.)
Options
The following options are available for the 8510C.
Option Number
Description
008
Adds pulse capability
010
Adds time domain capability
908
Adds a rack flange mounting kit (without front handles)
910
Adds a duplicate manual set
913
Adds a rack flange mounting kit (with front handles)
W30
Extended service warranty, 2-year return-to-Agilent
W31
Extended service warranty, 2-year on-site
Scheduling Installation
If you have ordered on-site installation and verification, be sure that all system
components have been delivered, unpacked, and collected at the installation site. See
“Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System” on page 97. Also be sure the site
preparation is complete, as described in this chapter. Then contact the Agilent customer
engineer to schedule the installation and system verification.
9-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Preparing the Site
Preparing the Site
Environmental Requirements
The environment must meet the conditions listed in the table below.
Table 9-1
Environmental Conditions
Temperature
For operation
+5 °C to +40 °C (41°F to 104 °F)
For measurement calibration
+20 °C to +26 °C (+68 °F to +79 °F)
For performance verification
±1 °C (±1.8 °F) of the measurement calibration
temperature
For storage
−40 °C to +65 °C −40 °F to +158 °F)
Humidity
For operation
5% to 95% at +40 °C or less (non-condensing)
For storage
5% to 95% at +65 °C or less (non-condensing)
Pressure Altitude
For operation
less than 4,600 meters (15,000 feet)
For storage
less than 4,600 meters (15,000 feet)
NOTE
Accuracy enhancement is dependent, in part, on a stable temperature
environment. If your environmental temperature has a tendency to
fluctuate more than ±1 ºC, periodically perform a system verification to
ensure that the system has been correctly calibrated.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-3
System Installation
Preparing the Site
System Heating and Cooling
Install air conditioning and heating, if required.
CAUTION
Ventilation Requirements
When installing the product in a cabinet, the convection into and out of
the product must not be restricted. The ambient temperature (outside
the cabinet) must be less than the maximum operating temperature of
the product by 4 °C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet. If the
total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then
forced convection must be used.
Air conditioning requirements depend on the amount of heat produced by the instruments.
Use the BTU/hour ratings from the table below to determine the total rating of your
system. Each VA rating is multiplied by 3.4 to determine the BTU/hour rating of each
instrument.
To convert the total BTU/hour figure to “tons,” divide the total BTU/hour value by 12,000.
A “ton” is the amount of heat required to melt a ton (907 kg) of ice in one hour.
Table 9-2
Maximum VA Ratings and BTU/Hour Rating of Instruments
Agilent Instrument
Maximum VA Rating 1
VA Subtotal
Maximum
BTU/hour
BTU/hour
Subtotal
Standard Equipment
85101 Display Processor
85102 IF Detector
8340 Synthesized Sweeper or
8360 Synthesized Sweeper or
8350 with Plug- In
851x RF Test Set
Standard System Total
250
210
500
400
375
145
Accessory Equipment
9000 Series 300
250
19 inch CRT 98751A, 98752A,
420
98753A, 98754A
16 inch CRT 98785A, 98789A
200
Typical Hard Disk Drive
65
HP LaserJet II
170 to 800
HP PaintJet
20
HP 7440A Plotter
100
System Total
1. Values are based on 120 Vac supplied to each instrument at 60 Hz
CAUTION
9-4
850
714
1,700
1,360
1,275
323
850
1,430
680
222
580 to 2,720
68
340
This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and
Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 61010-1 and 664 respectively.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Preparing the Site
Space Requirements
An area must be provided for the system instruments. The following table lists the space
required for different configurations and includes the additional space for proper
ventilation.
Table 9-3
System Space Requirements
Height
Width
Depth
85043C System Cabineta
(without work surface)
132 cm
(52 in)
60 cm
(24 in)
92 cm
(36 in)
Bench-Top Systemb
(arranged as single stack)
(arranged as two stacks)
60 cm
(24 in)
–
–
45 cm
(18 in)
113cm
(45 in)
60 cm
(24 in)
60 cm
(24 in)
a. Refer to Figure 9-4 for a recommended cabinet configuration.
b. Refer to Figure 9-5 for bench-top configurations.
Electrical Requirements
To determine the power requirements of a particular system, add the volt/amp ratings of
the individual instruments. These ratings can be found on the rear panel of the instrument
near the line module. The voltage and frequency information can also be found in the same
general location.
WARNING
Install the instrument so that the ON/OFF switch is readily
identifiable and is easily reached by the operator. The ON/OFF
switch or the detachable power cord is the instrument
disconnecting device. It disconnects the mains circuits from the
mains supply before other parts of the instrument.
Alternatively, an externally installed switch or circuit breaker
(which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the
operator) may be used as a disconnecting device.
Example 8510 System (includes test equipment and peripherals)
• Voltage: 90 to 127, 195 to 253 volts ac
•
Power: 1100 VA maximum
• Frequency: 47.5 to 66 Hertz
NOTE
In addition to the power outlets required for operation of the 8510
system, three power line outlets should be provided for service
equipment.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-5
System Installation
Preparing the Site
Electromagnetic Interference
8510 conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with German
Messempfaenger–Postverfuergung 526/527/1979 (Kennzeichnung Mit
F–Nummer/Funkschutzzeichen).
Non-Agilent System Cabinet Requirements
Using a non-Agilent system cabinet may result in measurement inaccuracy and reliability
problems due to overheating. The following conditions must be met when a system is
installed in a non-Agilent cabinet.
• Air temperature at the fan intake of each instrument must not exceed the ambient
temperature specified for that instrument
• Minimum clearance for adequate cooling:
✓ 0.5 in. between stacked instruments
✓ 3.0 in. between instrument side and cabinet
✓ 6.0 in. between rear panel and instrument and cabinet
Other Requirements
Install a telephone next to the system in case assistance is needed.
9-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System
Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System
Checking the Shipment
Ensure that all system components ordered have arrived by comparing the shipping forms
to the original system purchase order.
Keep the shipping containers in one area and do not unpack them until all the instruments
are delivered. As you unpack the system components, compare the serial numbers on the
shipping forms to the serial numbers on the instruments.
Unpacking the System
If any container or instrument is damaged or incomplete, save the packing materials and
notify both the carrier and Agilent. See “Contacting Agilent” on page iii.
WARNING
Some of the instruments are heavy and can cause injury.
Unpack them on the floor, and handle them carefully.
When you unpack the 8510, check that you have received the accessories illustrated in
Figure 9-1.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-7
System Installation
Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System
Figure 9-1
Accessories Supplied
1. GPIB Cable
9. 85102 Adjustments Software Disk
2. IF Display Interconnect Cable
10. Specifications and Performance Verification Disk
3. Power Cables (2)
11. Software Toolkit Disk
4. BNC Cables (2)
12. Operating and Programming Manual
5. RS-232 Cable
13. Keyword Dictionary
6. External Display Cable (for CRT only)
14. Test Sets and Accessories Binder
7. Operating System Disk
15. On-Site Service Manual
8. Master Calibration Data Disk
16. Pocket Quick Reference
9-8
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System
Unpacking the System Cabinet
CAUTION
The cabinet packaging is designed for the system cabinet standing
upright on a pallet. Do not store or install instruments in the cabinet
when it is on its side or back. Major damage to the instruments and to
the cabinet can occur.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-9
System Installation
Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System
Figure 9-2
9-10
Unpacking the System
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System
Repacking
If it is necessary to ship any of the instruments in the 8510 system, pack each instrument
separately in a double-wall cardboard carton made of 350-pound test material. Place
enough shock-absorbing material around all sides of the instrument to prevent any
movement inside the container. Containers and materials similar to those used for factory
shipments are available from Agilent. See “Contacting Agilent” on page iii.
If an instrument is being returned to Agilent for service, please attach a tag indicating the
nature of the problem and the person to contact for more information about the service
required. Identify the instrument by model number and full serial number and list the
other system instruments it is used with.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-11
System Installation
Configuring and Connecting the System
Configuring and Connecting the System
Line Voltage and Fuses
Set the line voltage for each instrument according to the voltage of the ac power source.
Typically, line voltage is set with a line voltage selector switch or a voltage selector card at
the rear panel of the instrument.
CAUTION
Severe damage to the instruments can result if line voltage settings are
incorrect when power is applied.
Use an autotransformer if the line voltage is not within the following voltage ranges: 90 to
127 V, or 195 to 253 V. Some of the instruments may have wider ranges as noted in their
operating and service manuals.
WARNING
Death by electrocution is possible if both the common terminal
of an autotransformer and the protective earth terminals of the
8510 system instruments are not connected to earth ground.
CAUTION
Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this product.
Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may
cause product damage.
Verify the value of the line voltage fuses in all instruments of the system. The correct fuse
values are listed on the rear panel of each instrument.
9-12
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Configuring and Connecting the System
Source Compatibility Requirements
If you are installing a source that is not the newest version available, it must have the
modification or firmware revision or both noted in the table below for 8510 compatibility.
Table 9-4
Source Compatibility and Modification Kits
Instrument
Firmware Revision Number
(or Higher)
Modification Kit
8360 series synthesized sweeper
8340A synthesized sweeper
8340B synthesized sweeper
8341A synthesized sweeper
8341B synthesized sweeper
8350A sweep oscillator
all
all
all
all
all
6
unnecessary
unnecessary
unnecessary
unnecessary
unnecessary
8350B sweep oscillator
83522A RF plug-in
83525A/B RF plug-in
83540A/B RF plug-in
83545A RF plug-in
83550A RF plug-in
83570A RF plug-in
83572A RF plug-in
83590A RF plug-in
83592A RF plug-in
83592B RF plug-in
83592C RF plug-in
83594A RF plug-in
83595A RF plug-in
83595C RF plug-in
83596A RF plug-in
83597A RF plug-in
8360-series synthesizer
8620 sweep oscillator
86200-series RF Plug-ins
1. Converts 8350A to 8510 compatibility
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
all
cannot be used
cannot be used
08350-601001
08350-60101
83525-60074
83525-60074
83525-60074
83525-60074
83550-60041
83525-60074
83572-60074
83590-60074
83592-60074
83592-60100
83592-60102
83594-60074
83595-60074
83595-60104
83596-60002
83597-60021
unnecessary
Note: The sources listed above are the only compatible sources as of December 1990. Consult your
Agilent customer engineer for additional information.
To check the firmware revision on your 8350, press SHIFT, 4, 9. The revision appears in the
FREQUENCY/TIME window.
To check the firmware revision on your 83500 series RF plug-in, press SHIFT, 9, 9. The
revision appears in the POWER window.
The firmware revision for all synthesized sweepers appears when the instrument power is
switched on.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-13
System Installation
Configuring and Connecting the System
Configuring the System in a Cabinet
If your system will be used in a system cabinet follow the configuration instructions here.
Otherwise, refer to “Configuring the System on a Bench-Top” later in this chapter.
Preconfigured Systems
If the system is shipped in the system cabinet, inspect for loosened connections and
conclude the installation procedure with “Checking System Operation” later in this
chapter.
Systems that Are Not Preconfigured
1. Place the empty cabinet in the operating area. Then lower the feet at the bottom corners
of the cabinet to prevent movement.
2. Remove the instrument feet and pull-out instruction card assemblies (if any).
3. Attach the rack-mount flanges with the instrument placed partly on the support
shelves of the cabinet.
Figure 9-3
Attaching Flanges to Instruments with and without Handles
Slide each instrument into the cabinet and secure it with the dress screws provided.
See Figure 9-4 for a recommended cabinet configuration.
9-14
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Configuring and Connecting the System
Recommended Cabinet Configuration
Figure 9-4 illustrates a recommended system cabinet configuration. Shown is a typical
configuration of a standard 85107B system installed in an 85043C system rack.
Figure 9-4
85107B System in 85043C System Rack (Typical)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-15
System Installation
Configuring and Connecting the System
Configuring the System on a Bench-Top
Set up instruments in one of the configurations in Figure 9-5. Different configurations are
possible, including single stack and equal stack (2x2) styles.
Figure 9-5
Typical Bench-Top Configurations
Model
Width
Height
Depth
Approximate Weight
85101C with a CRT display
41.875 cm
(16.75 in)
17.5 cm
21.25 in
(53.125 cm)
22.3 kg
(49 lb)
41.875 cm
(16.75 in)
17.5 cm
(7 in)
21.25 in
(53.125 cm)
13.2 kg
(33 lb)
41.875 cm
(16.75 in)
13.126 cm
(5.25 in)
21.25 in
(53.125 cm)
20.5 kg
(45 lb)
85101C with an LCD
85102B
9-16
(7 in)
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Making System Connections
Making System Connections
The 8510 system requires that several types of cables be connected (see Figure 9-6).
Figure 9-6
System Connections
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-17
System Installation
Making System Connections
8360 Series Source GPIB (HP-IB) Language Switch
When using an 8360 series source, its rear panel GPIB (HP–IB) language switches should
be set as shown in Figure 9-7.
Darkened switch positions indicate a depressed switch.
Figure 9-7
9-18
8360-Series Source GPIB (HP-IB) Language Switch
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Making System Connections
Grounding Power Cables
WARNING
An uninterrupted safety earth ground must be provided from
the main power source to the supplied power cable(s) to
prevent injury or death.
In compliance with international safety standards, the 8510 system instruments are
equipped with 3-wire power cables.
For systems using the cabinet, connect the instruments directly to the power strip inside
the cabinet, using the 3-conductor grounded power cables supplied with the system
cabinet. Do not modify these power cables.
Reference Port Extension Cables
(not applicable for 85110, 8516, 8517)
Connect the reference port extension cables (rpecs), as indicated in the following figure, to
balance the test port signal path with the reference signal path. Part numbers of the long
and short rpecs are listed in the test set manuals.
Recommended When Using Ramp Mode
Figure 9-8
Reference Port Extension Cables
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-19
System Installation
Making System Connections
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) Cables
GPIB allows either the system display/processor or an external controller to operate the
various instruments of the system. (GPIB interface operates according to IEEE 488–1978
and IEC 625 standards and IEEE 728–1982 recommended practices. References to GPIB
and HP-IB refer to the same protocol.)
NOTE
Always turn off power to instruments when connecting GPIB cables.
As many as fifteen instruments can be connected in parallel on GPIB, but proper voltage
levels and timing relationships must be maintained. Observe the following limitations:
• 2 meters (6 feet) is the maximum cable length to each instrument
• 20 meters (65 feet) is the maximum total cable length between all units.
The following GPIB cables are available:
10833C 4 m (13 feet)
10833B 2 m (6 feet)
10833A 1 m (3 feet)
10833D 0.5 m (1.5 feet)
Serial Printer Setup
1. See Figure 9-9. Connect the desired 8510C serial input to the laser printer serial input
and turn on the laser printer.
2. Use the laser printer controls to select the serial bus, and select a BAUD rate of 9,600.
Refer to the laser printer user’s guide for instructions. These settings will remain in
effect even if you turn the laser printer OFF.
For further information about printer setup, including parity, stop bit, and so forth, refer to
the following information: “Address of Printer: RS-232 Port #1” in the 8510C Keyword
Dictionary, and “Copy” in the 8510C Operating and Programming Manual.
9-20
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Making System Connections
Figure 9-9
Laser Printer Connections
Parallel Printer Setup
As shown in Figure 9-9, the parallel setup requires a GPIB (HP-IB) to parallel port
adapter. In order to use currently available printers, adapters, such as MicroPlot 50A and
MicroPrint 45CH, are available from Intelligent Interfaces. For more information, consult
their website at: www.intelligent interfaces.com.
1. If using the Microprint 45CH, you must set it to address 01 as explained in its user’s
guide.
2. Connect the 45CH GPIB input to the 8510C system bus.
3. Connect the output of the 45CH to the laser printer Centronics input.
4. Make sure the 45CH ac adapter module is set to the proper line voltage, then plug it in.
5. Make sure the 8510C is set up for an (GPIB) HP–IB printer at address 701. On the
8510C. Press LOCAL, [MORE], [PRINTER: HP-IB].
6. Turn on the laser printer.
For further information about printer setup, refer to “Copy” in the 8510C Operating and
Programming Manual.
Switching On Power
• In systems with controllers, switch on power to the controller last, 85101 next to last.
• In systems without controllers, switch on power to the 85101 last.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-21
System Installation
Making System Connections
Making a Backup Operating System Disk
Hold down the =MARKER key on the analyzer and cycle the power on the analyzer (switch
on 85101 last). Holding down the =MARKER key makes the instrument detect a failure so it
will show self test error 14, sub test 2. Press =MARKER again to enter the power-up self test
menu.
Disable the write-protect feature on the blank disk by sliding the tab to the closed position.
Insert the disk into the analyzer and press 2, 1, =MARKER. The disk is initialized when the
analyzer display shows “INITIALIZATION COMPLETE.”
Press 2, 0, =MARKER. When the disk is recorded, write–protect it by sliding the tab to the
open position.
Checking System Operation
The following system operation checks confirm that the system is functional and ready for
performance verification or operation or both. These simple checks are optional and
primarily serve to establish confidence in the integrity of the system.
8510 Self-Test
Press the analyzer front panel TEST activator to run the self-test sequence. Observe the
display for the following sequence:
•
•
•
•
TESTING
LOADING OPERATING SYSTEM
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS
RECALLING INSTRUMENT STATE
Preset Check
Press INSTRUMENT STATE, RECALL, [MORE], [FACTORY PRESET] on the analyzer. The
display should show a trace similar to the figure below.
Figure 9-10
9-22
Typical Preset State Display
8510C On-Site Service Manual
System Installation
Making System Connections
S–Parameter Test Set Check
1. Press S12 (in the PARAMETER area of the analyzer) to further confirm that the system
is ready for performance verification or operation. The trace should drop to the bottom
graticule of the display.
2. Press AUTO in the RESPONSE area of the analyzer. The trace should reappear near the
center of the display, probably with a change in scale.
3. Connect an RF cable to ports 1 and 2 of the test set. The trace should rise toward the top
of the display.
4. Press AUTO again. The trace should reappear near the center of the display, probably
with another change in scale.
User Parameters (Unratioed Power) Check
Refer to “Unratioed Power Failures” in the troubleshooting chapter for a procedure to
check the unratioed power.
This concludes the basic system tests. To thoroughly check the performance of the system,
refer to procedures in Chapter 8 , “Performance Verification and Specifications.” To operate
the system, refer to the operating manual.
In Case of Difficulty
Incorrect operation can be indicated by:
• Error messages or error codes on the analyzer display
• Abnormal system response or operation
The most likely causes of problems for newly installed systems are poor cable connections
or system bus address errors.
Switch off the line power to all instruments and carefully recheck all cable connections and
GPIB addresses, referring to Figure 9-6. Then power-up the system instruments again in
the correct sequence.
If the problem still exists, refer to the troubleshooting chapter or contact your local Agilent
customer engineer.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
9-23
System Installation
Making System Connections
9-24
8510C On-Site Service Manual
10
Preventive Maintenance
10-1
Preventive Maintenance
Overview
Overview
Preventive maintenance consists of five tasks that should be performed at least every six
months. If the instrument is used daily on a production line or in a harsh environment, the
tasks should be performed more often. Preventive maintenance contains these tasks:
• Maintain proper air flow.
• Inspect and clean connectors.
• Clean the glass filter and CRT or Clean the LCD.
• Degauss the display (CRT only).
• Inspect the error terms.
Maintain Proper Air Flow
It is necessary to maintain constant air flow in and around your 8510 system. If the
message, “CAUTION: Test Set Is Too Hot!!” is displayed, immediately inspect for items (a
piece of paper for example) on the test set fan. Items on top of the test set or around the
system may also impede the air flow. The test set will not shut down if it becomes too hot!
If the 85101 or 85102 overheat, the system will shut down until the temperature drops to
the operating range.
Additionally, it is recommended that the source fan filter (if any) be inspected once a week
and cleaned as necessary.
10-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Preventive Maintenance
Inspect and Clean Connectors
Inspect and Clean Connectors
WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the 8510 system from
the mains before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly
dampened with water to clean the external parts. Do not clean
internally.
For accurate and repeatable measurement results, it is essential that connectors on
calibration and verification devices, test ports, cables and other devices be cleaned and
gaged regularly. It is also necessary that standard devices are handled and stored properly,
and that all connectors are regularly inspected for signs of damage. This not only ensures
the best performance from the connectors, but also extends their life. Refer to a calibration
kit manual for a detailed description of microwave connector care techniques. This manual
also describes proper techniques for making connections.
Visually inspect the test port connectors. They should be clean and the center conductor
pin is centered. If so, gage the microwave connectors (gages are supplied in Agilent
calibration kits). Confirm that the center pin recession is correct. Refer to the
“Specifications” section in the test set manual for connector specifications.
Also inspect, clean, and gage the connectors of the calibration kit and verification kit
devices. Refer to the kit manuals for center pin recession specifications.
Clean the Test Set Rear Panel Extensions
Over a period of time, the test set rear extensions can affect the performance of the 8510
system unless they, and the corresponding bulkhead connectors they are connected to, are
kept clean. Use a swab and alcohol to clean the rear extensions and the bulkhead
connectors. Be careful not to damage the center conductors of the bulkhead connectors.
Notice that these bulkhead connectors provide a direct path to the samplers. The
appropriate static precautions, as outlined in the Microwave Connector Card and test set
manual, should be used to prevent damage to the static-sensitive samplers.
8510C On-Site Service Manual
10-3
Preventive Maintenance
Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the LCD
Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the LCD
85101C Equipped with CRT Display
A gasket between the CRT and glass filter limits air dust infiltration between them.
Therefore, cleaning the outer surface of the glass filter is usually sufficient. Use a soft cloth
and, if necessary, a cleaning solution recommended for optical coated surfaces. Agilent part
number 8500-2163 is one such solution.
If, after cleaning the outer surface of the glass filter, the CRT appears dark or dirty or
unfocused, clean the inner surface of the filter, and the CRT.
1. Remove the softkeys cover (a plastic cover through which the front panel softkeys
protrude). Carefully insert a thin, flat screwdriver blade (or your fingernail) between
the upper left corner of the softkeys cover and the glass filter (see Figure 10-1). Be
extremely careful not to scratch or break the glass. Pull the cover forward and off.
2. Remove the two screws that are now uncovered.
Figure 10-1
Removing the Glass Filter
3. Remove the display bezel assembly by pulling out the end that is now free. Pivot the
bezel around its left edge until it is released.
4. Clean the CRT surface and the inner glass filter surface gently.
5. Allow the surfaces to dry and then reassemble the instrument.
85101C Equipped with an LCD
The LCD is covered by a protective glass and bezel assembly. Clean the surface of the glass
and bezel using a sort cloth and, if necessary, a cleaning solution recommended for optical
coated surfaces. Agilent part number 8500-2163 is on such solution.
10-4
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Preventive Maintenance
Degauss (Demagnetize) the Display (CRT Only)
Degauss (Demagnetize) the Display (CRT Only)
If the display becomes magnetized, or if color purity is a problem, cycle the power several
times.
Leave the instrument off for at least 15 seconds before turning it on. This will activate the
automatic degaussing circuit in the analyzer display.
If this is insufficient to achieve color purity, a commercially available demagnetizer must
be used (either a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser can be used). Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions keeping in mind the following: it is imperative that at first it
be placed no closer than 4 inches (10 cm) from the face of the CRT while demagnetizing the
display. If this distance is too far to completely demagnetize the CRT, try again at a slightly
closer distance until the CRT is demagnetized. Generally, degaussing is accomplished with
a slow rotary motion of the degausser, moving it in a circle of increasing radius while
simultaneously moving away from the CRT. Figure 10-2 shows the motion for degaussing
the display.
CAUTION
Applying an excessively strong magnetic field to the CRT face can
destroy the CRT.
Like most displays, the CRT can be sensitive to large magnetic fields generated from
unshielded motors. In countries that use 50 Hz, some 10 Hz jitter may be observed. If this
problem is observed, remove the device causing the magnetic field.
Figure 10-2
Motion for Degaussing the Display
8510C On-Site Service Manual
10-5
Preventive Maintenance
Inspect the Error Terms
Inspect the Error Terms
Error terms (E-terms or calibration coefficients) are an indication of the condition of the
instrument, its calibration kits, and cables. When tracked over a period of time, error
terms can signal and identify system component and performance degradation. Error term
comparisons are best made with data generated periodically by the same instrument and
calibration kit (the kit normally used with the analyzer). For this reason, generating error
terms at the time of installation and at regular intervals thereafter is recommended.
A log book can be a helpful to store the error term plots. Error term plots are generated by
performing the verification procedure.
Refer to the operating manual for information on how to perform a full 2-port or TRL
2-port microwave calibration. To inspect the error terms or compare them to typical values,
refer to “Error Terms” in Chapter 4 , “Main Troubleshooting Procedure.”
10-6
8510C On-Site Service Manual
11
Instrument History
11-1
Instrument History
Overview
Overview
This manual applies directly to analyzers with serial prefix numbers indicated on the title
page. If your analyzer has a lower serial prefix and you need additional documentation, it
will be located in this section.
The original HP 85101C display/processor incorporated a cathode ray tube (CRT). The
current design incorporates a liquid crystal display (LCD). In this manual, references to
either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted.
11-2
8510C On-Site Service Manual
Index
Numerics
8340 synthesized sweeper
connecting to system, 4-8
source compatibility using, 4-14
system compatibility using, 4-8,
9-13
8350B
omit isolation measurement for,
8-101
sweep oscillator, as system
source, 8-98
8360, source front panel, 5-6
8360-series synthesized sweepers
front panel emulator,
description, 4-22
8510 system, definition of, 1-5
85101
bottom internal with CRT, 5-14
bottom internal with LCD, 5-26
cabinet parts, 5-21, 5-33
disk drive, 6-9
display/processor assemblies,
3-10
front panel external with CRT,
5-15
front panel internal with CRT,
5-17
front panel internal with LCD,
5-28
motherboard/card cage, 6-14
power supply troubleshooting,
4-101
power supply, simplified block
diagram, 4-98
replacement procedures, 6-2,
6-5
RPG (rotary pulse generator),
6-8
sides, 5-20, 5-32
top internal with CRT, 5-12
top internal with LCD, 5-24
troubleshooting power supply,
4-97
85101 display/processor, 4-20
85102
adjustments software, part
number, 7-16
board locations, 5-36
bottom internal, 5-42
C1, C2, C3, and C4 capacitors,
6-26
cabinet parts, 5-52, 5-53
cable locations, 5-40
front, 5-43
front panel, 5-47
IF/ detector assemblies, 3-8
IF/ detector tests, 4-20
Index
motherboard, 5-48
power supply summary, 4-97
rear, 5-44
rear panel replacement, 6-27
rectifier, 6-23
replacement procedures, 6-2,
6-21
sides, internal, 5-46
top internal, 5-38
8511 frequency converter test
sets, 3-5
A
A1 front panel, 6-6
A10 preregulator, 4-101
output voltages, 4-107
A10 preregulator replacement,
6-13
A11 CRT display, 6-10
A14 display processor test, 4-62
A14 display RAM test, 4-62
A14 GSP, 4-44
A14J4 pinouts, 4-45
A15 LCD, 4-46
A15 LCD replacement, 6-16
A16 inverter board
troubleshooting, 4-50
A16 inverter troubleshooting,
4-49
A3 post regulator
fuses, 4-109
green LEDs, 4-101
voltages, 4-102
A4 display processor test, 4-62
A4 display RAM test, 4-62
A5 multiplier test, 4-63
A5 processor EPROM test, 4-61
A5 processor RAM test, 4-61
A6 non-volatile memory test, 4-64
A7 data bus test, 4-61
A7 disc controller test, 4-63
A7 public HP-IB test, 4-62
A7 system bus test, 4-63
A7 timer/clock/RS-232 test, 4-62
A9 interrupt system test, 4-63
abbreviation in parts list, 5-4
aborting plots and printouts, 8-86
accessories, 5-6
part numbers, 5-6
accessories supplied, 9-8
adapters, test port, 8-85
ADC cal failed, 4-73
ADC not responding, 4-73
addresses of system instruments,
9-17, 9-18
adjustments, 7-1
background intensity, 7-14
equipment required, 7-9
equipment required for, 7-3
failure during, 7-2
function of, 7-3
individual procedures
clock, 7-28
display degaussing
(demagnetizing), 7-12
display intensity, 7-14
IF amplifier, 7-22
IF mixer, 7-19
sweep ADC gain, 7-16
vertical position and focus,
7-10
individual synchronous
adjuster, 7-25
maximum intensity, 7-15
procedures, table of all, 7-5
related, 7-3
semi-automated
driver files for, 7-4
extension files for, 7-4
tools, 7-3
warning, 7-3
air conditioning of system, 9-4
airflow, 10-2
altitude requirements, 9-3
amplifier adjustment to IF, 7-19
applying power to instruments,
9-17, 9-21
assemblies
exchange, 5-2
attaching flanges to instrument,
9-14
autorange cal failed, 4-74
available service tools, 5-8
B
B1 channel errors, example
printout, 8-54
B2 channel errors, example
printout, 8-54
background intensity adjustment,
7-14
backlight lamp, 4-49
backlight replacement, 6-18
backup operating system disk ,
9-22
base system, 3-2
BASIC, 7-4
loading BASIC 2.0, 7-4
loading BASIC 3.0 or higher, 7-4
BASIC 5.0 and HP-UX systems,
8-97
C
cabinet, 9-9
1
Index
cabinet system configuration,
9-14
cable magnitude and phase
stability, 8-36
cables
85101C, location of, 4-104
8510C
cable assemblies, 5-35
A8 motherboard connector,
4-107
assemblies, 5-35
available, 9-7
checks, 4-8
connector repeatability, 8-36
extension, for rear panel, 9-18
grounding, 9-19
insertion loss of, 8-36
magnitude and phase stability
of, 8-38
non-standard, 8-25
port extension, 9-17
return loss, 8-36
substitution, 8-94
supplied, 5-35
cabling pre-operational checks,
4-8
calculated error terms, 8-97
calibration
and verification at 45 MHz, 8-96
cycle, 8-95
kit, 8-3
kit substitution, 8-95
Canadian EMC requirements,
compliance, 2-6
capacitor
discharge procedure, 6-26
replacement, 6-26
capacitors, power supply,
replacement, 6-26
caution, optional function not
installed, 4-74
changing table data, 8-22
channel error term symbols, 8-78
channel errors example printout
for channel a1, 8-65
for channel a2, 8-66
for channel b1, 8-63
for channel b2, 8-64
check step sequence, 3-18
check step sequence, algorithm,
3-18
checking firmware revisions, 9-13
checking the shipment, 9-7
checks
operational, 8-5
process, 8-6
cleaning
2
and gaging of connectors, 10-3
CRT, 10-4
glass filter (CRT), 10-4
LCD, 10-4
test set rear panel extensions,
10-3
clearance for adequate system
cooling, 9-4
clock adjustment, 7-28
comparing measurement
uncertainties for
verification devices, 8-48
compatibility
source, 9-13
system, 9-13
component level troubleshooting,
3-2
components
degaussing, 7-12
in system and effects of, 8-3
resealing, 7-4
substituting, 8-94
configuring the system
and connecting, 9-12
in a cabinet, 9-14
on a bench-top, 9-16
connections, 9-20
of HP laser printers, 9-20
of system configuration, 9-16,
9-18
connector
maintenance, 8-98
repeatability of a cable , 8-22
connector repeatability, 8-22
cable, 8-36
connectors, inspecting and
cleaning, 10-3
considerations, safety, for
adjustments, 7-3
contents of shipment, 9-9
controller
CRT displays and
high-resolution monitors,
8-98
keyboard keys, 8-99
controllers with limited scrolling,
8-99
cooling, and heating, system, 9-4
corrected error model flowgraph,
8-84, 8-85, 8-86
creating customized uncertainty
plots, 8-16
CRT
cleaning, 10-4
glass filter, cleaning, 10-4
CRT displays, 8-98
custom calibration kit use, 8-23
custom data recall, 8-20
custom test set calculations, 8-23
customizing error terms, 8-18
CW frequency accuracy test, 8-42
D
data-field entry, 8-20
default intensity adjustment, 7-15
demagnetizing (display
degaussing), 7-12, 10-5
designators of parts, 5-4
detector adjustment,
synchronous, 7-25
diagnose a failure, 4-61
diagnostics, running error
messages as, 4-69
disassembly tools required, 6-3
disc command
19-load program disc, 4-65
20-record program disc, 4-66
21-initialize disc, 4-66
disc communication error, 4-74
disc hardware problem, 4-74
disc read or write error, 4-74
disk drive, replacement
jumper position, 6-7, 6-10
procedure, 6-10
disk media wearing out-replace
soon, 4-75
display (CRT) degaussing
(demagnetizing), 10-5
display degaussing
(demagnetizing), 7-12
display, CRT, replacement, 6-10
display, LCD, replacement, 6-16
displaying error term tables, 8-19
documentation, part numbers, 5-6
drift errors, 8-4
sources of, 8-75
driver files for semi-automated
adjustments, 7-4
DUT length and default
S-parameter values, 8-99
dynamic accuracy, 8-22
error model, 8-84
limits, 8-104
specification plots of S11, 8-67,
8-73
specification plots of S21, 8-71,
8-74
specification table of S11, 8-70
specification table of S21, 8-72
dynamic accuracy error model
flowgraph, 8-93
dynamic range check, 8-40
Index
Index
E
editing error terms, 8-15
editing for custom calibration
kits, 8-24
electrical length of devices, phase
errors due to, 8-100
electrical requirements, 9-5
electromagnetic radiated
interference, 9-6
EMC requirements, compliance
with
Canadian, 2-6
emissions requirements,
compliance with
German FTZ, 2-6
emulator
source, 4-22
test set, 4-22
entering information into data
fields, 8-20
environment, and device
temperature check, 8-35
environmental requirements, 9-3
equations
measurement uncertainty, 8-75
reflection uncertainty, 8-76
transmission uncertainty, 8-76
equipment required
for specifications/measurement
uncertainties, 8-9
for system performance
verification, 8-9
equipment verification, for
specifications and
measurement uncertainties, 8-9
equipment, service test, 1-7
Erm, 8-78
Erp, 8-79
error correction process, 8-75
error models, explanation of, 8-78
error term editing, 8-16
error terms
calculated, 8-97
changing values, 8-18
preventive maintenance using,
10-6
raw, 8-6
errors
magnitude, due to device
frequency response, 8-99
measurement, 8-3
phase, 8-100
random, 8-4
running error messages, 4-6,
4-69
sources of
additional measurement, 8-77
Index
drift, 8-4, 8-77
measurement, 8-76
random, 8-76
systematic, 8-76
systematic, 8-4
test port, example printout, 8-62
what to do, 4-52
Etm, 8-80
Etp, 8-81
exchange, assemblies, 5-2
extender board part number, 7-22
extension cables for rear panel ,
9-17
extension cables for the rear
panel, 8-104
extension files for
semi-automated adjustments,
7-4
F
failure
A14 GSP, 4-44
A15 LCD, 4-43
performance test, 4-6
power supply, 4-6, 4-97
self test, 4-4
software, 4-6, 4-121
unratioed power, 4-6
failure during adjustment, 7-2
failure-check system bus
configuration, 4-75
failure-fault indicator on, 4-75
failure-overmodulation, 4-75
failure-RF locked, 4-75
failure-self test failure, 4-75
fan voltages, 4-111
faulty display, 4-47
faulty pixel, 4-47
files, needed for adjustments, 7-4
firmware revisions, 4-12, 4-122
of source, 9-13
flange attachments to analyzer ,
9-14
flowgraphs
corrected error model, 8-93
dynamic accuracy, 8-93
system uncorrected error model,
8-86
focus adjustment, 7-10
frequency converter test sets, 3-5
frequency test
description, 8-5
procedures, 8-42
front panel (local) operation,
8-103
front panel checks, 4-8
FTZ, German emissions
requirements, 2-6
fuses, 5-8, 9-12
A26 rectifier fuse locations,
4-113
A3 post regulator, 4-109
removing, line fuse, 4-103
G
gain adjustment for sweep ADC,
7-16
glass filter cleaning (CRT), 10-4
glass filter, removing, 10-4
GPIB (HP-IB) IEEE standards,
9-20
GPIB (HP-IB) protocol, 9-20
GPIB language switch, 4-8, 9-18
grounding power cables, 9-19
H
hang-ups or other problems,
8-103
hazardous instrument areas, with
power on, 2-3
hazards, locations of hazardous
voltages, 2-4
heating and cooling, system, 9-4
high-resolution monitors, 8-98
hooking-up the system, 9-12, 9-17
how to order, 5-2
HP-UX systems, 8-97
humidity requirements, 9-3
I
identify a failure, 4-55
IF amplifier adjustment, 7-22
IF cal failed, 4-75
IF count sequence, 3-18, 3-21
IF mixer adjustment, 7-19
IF overload (or O), 4-77
IF search routine, 3-18
IF/detector data test, 4-64
image problems, 4-46
initialization failed, 4-77
initialize disc, 4-66
insertion loss, cables, 8-37
installation
preparing the site for, 9-3
preset check during, 9-22
scheduling, 9-2
system, 9-2
instrument VA rating, 9-4
instruments required, for
adjustments, 7-9
intensity adjustments, default,
7-14
3
Index
intensity display adjustments,
7-14
interference, electromagnetic
radiated, 9-6
intermittent problems, 4-111
interpreting performance
verification results, 8-54
inverter board replacement, 6-18
inverter board troubleshooting,
4-50
inverter board, A16, 4-49
inverter, test points, 4-49
isolation omission for 8350
sources, 8-101
measurement uncertainties, 8-75
comparing for verification
devices, 8-48
measurement uncertainty
equations, 8-75
memory operations, 4-65
menu map of system uncertainty
test procedure, 8-48
mm-wave systems, 8-98
modification kit required, 9-13
module exchange program, 5-3
motherboard, replacement,
85101, 6-14
display/processor, 6-14
K
keyboard controls, 8-12
keyboard keys, 8-99
keyboard test, 4-64
N
no IF found, 4-77
L
laser printer, connections, 9-20
LCD
backlight, 6-18
cleaning, 10-4
display assembly details, 6-18
display test patterns, 4-47
inverter board, 6-18
replacement, 6-16
troubleshooting, 4-43
voltage, 6-18
levels of troubleshooting, 3-2
line voltage and fuses, 9-12
load program disc, 4-65
local operation, 8-103
M
magnitude and phase stability of
cables, 8-38
magnitude errors due to device
frequency response, 8-99
maintenance
connections and connector, 8-98
preventive, 10-2
maintenance of system, 10-2
manual, overview of, 1-2
manufacturer’s code list, 5-6
markers on uncertainty plots,
8-15
maximum intensity adjustments,
7-15
measurement
calibration, method, 8-100
errors, 8-3, 8-75
additional, 8-77
process, 8-3
4
O
operating system
backing-up, 9-22
history, 4-123
how to reload, 4-67
operation
after installation, 9-22
local or remote, 8-103
procedures, 9-22
system disk backup, 9-22
temperature requirements
during, 9-3
theory of, 3-1
optional function not installed,
4-78
options available, 9-2
ordering parts, 5-2
other test devices, 8-27
overview, service and equipment,
1-1
P
paint, touch-up, 5-6
parallel port adapter, 9-21
parallel printers, 9-21
parameters, user, 9-23
part numbers
extender board, 7-22
parts
ordering information, 5-2
replaceable, 5-2
Performance Test Failures,
4-119–4-120
performance test failures, 4-6
performance test record, 8-105
performance verification, 8-1
criteria, 8-102
if the system fails, 8-56
results, interpreting, 8-54
software for, 8-8
system, 8-5
peripherals, connecting to system,
9-17, 9-20
phase errors, due to electrical
length of devices, 8-100
phase lock
cycle summary, 3-21
learn mode, 3-20
loop theory, 3-16
main sequence, 3-19
monitoring, 3-19
pretune sequence, 3-16
running error messages, 3-21
simplified pretune loop, 3-19
system phase lock operation,
3-16
VTO monitoring, 3-20
phase lock failure, 4-78
phase lock lost, 4-79
phase lock sequence, 3-19
pixel, faulty, 4-47
plotting
aborting, 8-97
label information, 8-102
pens, 8-103
traces on the controller CRT,
8-103
plotting and printing, 8-102
port extension cables, 9-19
power cables, grounding, 9-19
power failures, unratioed, 4-85
power supply
85101C, simplified block
diagram, 4-98
power supply capacitors
replacement, 6-26
power supply failures, 4-6, 4-97
power switch on, 9-21
preconfigured systems, 9-14
pre-operational checks, control,
configuration
and cabling, 4-8
preregulator replacement, 6-13
preset check during installation,
9-22
pretune failure, 4-79
pretune lost failure, 4-79
pretune phase lock sequence, 3-16
preventive maintenance, 10-2
using error terms, 10-6
printer adapters, 9-21
printers
HP laser printers, 9-20
connections, 9-21
parallel, 9-21
Index
Index
serial printer setup, 9-20
printing and plotting, aborting,
8-102
printout of example raw channel
errors
a1, 8-65
a2, 8-66
b1, 8-63
b2, 8-64
problems, image, 4-46
problems, intermittent, 4-111
procedures, table of adjustment ,
7-9
process, checks description, 8-6
processor error, 4-52
program modifications, 8-103
pulse cal failed on test/reference
channel(s) or
both channels, 4-80
R
random errors, 8-4
sources of, 8-76
ratioed and unratioed responses,
4-86
raw error terms record, 8-6
rear panel checks, 4-8
rear panel, replacement, 6-13
rebuilt module exchange
program, 5-2
recommended process checks,
description, 8-6
record program disc, 4-66
rectifier board replacement, 6-23
reference port extension cables,
9-17, 9-19
reflection, phase uncertainty
(Erp), 8-79
reloading operating system, 4-67
remote or local operation, 8-103
repacking system instruments,
9-11
repeat test loop, 4-65
replaceable parts, 5-2
replacement
A1 front panel, 6-6
A15 LCD assembly, 6-16
backlight on LCD assembly,
6-18
CRT display, 6-10
inverter board, 6-18
motherboard/card cage
assembly, 6-14
power supply capacitors, 6-26
preregulator, 6-13
rectifier board, 6-23
Index
rotary pulse generator (RPG),
6-8
replacement of assembly,
adjustments, required after,
7-2
replacement procedures, 6-1
85101C, 6-5
85102, 6-21
required, disassembly tools, 6-3
requirement, altitude, 9-3
requirements
electrical, 9-5
line voltage and fuses, 9-12
emissions, compliance with, 9-3
environmental, 9-3
humidity, 9-3
line voltage and fuses, 9-12
other, 9-6
source compatibility, 9-13
space, 9-5
temperature, 9-3
rerun self test, 4-65
resealing of components after
adjustment, 7-4
residual
error example printout, 8-61
error term symbols, 8-81
responses, ratioed and unratioed,
4-86
retrieving saved custom data,
8-20
revision of source firmware, 9-13
RF paths, troubleshooting, 4-88
RF signal paths, 4-86
R-L-T-S-8-4-2-1 LEDs, 4-53
rotary pulse generator (RPG),
replacement, 6-8
run main program, 4-65
run service program, 4-66
running error messages, 4-6, 4-69
as built in diagnostics, 4-69
categories of
GPIB (HP-IB), 4-71
IF/Detector ADC, 4-71
phase lock, 4-71
source sweep, 4-71
caution
ADC cal failed, 4-73
ADC not responding, 4-73
autorange cal failed, 4-74
caution-optional function not
installed, 4-74
disc communication error,
4-74
disc media wearing
out-replace soon, 4-75
disk hardware problem, 4-74
disk read or write error, 4-74
failure-check system bus
configuration, 4-75
failure-fault indicator on, 4-75
failure-overmodulation, 4-75
failure-RF Unlocked, 4-75
failure-self test failure , 4-75
IF cal failed, 4-75
IF overload (or O), 4-77
initialization failed, 4-77
no IF found, 4-77
optional function not installed,
4-78
phase lock failure, 4-78
phase lock lost, 4-79
pretune failure, 4-79
pretune lost failure, 4-79
pulse cal failure on
test/reference channel(s),
or both channels, 4-80
source GPIB syntax error,
4-80
source sweep sync error, 4-80
sweep time too fast, 4-81
system bus address error, 4-81
system bus SRQ error, 4-81
test set GPIB (HP-IB) syntax
error, 4-82
unable to lock to ext 10 MHz
Ref, 4-82
VTO over-range, 4-82
characteristics
caution, 4-69
error, 4-70
prompt, 4-70
tell, 4-70
types, 4-69
S
S11 dynamic accuracy
specifications example
plots, 8-69
table, 8-70
S11 uncertainty specifications
example
plots, 8-67
table, 8-68
S21 uncertainty specifications
example
plots, 8-71, 8-73
table, 8-72
safety
8510 information, 2-3
considerations, 7-3
safety/licensing, 2-1
saving edited error terms, 8-20
scheduling installation , 9-2
5
Index
self test
how to exit, 4-59
how to run once, 4-59
how to run repeatedly, 4-59
menu, 4-60
self test failure, 4-4
how to identify, 4-55
when the CRT is not working,,
4-56
with the CPU board LEDs,,
4-56
how to troubleshoot, 4-58
self test failures, and
troubleshooting, 4-60
sequence of system measurement,
3-15
service
test equipment, 1-7
tools available, 5-6
service adapter
connections, 4-87
troubleshooting with, 4-86
service adapters, conclusions,
4-87
service command
22-run service program, 4-66
23-diagnose a failure, 4-66
service manual, on-site service
manuals
organization, 1-3
service tools available, 1-5
shipment
checking, 9-7
contents of, 9-7
simplified pretune phase-locked
loop, 3-17
software
for performance
verification/specifications,
8-5, 8-8
part numbers, 5-6
software failures, 4-6
how to resolve, 4-121
source, 4-20
substitution, 8-94
theory of operation, 3-4
source GPIB syntax error, 4-80
source sweep sync error, 4-80
source troubleshooting, 4-22
sources, 3-4
sources of errors
drift, 8-77
measurement, 8-76
additional, 8-77
random, 8-76
systematic, 8-76
space requirements, 9-5
6
S-parameter data entry, 8-16
S-parameter, test set check, 9-23
specialized systems, 3-2
specifications, 8-1
criteria or assumptions, 8-96
description of, 8-7
example printout, 8-61
program, how to run, 8-58
software, 8-8
substitution of system
components, 8-94
substitution, cables, 8-94
subtests, 4-55
sweep ADC gain adjustment,
7-16–7-18
sweep oscillator, 8350B, as system
source, 8-98
sweep oscillators, theory of
operation, 3-4
sweep time too fast, 4-81
swept frequency accuracy test,
8-44
switching on power, 9-21
symbols, channel error term, 8-86
synchronous detector adjustment,
7-25
synthesized sweepers, 3-4
system
base, 3-3
configuration, 9-14, 9-16
connections, 9-17
heating and cooling, 9-4
how to reload the operating
system, 4-67
maintenance, 10-2
not preconfigured, 9-14
options, 9-2
preconfigured, 9-14
requirements of non-HP, 9-6
unpacking, 9-7
unpacking the cabinet, 9-9, 9-10
system bus address error , 4-81
system bus SRQ error, 4-81
system cabinet, 9-14
system command
15-run main program, 4-65
16-memory operations, 4-65
17-rerun self test, 4-65
18-repeat test loop, 4-65
system components
effects on performance, 8-3
effects on system, 8-3
substituting, 8-94
system error model flowgraphs
explained, 8-83
of all errors with correction off,
8-86
of all residual errors with
correction on, 8-93
system measurement, sequence
of, 3-15
system uncertainty test
procedure, 8-48
systematic errors, 8-4, 8-76
systems, specialized, 3-2
T
table annotation and wording,
verification program, 8-99
table data you change, 8-23
tables, reviewing error terms,
8-21
tape eraser, bulk, for use in
degaussing CRT, 7-10
temperature
checking, 8-35
operating, 4-107
temperature requirements, 9-3
terms, error term table editing,
8-19
test cable considerations, 8-25
test devices, non-ideal, 8-27
test equipment required, for
adjustments, 7-9
test menu, how to access, 4-58
test patterns, display, 4-47
test port
adapters, 8-97
raw channel errors example
printout, 8-63–8-66
test port errors example printout,
8-62
test record, 8-105
test set
channel signal path
specifications, 8-104
cleaning rear panel extensions,
10-3
S-parameter check, 9-23
test set GPIB (HP-IB) syntax
error, 4-82
test set, or service adapter , 4-20
test sets
control path, 3-6
frequency converters, 3-5
mixer-based, 3-5
sampler-based, 3-5
theory of operation, 3-5
TESTS
5-A14 DISPLAY RAM, 4-62
tests
10-A5 MULTIPLIER, 4-63
11-A7 DISC CONTROLLER,
4-63
Index
Index
12-A6 NON-VOLATILE
MEMORY, 4-64
13-IF/DETECTOR DATA, 4-64
14-KEYBOARD TEST, 4-64
1-A5 Processor EPROM, 4-61
2-A5 PROCESSOR RAM, 4-61
3-A7 DATA BUS, 4-61
4-A14 DISPLAY PROCESSOR,
4-62
4-A4 DISPLAY PROCESSOR,
4-62
5-A4 DISPLAY RAM, 4-62
6-A7 TIMER/CLOCK/RS-232,
4-62
7-A7 PUBLIC GPIB (HP-IB),
4-62
8-A7 SYSTEM BUS, 4-63
9-A9 INTERRUPT SYSTEM,
4-63
theory of operation, 3-1
tools, 7-3
disassembly, 6-3
for adjustments, 7-3
service, available, 1-5
total reflection magnitude
uncertainty, Erm, 8-78
total system uncertainty, test
description, 8-5
touch-up paint, 5-6
transmission magnitude
uncertainty, Etm, 8-80
transmission phase uncertainty,
Etp, 8-81
transmission uncertainty
equations, 8-80
trim sweep procedure, 8-104
troubleshooting
component level, 3-2
image problems, 4-46
instrument level, 3-2
LCD, 4-43
LCD display problems, 4-46
performance verification
failures, 8-56
power supply, summary, 4-98
test set unratioed power, 4-88
with the service adapter, 4-86
typical measurement sequence,
3-15
U
unable to lock to ext 10 MHz ref,
4-82
uncertainties
comparison of verification
devices, 8-51
equations for, 8-75
Index
generation of system
measurement, 8-82
interpreting printouts, 8-61
test procedure, 8-48
total system test description,
8-5
uncertainty and dynamic
accuracy limits, 8-104
uncertainty curve generation,
8-22
uncertainty equations
measurement, 8-78
reflection, 8-79
transmission, 8-80
uncertainty plot customizing,
8-16
uncertainty plot marker control,
8-15
uncertainty specifications
example
plots
of S11, 8-67
of S21, 8-71
table
of S11, 8-68
uncorrected error model
flowgraph, 8-85
unpacking, system cabinet, 9-9,
9-10
unratioed power, 9-23
troubleshooting, 4-88
unratioed power failures, 4-6
user 1,2,3, and 4, 4-85
user parameters, 9-23
user-defined parameters, 4-85
user-generated data recall, 8-20
using the tutorial, 8-21
VTO over-range, 4-82
W
wording in verification program
tables
definitions, 8-99
V
verification
and calibration at 45 MHz, 8-96
failure troubleshooting, 8-56
of system performance, 8-5, 8-13
results, interpreting, 8-54
Verify using softkey options, 8-18
verifying system performance,
8-18
verifying the shipment, 9-7
vertical position and focus
adjustments, 7-10
voltage, line, 9-12
voltages
A10 preregulator output, 4-107
A26 rectifier, 4-113
A3 post regulator, 4-102
fan, 4-111
hazardous, locations, 2-4
7
Index
8
Index